COR Fire Station #8 Bathroom AlterationFrance Environmental 7834 Forest Hill Avenue Richmond,...

PROJECT MANUAL AND SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

COR Fire Station #8 Bathroom Alteration

1018 Williamsburg Road Richmond, Virginia 23231

Project ID: CORFS-6+8-BA Commission No. 20181101

A Project for

The City of Richmond

Permit Document Set April 18, 2019

Prepared by:

Grove Park Square

11537-B Nuckols Road Glen Allen, VA 23059

Dunbar, Milby, Williams, Pittman, & Vaughn

1025 Boulders Parkway, Suite 310 Richmond, Virginia 23225

Lu + Smith Engineers, PLLC 4924 Dominion Blvd., Suite A

Glen Allen, Virginia 23060

France Environmental 7834 Forest Hill Avenue

Richmond, Virginia 23225

Floyd Cybulski

Text Box

City of Richmond Project #0-28857

TABLE OF CONTENTSFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

000110 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 000110TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME 1PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 00 -- PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 01 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 - Summary011250 - Measurement And Payment011300 - Limitations On Sequence Of Construction012500 - Change Order Procedures013000 - Administrative Requirements013100 - Coordination and Meetings013216 - Construction Progress Schedule014000 - Quality Requirements014100 - Regulatory Requirements014533 - Code-Required Special Inspections015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls015100 - Temporary Utilities015213 - Field Offices and Sheds015713 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control015813 - Temporary Project Signage016000 - Product Requirements016116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements017450 - Shutdowns and Tie-Ins017800 - Closeout Submittals017900 - Demonstration and Training019000 - Special Project Provisions

DIVISION 02 -- EXISTING CONDITIONS 024100 - Demolition028213 - Asbestos Abatement028216 - Asbestos Air Monitoring / Testing

DIVISION 03 -- CONCRETE 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete

DIVISION 04 -- MASONRY 040100 - Maintenance of Masonry042000 - Unit Masonry

DIVISION 05 -- METALS 055000 - Metal Fabrications

DIVISION 06 -- WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

Floyd Cybulski

Floyd 2019-04-18

Floyd Cybulski

Floyd 2019-04-18


000110 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

061000 - Rough Carpentry062000 - Finish Carpentry064100 - Architectural Wood Casework

DIVISION 07 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 072100 - Thermal Insulation072500 - Weather Barriers076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

A. 079200 - Joint SealantsDIVISION 08 -- OPENINGS

081113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames081416 - Flush Wood Doors083100 - Access Doors and Panels084313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts087100 - Door Hardware088000 - Glazing

DIVISION 09 -- FINISHES 092116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies092236 - Lath092400 - Cement Plastering093000 - Tiling095100 - Acoustical Ceilings096500 - Resilient Flooring099000 - Painting and Coating

DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALTIES 101400 - Signage102800 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories

DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS

123600 - CountertopsDIVISION 13 -- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)DIVISION 14 -- CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)

DIVISION 21 -- FIRE SUPPRESSION SEE SPECIFICATION NOTES ON DRAWINGS.DIVISION 22 -- PLUMBING SEE SPECIFICATION NOTES ON DRAWINGS.DIVISION 23 -- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) SEESPECIFICATION NOTES ON DRAWINGS.DIVISION 26 -- ELECTRICAL SEE SPECIFICATION NOTES ON DRAWINGS.DIVISION 27 -- COMMUNICATIONS (NOT USED)DIVISION 28 -- ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY (NOT USED)DIVISION 31 -- EARTHWORK (NOT USED)DIVISION 32 -- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS (NOT USED)


000110 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

DIVISION 33 -- UTILITIES (NOT USED)APPENDIX A -- HAZARDOUS MATERIALS REPORTAPPENDIX B -- ASBESTOS ABATEMENT SCOPE OF WORK DRAWING

END OF SECTION

SUMMARY 011000 - 1 Fire Station #8 Bathroom Alterations 1019 Williamsburg Road 20181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA Richmond, Virginia 23231 April 18, 2019

SECTION 011000

SUMMARY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Definitions

B. Description of Work

C. Plans and Specifications

D. CONTRACTOR's Use of Site

E. Work Sequence

F. OWNER Occupancy

G. Constraints

H. Existing Equipment Retained by Owner

I. Time Provisions

J. Protection

K. Boundaries

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. In addition to the definitions included in the General Conditions of the Contract, the following words and terms, or pronouns used in their stead, shall, wherever they appear in this Contract, be construed as follows, unless a different meaning is clear from the context:

1. "AGENTS" shall mean an authorized representative of the City including but not

limited to the Architect, and other firms and their partners, principals, members, and employees acting directly or through duly authorized representatives.

2. "Contract Work" shall mean everything expressly or impliedly required to be

furnished and done by the CONTRACTOR by any one or more of the Contract parts except Extra Work, as hereinafter defined; it being understood that, in case of any inconsistency in or between any part or parts of this Contract, the ARCHITECT shall determine which shall prevail.


3. "Extra Work" shall mean work other than that required either expressly or impliedly

by the Contract in its present form.

4. "Specifications" shall mean all of the directions, requirements and standards of performance applying to the work, as hereinafter detailed and designated as such, or which may be issued in an addendum.

5. "Addendum" or "Addenda" shall mean the additional contract provisions issued in

writing by the OWNER prior to the receipt of bids.

6. "Project" shall mean the entire improvement of which the work to be constructed under this Contract forms a part.

7. "Site" shall mean the designated area upon or in which the CONTRACTOR's

operations are carried on and such other areas adjacent thereto as may be required. "Site" areas may include lands owned by or leased by the OWNER or CONTRACTOR and rights-of-way acquired for the construction of the project.

8. Whenever in the Contract the words "required", "permitted", "designated",

"prescribed", and words of like import are used, they shall imply the requirement, permission, designation, or prescription of the OWNER; and "approved", "acceptable", "satisfactory", "in the judgment of", and words of like import shall mean approved by, or acceptable to, or satisfactory to, or in the judgment of the OWNER.

9. Wherever in the Contract the word "day" is used it shall mean calendar day.

10. Date of substantial completion shall be the date as certified by the ARCHITECT

when the construction of the work, a specified phase of the work, or a specified part thereof is sufficiently completed, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the work or specified part may be beneficially occupied for the purposes for which it was intended. Occupancy of individual structures, buildings, facilities, or the like, being constructed under this contract, shall not constitute Substantial Completion unless expressly provided for elsewhere in these documents.

11. "Prevailing Standard Time" shall be construed as the time being observed in the

City of Richmond on the respective days bids are received or other documents issued or signed, Eastern Standard Time in the winter and Eastern Daylight time in the summer.

12. "FINAL COMPLETION": Date of final completion shall be the date as certified by

the ARCHITECT when the construction of the work is complete in accordance with the Contract Documents, such that no further work remains to be done at the site or otherwise. The certification of final completion shall serve as the date when the CONTRACTOR has fulfilled all requirements for final payment as described in the General Conditions of the Contract. Certification of final completion shall be achieved within the time fixed for completion in the Contract or within the time for completion as modified through a change order to the contract.


13. “Furnish”: To supply, deliver, unload, and inspect for damage.

14. “Install”: To unpack, assemble, erect, apply, place, finish, cure, protect, clean, start up, and make ready for use.

15. “Product”: Material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems

forming the work result. Not materials or equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying, or erection and not incorporated into the work result. Products may be new, never before used, or re-used materials or equipment.

16. “Project Manual”: The book-sized volume that includes the procurement

requirements (if any), the contracting requirements, and the specifications.

17. “Provide”: To furnish and install.

1.3 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK

The Work to be done under this Contract includes the modifications to the bathrooms and shower facilities in Fire Station 6 as described in the drawings and specifications.

A. The Work includes but is not limited to:

1. Furnishing of all labor, material, superintendence, plant, power, light, heat, fuel,

water, tools, appliances, equipment, supplies, services and other means of construction necessary or proper for the performance and completion of the Work.

2. Sole responsibility for adequacy of plant and equipment.

3. Maintaining the Work area and site in a clean and acceptable manner.

4. Maintaining existing facilities in service at all times except where specifically

provided for otherwise herein.

5. Protection of finished and unfinished Work.

6. Repair and restoration of Work damaged during construction.

7. Furnishing as necessary proper equipment and machinery, of a sufficient capacity, to facilitate the Work and to handle all emergencies normally encountered in Work of this character.

8. Furnishing, installing, and protecting all necessary guides, track rails, bearing

plates, anchor and attachment bolts, and all other appurtenances needed for the installation of the devices included in the equipment specified. Make anchor bolts of appropriate size, strength and material for the purpose intended. Furnish substantial templates and shop drawings for installation.


B. Implied and Normally Required Work: It is the intent of these Specifications to provide the OWNER with complete operable systems, subsystems and other items of Work. Any part or item of Work which is reasonably implied or normally required to make each installation satisfactorily and completely operable is deemed to be included in the Work and the Contract Amount. All miscellaneous appurtenances and other items of Work incidental to meeting the intent of these Specifications are included in the Work and the Contract Amount even though these appurtenances may not be specifically called for in these Specifications.

C. Quality of Work: Regard the apparent silence of the Contract Documents as to any detail,

or the apparent omission from them of a detailed description concerning any Work to be done and materials to be furnished as meaning that only the best general practice is to prevail and that only materials and workmanship of the best quality are to be used. Interpretation of these specifications will be made upon this basis.

D. Compliance with Laws: Comply with all local, State and Federal laws, rules, ordinances

and regulations applicable to this Contract and to the work done hereunder, Obtain all permits, licenses or other authorization necessary for the prosecution of the work. The costs for all such permits shall be included in the contract price and no separate payment will be made therefore.

1.4 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. Plans

1. The Plans for the work to be done under this Contract for the building repairs to the Inspector’s Office project bear the general title:

Fire Station #8 Bathroom Alterations 1019 Williamsburg Road

2. When obtaining data and information from the Plans, use figures in preference to

scaled dimensions, and large scale drawings in preference to small scale drawings.

B. Supplementary Drawings

1. When, in the opinion of the ARCHITECT, it becomes necessary to explain more fully the work to be done or to illustrate the work further or to show any changes which may be required, drawings known as Supplementary Drawings, with specifications pertaining thereto, will be prepared by the ARCHITECT and five paper prints thereof will be given to the CONTRACTOR.

2. The Supplementary Drawings shall be binding upon the CONTRACTOR with the

same force as the Plans. Where such Supplementary Drawings require either less or more than the estimated quantities of work, credit to the OWNER or compensation therefore to the CONTRACTOR shall be subject to the terms of the Agreement.


C. CONTRACTOR to Check Plans and Data

1. Verify all dimensions, quantities and details shown on the Plans, Supplementary Drawings, schedules, Specifications or other data received from the ARCHITECT, and notify him of all errors, omissions, conflicts, and discrepancies found therein. Failure to discover or correct errors, conflicts or discrepancies shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of full responsibility for unsatisfactory work, faulty construction or improper operation resulting therefrom nor from rectifying such conditions at his own expense.

2. The CONTRACTOR will not be allowed to take advantage of any errors or

omissions, as full instructions will be furnished by the ARCHITECT within five days, should such errors or omissions be discovered.

3. All schedules are given for the convenience of the ARCHITECT and the

CONTRACTOR and are not guaranteed to be complete. The CONTRACTOR shall assume all responsibility for the making of estimates of the quality of materials and equipment included in work to be done under the Contract.

D. Specifications

1. It is hereby agreed that failure by the CONTRACTOR to advise his subcontractors

and suppliers of the necessity to review the Specifications as a whole, and not as individual sections, to determine the work required or to be supplied, shall not constitute a basis for a claim for additional compensation or an extension to the Contract completion time.

1.5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE

A. In addition to the requirements of the General Conditions, limit use of site and premises for work and storage to allow for the following:

1. Coordination of the Work under this CONTRACT with the work of the other

contractors where Work under this CONTRACT encroaches on the Work of other contractors.

2. OWNER occupancy and access to operate existing facilities.

3. Coordination of site use with OWNER.

4. Responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products under this CONTRACT.

5. Providing additional off site storage at no additional cost to OWNER as needed.

B. Develop a plan of action to evacuate the site within twenty four hours at the request of the

OWNER.


C. Noise: CONTRACTOR’s use of site shall limit noise levels to 60 decibels or less at the property line between the hours of 10:00 PM to 7:00 AM. At all other times comply with City or County ordinances for work in the City or County respectively.

1.6 WORK SEQUENCE

A. Construct Work to accommodate OWNER's use of premises during construction period and in accordance with the limitations on the sequence of construction specified. Coordinate construction schedules and operations with the OWNER.

B. Coordinate Work of all subcontractors.

1.7 OWNER OCCUPANCY

A. OWNER will occupy premises during entire period of construction in order to maintain normal operations. Cooperate with OWNER's representative in all construction operations to minimize conflict, and to facilitate OWNER usage.

B. Conduct operations so as to inconvenience the general public in the least. Comply with

OWNER’s requests to minimize impacts to the general public. 1.8 CONSTRAINTS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising safety precautions and programs in connection with the construction. The CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection for, all persons on the site or who may be affected by the construction.

B. Comply with applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for

safety of persons and shall maintain such necessary safeguards for safety and protection.

C. New pipelines shall not be connected to existing pipelines in service until after acceptance of bacteriological and pressure tests by the OWNER.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 TIME PROVISIONS

A. Starting Work: Start Work within 30 days following the date stated in the Notice to Proceed and execute with such progress as may be required to prevent delay to other contractors or to the general completion of the project. Time being of the essence of this Contract, prosecute the work diligently thereafter, using such means and methods of


construction as will secure its final completion in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents not later than the contract completion date for each phase of the project, or on the date to which the time for completion may be modified. It is expressly understood and agreed by and between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER that the Contract Time for the completion of the work as described herein is a reasonable time, taking into consideration the average climatic and economic conditions and other factors prevailing in the locality of the work.

B. Unless the contract completion date or dates are modified pursuant to the provisions of the

General Conditions, complete the work covered by this Contract in the number of consecutive calendar days set forth in the Invitation for Bid. At all times, schedule and direct the Work so that it provides an orderly progression to final completion within the specified time for completion.

C. Milestone Dates: Complete the work no later than the dates given.

1. All Work and Contract Completion: Unless the phased dates for completion are

modified pursuant to the General Conditions, all Work must be completed within the time period set forth in the Invitation for Bid.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. During performance and until final acceptance, provide absolute protection of the finished and unfinished work against any damage, loss, or injury. Take proper precaution to protect the finished work from loss or damage, pending completion and the final acceptance of all the work included in the entire Contract. Such precaution shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from any and all liability and responsibility for loss or damage to the work occurring before certification of final completion by the OWNER. Such loss or damage shall be at the risk of and borne by the CONTRACTOR, whether arising from acts or omis-sions of the CONTRACTOR or others. In the event of any such loss or damage, repair, replace, and make good the work without extension of time therefore, except as may be otherwise specified.

B. The provisions of this subsection shall not be deemed to create any new right of action in

favor of third parties against the CONTRACTOR or the OWNER. 3.3 BOUNDARIES

A. Confine equipment, apparatus, storage of materials, supplies and apparatus of workmen to the limits indicated by law, ordinances, permits, or direction of the OWNER.

END OF SECTION

Measurement and Payment 011250- 1 Fire Station #8 Bathroom Alterations 1019 Williamsburg Road 20181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA Richmond, Virginia 23231 April 18, 2019

SECTION 011250

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Measurement Authority

B. Schedule of Values

C. Application for Payment

D. Unit Quantities Specified

E. Schedule of Contract Items

F. Defect Assessment

G. Non-Payment for Rejected Products

1.2 MEASUREMENT AUTHORITY

A. Measurement: The OWNER will take all measurements and compute quantities accordingly.

B. Assistance: CONTRACTOR shall provide assistance to the OWNER in the form of necessary equipment and qualified personnel as required for taking measurements.

1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Approval of Schedule: Submit for approval a schedule of values for all the work consistent with and generated from the cost loaded CPM schedule as indicated in Section 013216 Construction Progress Schedule.

B. Revisions: With each Application for Payment revise schedule to list approved Change Orders Update asbuilt drawings with approved changes..

1.4 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the OWNER and ARCHITECT an updated copy of the cost loaded CPM schedule as a basis for monthly progress payments to the CONTRACTOR. This updated schedule should be submitted to the OWNER and ARCHITECT on or before the 25th day of each month.


B. When payment for stored materials is permitted, the CONTRACTOR shall submit with the CPM schedule update a separate schedule for Materials Stored showing line item, description, previous value received, value incorporated into the work and present value. Accompanying paid invoices demonstrating proof of ownership shall be provided in conjunction with any stored material for which the CONTRACTOR is requesting payment.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall review and if acceptable execute the partial payment request by signature of an authorized officer of the CONTRACTOR and return to the OWNER for payment. Should the CONTRACTOR disagree with the partial payment request as presented by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall respond in writing giving reasons for the areas of disagreement.

D. Retainage from Partial Payments: Retainage in the amount of five (5) percent shall be deducted from the partial payments as stipulated in the General Conditions and as shown on the Partial Payment Request form.

1.5 UNIT QUANTITIES SPECIFIED

A. Quantities: Quantities and measurements indicated in the Proposal are for bidding and contract purposes only. Quantities and measurements supplied or placed in the Work and verified by the OWNER and recorded in his daily report shall determine the payment.

B. Actual Work: If the actual Work requires more or fewer quantities than those quantities indicated, the required quantities shall be provided at the unit prices contracted.

C. Units of Work: The intention of the unit prices is to provide a complete, functioning unit which may include Work from several Specification Sections. All the Work which is required or which can reasonably be inferred to be required in a unit price item to deliver a complete, functioning unit shall be included.

1.6 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACT ITEMS

A. Contract Item 1: Mobilization and Demobilization

1. Description:

a. Under the Contract Item for Mobilization and Demobilization, the CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, services, specialists, material and equipment for preparatory and removal work and operations, including but not limited to those necessary for the mobilizing and demobilization of site equipment, materials, supplies and incidentals; for the establishment and removal of all offices, buildings and other temporary facilities necessary for work on the project; cost for prepaid bonds and insurance; and for all other work and operations to be performed or costs incurred to begin work on the various Contract Items.

b. The CITY reserves the right in case the CONTRACTOR defaults on the Contract, to retain the use, or have used the CONTRACTOR's plant, equipment, tools, materials and other property for, and until, completion of


the work, in accordance with Section 7 of the General Conditions of the Contract.

2. Payment:

a. Cost of pre-paid bonds, insurance, and permit fees required for the Contract may be reimbursed under this Contract Item. Proof of payment by the CONTRACTOR for such bonds and insurance costs will be required if reimbursement is requested prior to having 2 percent of the original Contract amount earned. The amount reimbursed for prepaid bonds and insurance costs will be included as part of any mobilization payments stipulated under the below listed terms and there will be no extra or separate payment for these items.

b. When the monthly progress payment estimate of the total amount earned, not including the amount earned for mobilization, is 2 percent or more of the original Contract amount, the total amount earned for mobilization and demobilization shall be 35 percent of the Contract Item price for mobilization and demobilization and this amount will be included in the monthly estimate for payment.

c. When the monthly progress payment estimate of the total amount earned, not including the amount earned for mobilization, is 5 percent or more of the original Contract amount, the total amount earned for mobilization and demobilization shall be additional 35 percent of the Contract Item price for mobilization and demobilization and this amount will be included in the monthly estimate for payment.

d. When the monthly progress payment estimate of the total amount earned, not including the amount earned for mobilization and demobilization, is 90 percent or more of the original Contract amount, the total amount earned for mobilization and demobilization shall be an additional 30 percent of the Contract Item price for mobilization and demobilization and this amount will be included in the monthly estimate for payment.

B. Contract Item 2: Modifications to Fire Station 6

1. Description

a. Under the Contract Item for REPAIRS to Inspector’s Office - Building, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, services, specialists, materials, and equipment, to install and complete the facilities and appurtenances as shown on the Plans and Specifications produced by nbj Architecture. This Contract Item includes all work interior from the outside face of the existing building. This Contract Item also includes all costs associated with site security, health and the protection of personnel due to existing environmental conditions, both as identified in Specification Section 019000, Special Project Provisions.


b. The work includes all work not specifically included in other Contract Items. The work includes but is not necessarily limited to all work for the construction, maintenance, testing, startup, and placing in trouble-free operations, together with all systems and structures for a complete installation. The work also includes all other work shown and specified to be incidental or otherwise specified to be included in the lump sum price for a complete installation.

c. The work does not include general mobilization, and when shown, specified or ordered, such work will be paid for under other appropriate Contract Items.

2. Payment: Payment for Modifications to Fire Station 6 - Building will be made at the Contract Lump Sum Price for Contract Item 2.

1.7 DEFECT ASSESSMENT

A. Replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to the specified requirements.

B. If, in the opinion of the OWNER, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the OWNER will direct that the defective Work may remain or be partially replaced and the price will be adjusted to a new price at the discretion of the OWNER.

1.8 NON-PAYMENT FOR REJECTED PRODUCTS

A. Payment will not be made for any of the following:

1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable.

2. Products determined as unacceptable before or after placement.

3. Products not completely unloaded from the vehicle.

4. Products placed beyond the lines and grades of the required Work.

5. CONTRACTOR supplied products remaining on hand after completion of the Work.

6. Loading, hauling and disposing of rejected products.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used


END OF SECTION

Limitations on Sequence of Construction 011300- 1 Fire Station #8 Bathroom Alterations 1019 Williamsburg Road 20181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA Richmond, Virginia 23231 April 18, 2019

SECTION 011300

LIMITATIONS ON SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Operation of Existing Facilities

B. Limitation on Sequence of Construction

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 011000 - Summary

B. Section 013216 – Construction Progress Schedule

1.3 OPERATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

A. The City currently utilizes the existing Fire Station. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate work with the OWNER to allow the City use of the building as long as it does not reasonably impact the Work required to new building.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall keep the OWNER fully advised as to his plans for carrying out the work and obtain the OWNER's approval for all phases of his operations as hereinafter specified.

C. Any temporary structures, connections, piping, and other work necessary to maintain service during the construction period shall be made as a part of the work.

D. All work shall be performed to avoid damage to existing structures and equipment. Before starting work on any modifications to existing facilities, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a schedule to the OWNER for approval, comprising a detailed sequence of operations for these modifications which demonstrates that operation of these existing facilities will be maintained. All construction shall be in accordance with the approved schedule. At no time shall the service performed by any operating pipeline, equipment or structures be interrupted without specific prior approval of the OWNER.

E. Temporary facilities and equipment shall be provided as required and directed to maintain pipelines, equipment, systems, processes, auxiliaries, appurtenances and structures in service. Any temporary work not required after completion of the work shall be promptly removed.

F. All costs associated with maintaining the existing facilities in operation shall be included in the various Contract Items and no separate payment will be made therefore.

Limitations on Sequence of Construction 011300- 2 Fire Station #8 Bathroom Alterations 1019 Williamsburg Road 20181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA Richmond, Virginia 23231 April 18, 2019

1.4 LIMITATIONS ON SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION

A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 013216 Construction Progress Schedule, the CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit a comprehensive schedule of his proposed sequence of construction for review by the OWNER.

B. The schedule shall be arranged to complete the work in phases and permit operation by the OWNER of completed phases or parts thereof.

C. The CONTRACTOR is cautioned that his schedule for certain areas of the work may be affected by work included under the other Contracts

D. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain safe passage through all access roads to the existing building and to all parts of the existing building.

E. The Project is required to be completed in the following Phases:

1. Phase I – Substantial Completion of modifications to Fire Station 6: All Work completed in accordance with the definition of Substantial Completion in Specification Section 01010, General Condition of the Contract, paragraph 1.17.

2. Phase II – Substantial Completion of modifications to Fire Station 8: All Work completed in accordance with the definition of Substantial Completion in Specification Section 01010, General Condition of the Contract, paragraph 1.17.

3. Phase III – Final Completion: All Contract close out work including, but not limited to, completion of punchlist work, submission of record drawings, final landscaping, change order work, final invoicing submission of all contract closeout paperwork.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION

CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 012500 - 1 Fire Station #8 Bathroom Alterations 1019 Williamsburg Road 20181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA Richmond, Virginia 23231 April 18, 2019

SECTION 012500

CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Changes in Construction

B. Emergency Work

C. Omitted Work

D. Change Order Procedure

1.2 CHANGES IN CONSTRUCTION

A. The OWNER reserves the right to make such additions, deletions, or changes to this Contract from time to time as it deems necessary and in a manner not materially affecting the substance thereof or materially changing the price to be paid in order to carry out and complete more fully and perfectly the work herein agreed to be done and performed. This Contract shall not be invalidated by any such additions, deletions or changes. The CONTRACTOR hereby waives any and all claims for additional compensation or lost profits based upon any such additions, deletions or changes.

B. Construction conditions may require that minor changes be made in the location and installation of the work and equipment to be furnished and other work to be performed hereunder, and the CONTRACTOR, when ordered by the OWNER, shall make such adjustments and changes as do not alter the character, quantity, or cost of the work as a whole, and provided, further, that Plans and Specifications showing such adjustments and changes are furnished the CONTRACTOR by the OWNER within a reasonable time before any work involving such adjustments and changes is begun. The OWNER shall be the sole judge of what constitutes a minor change for which no additional compensation shall be allowed.

C. Comply with Change Order requirements described in General Conditions Section 5.4. The OWNER shall not be liable for the cost of Change Orders not formally approved by a fully executed Change Order before the work begins.

1.3 EMERGENCY WORK

A. In emergencies affecting the safety of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, the CONTRACTOR, without special instruction or authorization from the OWNER is obligated to act at his discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. He will give the OWNER prompt written notice of any significant changes in the Work or deviations from the Contract Documents caused thereby. If the


CONTRACTOR believes that additional work done by him in an emergency which arose from causes beyond his control entitles him to an extension of the Contract Completion Date or an increase in the Contract Price, he may make a claim therefor as provided in the General Conditions of the Contract.

1.4 OMITTED WORK

A. The OWNER may at any time by a written order and without notice to the sureties require the omission of such Contract work as it may find necessary or desirable.

B. An order for omission of work shall be valid only if signed by the OWNER and the work so ordered must be omitted by the CONTRACTOR. The amount by which the Contract price shall be reduced shall be determined as follows:

1. By such applicable unit prices, if any, as are set forth in the Contract; or

2. By the appropriate lump sum price set forth in the Contract; or

3. By the fair and reasonable estimated cost to the OWNER as mutually agreed to by the CONTRACTOR and approved by the OWNER.

1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURE

A. Initiation: Change order proposal

1. Initiated by OWNER: The OWNER or ARCHITECT may issue a Request for Proposal (RFP). The Request will contain a description of the intended change with supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications as applicable and the projected time for accomplishing the change, and the reason the work was not included in the original contract.

2. Initiated by CONTRACTOR: The CONTRACTOR may propose a change in the work by submittal of a Change Order Request (COR) to the OWNER describing the proposed change with a statement of the reason for the change and the effect on the contract time and price, along with supporting documentation.

B. Execution of Change Order Proposal:

1. When a Proposal is requested for a change in the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall submit his proposal within 14 days following receipt of the Request for Proposal. The Proposal shall include a completed Proposed Change Order Form. The Proposed Change Order Form will be provided to the CONTRACTOR electronically from the OWNER and will include formulas and locked-cells which can only be changed by the OWNER. The Proposal shall state the increase or decrease, if any, in the Contract Period and/or Contract Sum and shall include all appropriate back-up documentation.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall explain the proposal in as much detail as requested by the OWNER.


3. Any decrease in Contract Sum on account of omitted Work will include appropriate amounts for profit and overhead.

4. The OWNER and ARCHITECT will review the Proposal and may request additional information and documentation which the CONTRACTOR shall provide promptly.

5. If the OWNER decides to proceed with the change, it will issue a Change Order for signature first by the CONTRACTOR and then by the OWNER.

6. The CONTRACTOR will promptly complete the approved change in the Work on receipt of the executed Change Order.

C. Costs: The cost of both additive and deductive changes in the Work shall be determined, as follows:

1. Labor: Applied labor cost, crew foreman and general foreman performing or directly supervising the Work on the Site. Also included are travel and subsistence, but only in the extent incurred.

2. Insurance: Net premium for Worker's Compensation Insurance, taxes pursuant to the Federal Social Security Act, payments required under State and Federal unemployment laws.

3. Additional Materials: Necessary extra materials, delivered at the Site including the actual cost of consumable supplies. Consumable supplies shall not be determined by the percentage of cost basis.

4. Plant and Equipment: Rent for plant and equipment shall be at the rental cost for rentals from an independent firm (i.e. a firm which is not owned in whole or in part by the CONTRACTOR). If the equipment is owned by the CONTRACTOR or rented from a firm in which the CONTRACTOR has an interest, the rent shall be calculated in accordance with the applicable provisions and terms of the current "Cost Reference Guide for Construction Equipment" published by Dataquest.

5. Subcontractor Costs: Subcontractor's costs including subtier contractors shall be determined by items 1 through 4 in the preceding subparagraphs. Subcontractor overhead and profit shall be limited to the percentage amounts stipulated in the bid regardless of the number of subtier subcontractors.

6. Overhead and Profit: Plus percentage amounts stipulated in the bid.

7. During periods of downtime, the following conditions shall also apply:

a. Payment for equipment will be on the basis of an 8-hour day.

b. No overtime will be included.

c. No compensation for subsistence will be included.


d. The rate of overhead and profit will be 10 percent.

e. No compensation for equipment overhaul, field repair and fuel expenses shall be included.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Fire Station #8 Bathroom Alterations 1019 Williamsburg Road Richmond, VA 23231

013000 - 1

20181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA April 18, 2019

SECTION 013000

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Coordination drawings.

B. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout.

C. Number of copies of submittals.

D. Submittal procedures.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements.

B. Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL

A. All documents transmitted electronically for purposes of administration of the contract are to be in electronic (PDF) format and transmitted via email.

1. Besides submittals for review and information, this procedure applies to requests for information (RFIs), progress documentation, contract modification documents (e.g. supplementary instructions, change proposals, field reports, and meeting minutes, and any other document that is part of the project record.

2. It is Contractor's responsibility to submit documents in PDF format or an editable format acceptable to the A/E.

3. All shop drawings on sheets larger than 11" x 17" must be submitted in physical printed format.

4. All other specified submittal and document transmission procedures apply, except that electronic document requirements do not apply to samples or color selection charts.

3.06 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Review drawings prior to submission to Architect.

B. Coordination Shop Drawings must be submitted prior to the second application for payment. The second application for payment will not be approved until they are submitted.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, plumbing, fire suppression, and electrical systems.

b. Indicate required installation sequences.

c. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Fire Station #8 Bathroom Alterations 1019 Williamsburg Road Richmond, Virginia 23231

013000 - 2

20181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA January 18, 2019

2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by 42 inches (750 by 1067 mm).

3. Number of Copies: Submit five opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will return two copies, and send one copy to the Owner.

a. Submit six copies where Coordination Drawings are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect and Owner will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing.

3.07 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:

1. Product data.

2. Shop drawings.

3. Samples for selection.

4. Samples for verification.

B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.

D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 017800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.

3.08 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information:

1. Design data.

2. Certificates.

3. Test reports and procedures.

4. Inspection reports.

5. Manufacturer's instructions.

6. Manufacturer's field reports.

7. Other types indicated.

B. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. No action will be taken.

3.09 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout:

1. Project record documents.

2. Operation and maintenance data.

3. Warranties.

4. Bonds.

5. Other types as indicated.

B. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion.

3.10 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS

A. Documents for Review:

1. Small Size Sheets, Not Larger Than 8-1/2 x 11 inches: Submit the number of copies that Contractor requires, plus two copies that will be retained by Architect.

2. Small Size Sheets, Not Larger Than 11 x 17 inches: Submit electronically in pdf format.

3. Larger Sheets, Not Larger Than 36 x 48 inches: Submit the number of opaque reproductions that Contractor requires, plus two copies that will be retained by Architect.

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Fire Station #8 Bathroom Alterations 1019 Williamsburg Road Richmond, Virginia 23231

013000 - 3

20181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA January 18, 2019

B. Documents for Information: Submit two copies.

C. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained by Architect.

1. After review, produce duplicates.

2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated.

3.11 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Transmit each submittal with cover sheet.

B. Sequentially number. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix.

C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, type of submittal (shop drawing, mfg. data, sample, etc.), and specification section name and number, as appropriate on each copy.

D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.

E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items.

F. For each submittal for review, allow 14 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor.

G. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.

H. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps.

I. Contractor is to compile all required submittals for the specification section before submitting that section.

J. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.

K. Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements.

L. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.

M. Where multiple options exist on a submittal and one was specified, indicate intended options. Submittals that do not comply will be rejected.

END OF SECTION

COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 013100 - 1 Fire Station #8 Bathroom Alterations 1019 Williamsburg Road 20181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA Richmond, Virginia 23231 April 18, 2019

SECTION 013100

COORDINATION AND MEETINGS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Coordination

B. Preconstruction Conference

C. Progress Meetings

1.2 COORDINATION

A. The CONTRACTOR shall keep the OWNER fully advised as to his plans for carrying out the work and obtain the OWNER's approval for all phases of his operations as hereinafter specified.

B. Coordinate scheduling and submittals to assure efficient and orderly sequence of delivery of Contract work.

C. In accordance with the requirements of section Progress Schedule, the CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit a comprehensive schedule of his proposed sequence of construction included under this contract within 14 days from the notice to proceed for review by the OWNER and ARCHITECT. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a preliminary schedule for discussion at the preconstruction meeting.

D. The schedule shall be arranged to complete the work in phases and permit operation by the OWNER of completed phases or parts thereof.

E. The CONTRACTOR is cautioned that his schedule for certain areas of the work may be affected by work included under other Contracts.

F. Work on this Contract shall be coordinated with the work of other contracts. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER of the CONTRACTOR's planned procedures for each specific alteration of work which may affect work under other contracts before the alteration begins. The CONTRACTOR shall not begin any alteration until specific permission has been granted by the OWNER in each case and shall provide the OWNER with sufficient advance notice as not to impact the CONTRACTOR's schedule or the work of the other contracts.

G. If it is necessary for the proper coordination and installation of work by OTHERS, the CONTRACTOR shall reschedule his operations so that his work will not conflict with


necessary operations of the other contracts. Such rescheduling shall not be cause for a time extension except as provided for in the General Conditions.

H. The OWNER shall be the sole judge of when the CONTRACTOR's operations are causing interference with, or delay to, the work or operations of other contracts, and his orders and instructions shall be carried out without delay.

1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. General: Prior to commencement of Work at the Site, a Preconstruction Conference shall be required. The meeting date shall be determined by the OWNER. The OWNER will notify the attendees of the meeting date.

B. Attendance: The conference shall be attended by the following:

1. The CONTRACTOR

2. The representatives of principal suppliers and manufacturers as appropriate

3. The ARCHITECT and his resident project representative

4. The Authorized Representatives of the OWNER

5. Governmental representatives as appropriate

6. OTHERS, as requested by the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER, the or the ENGINEER

C. Delineation of Responsibilities: The purpose of the conference is to designate responsible personnel, to establish a working relationship among the parties and to identify the responsibilities of the OWNER, ENGINEER and the CONTRACTOR. Matters requiring coordination will be discussed and procedures for handling such matters, established. The agenda will include:

1. Start Work Date

2. Submittal procedures

3. Partial Payment procedures

4. Maintenance of Records

5. CONTRACTOR's Request for Clarification

6. Schedules, sequences and maintenance of facility operations

7. Safety and First Aid responsibilities

8. Change Orders

9. Use of site

10. Equipment delivery

D. Chair and Minutes: The preconstruction conference will be scheduled and chaired by the OWNER who will also arrange for the keeping and distribution of minutes to all attendees.


1.4 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Meeting Frequency and Format: The CONTRACTOR shall schedule and chair coordination meetings and monthly progress meetings. The following topics will be reviewed at a minimum at each meeting: Coordination, Shop Drawing Review, Requests for Clarification, Requests and Proposals for Changes, Change Orders, Non-Conformance Notices, Progress and Schedule, Quality Control, New Business, Shut Downs/Tie-ins and System Impacts, Facility Outages, Permit and Inspection Status, and Testing and Startup Activities. The CONTRACTOR may invite suppliers and subcontractors as appropriate. Minutes of the meeting will be maintained by the CONTRACTOR and distributed to all parties. Meeting minutes shall be distributed to all parties within four calendar days after each meeting. The first Coordination Meeting shall be coordinated with all parties at the preconstruction conference.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 013216 - 1 Fire Station #8 Bathroom Alterations 1019 Williamsburg Road 20181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA Richmond, Virginia 23231 April 18, 2019

SECTION 013216

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Form of Schedules

B. Working Hours

C. Scheduling Responsibilities

D. Submittals

E. Network Requirements

F. Cost Loading

G. Progress of the Work

H. Schedule Updates

I. Causes for Extensions of Time

J. Abnormal Weather

K. Approval Requests

L. Adjustment by OWNER

1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES

A. Prepare schedules in the form of critical path method (CPM) as described herein.

1. Provide separate CPM networks (subnetworks) of activities for each process or facility.

2. Each subnetwork shall be assigned a code and separate activity numbering series.

3. Interrelationships between subnetworks and any individual activities shall be identified.


B. Progress schedule shall use Primavera software.

1.3 WORKING HOURS

A. Work Hours: Perform work between 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. on weekdays only except for specified after hours work. Do not perform work on Saturday, Sundays, City holidays, or between 5:00 p.m. and 8:00 a.m. without written permission of OWNER. Extraordinary noise such as blasting or driving sheeting shall only be permitted between 9:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m. Comply with working hour restrictions required by the City of Richmond.

B. Holidays: The City observes a five-day work week and the following holidays: New Year's Day; Martin Luther King's Birthday; Washington's Birthday; Good Friday; Memorial Day; Independence Day; Labor Day; Veteran’s Day; Thanksgiving Day; the Friday after Thanksgiving; Christmas Eve and Christmas Day. The CONTRACTOR will not be permitted to work on these holidays unless otherwise authorized by the OWNER.

C. Work After Hours: Night work may be established by CONTRACTOR as regular procedure with written permission of OWNER. Such permission, however, may be revoked at any time by OWNER if the OWNER received excessive noise complaints from the surrounding community or if CONTRACTOR fails to maintain adequate equipment and supervision for proper prosecution and control of work at night. Contractor to pay for City Overhead expenses related to OWNER services provided beyond normal work hours specified.

D. Written Requests for Work Outside of Normal Work Hours: Written requests for work between 5:00 p.m. and 8:00 a.m. on weekdays, and for work on Saturday, Sundays, and City holidays shall be made in writing at least two weeks prior to needing the work outside of normal work hours.

E. The OWNER will charge CONTRACTOR for costs of OWNER’s, ARCHITECT’s, and ENGINEER’s personnel for work outside of normal work hours as described in Paragraph D above. Costs will be charged as a Credit to the City on the next partial payment credit. Cumulative costs will be included in a change order which will show credit to the OWNER. The OWNER will record OWNER’s, ARCHITECT’s, and ENGINEER’s hours outside of normal work hours.

F. Emergencies: In case of an emergency which may require that work be done on Saturdays, Sundays, holidays or longer than ten hours per day, the CONTRACTOR shall request the permission of the OWNER to do so. If, in the opinion of the OWNER, the emergency is bona fide, he will grant permission to the CONTRACTOR to work such hours as may be necessary. Also, if in the opinion of the OWNER, a bona fide emergency exists, he may direct the CONTRACTOR to work such hours as may be necessary whether the CONTRACTOR requests permission to do so or not.


1.4 SCHEDULING RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Critical Path Method type construction schedule will be used to monitor job progress and as a means to make monthly payments to the CONTRACTOR except for Stored Materials which will be made in accordance with Section 6 of the General Conditions of the Contract. Be responsible for providing all information concerning the sequencing, logic and durations of all activities as well as providing the initial CPM logic network diagram and tabular report data. Once the initial logic network diagram is accepted, be responsible for providing monthly updates including logic changes, percent complete, actual start and finish dates, and duration changes. The CONTRACTOR will be required to produce the monthly computerized printout of the schedule updates.

B. From the CONTRACTOR's initial schedule submittal and from information agreed upon at the monthly schedule update meetings, computerized and dated tabular schedule reports, updated network diagrams, and bar charts will be produced which will be reviewed by the CONTRACTOR for accuracy and integrity. It shall at all times remain the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to schedule and direct his forces in a manner that will allow for the completion of the work within the Contract Time.

C. It should be clearly understood that the initial schedule and all update information must be provided by the CONTRACTOR, and that this information is a representation of the best efforts of the CONTRACTOR and his subcontractors as to how they envision the work to be accomplished. Similarly, all progress updates to be provided by and through the CONTRACTOR must be an accurate representation of his, or his subcontractor's, or supplier's actual performance. The schedule shall at all times remain an accurate reflection of the CONTRACTOR's actual or projected sequencing of work. Once accepted, adherence to the established CPM schedule shall be obligatory upon the CONTRACTOR, and his subcontractors for the work under this Contract. The OWNER may require the CONTRACTOR to revise the schedule if, in his judgment, the schedule does not accurately reflect the actual execution of the work, or is in violation of any provision of the CPM scheduling requirements; and the CONTRACTOR shall revise the schedule as often as is necessary to bring the course of performance of the work without additional cost to the OWNER.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Provide all submittals, including the following, as specified in Division 1.

B. CPM Schedule:

1. Within fifteen (15) calendar days after Notice to Proceed, submit six (6) prints of the proposed CPM network diagrams, tabular reports for the entire Contract duration and include both procurement and construction activities. Sort the tabular reports by total float and activity number. They shall also contain a predecessor/successor resource loading report, and project calendar. This logic diagram shall be drawn as described herein and will be the subject of a schedule review meeting with the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER, and OWNER's representatives within two (2) weeks of its submission.


2. If a review of the submitted CPM Schedule indicates a work plan which will not complete the work within the Contract Time stated in the Contract, revise the CPM Schedule as required and resubmit it until it is acceptable. Failure to submit an acceptable schedule may, at the OWNER's sole discretion, be cause for the withholding of any partial payment(s) otherwise due under the Contract.

3. Acceptance of the schedule shall not constitute a representation by the OWNER or ARCHITECT that the work can be completed as shown on the schedule.

C. Submittals Schedule:

1. In addition to the above scheduling requirements, submit a complete and detailed listing of anticipated submittals during the course of the Contract. Coordinate submittals with those of subcontractors and suppliers, and identify each submittal as specified. Indicated the anticipated submission date for each submittal along with the date on which its return is anticipated. Review time for submittal shall be as provided for in Section 013000 Administrative Requirements. Durations shown for review shall be to share available float for that path. Submittals and the review time, of which are on the critical path, shall be clearly marked in red with the words "Critical Path" by the CONTRACTOR at the time of submission.

2. Submit the Submittal Schedule within fifteen (15) working days from the Notice to Proceed. The Submittal Schedule will then be accepted or revised as required, and the CONTRACTOR will incorporate the dates and review durations into his CPM Schedule.

1.6 NETWORK REQUIREMENTS

A. The network diagram shall show the interdependence of activities, and the sequence in which the work is to be accomplished as planned by the CONTRACTOR. The basic concept of the network analysis diagram is to show how the start of a given activity is dependent on the completion of preceding activities, and its completion restricts the start of succeeding activities. A time scaled precedence format will be followed. The detailed network diagram will be time scaled showing a continuous flow from left to right.

B. The Schedule Activities shall be developed into three major groups:

1. Procurement Activities: Procurement Activities shall include at a minimum:

a. Permits

b. Easements

c. Program(s)

d. Submittal Items

e. Approval of Submittal Items


f. Fabrication and Delivery of Submittal Items

Permits, fabrication, delivery, training and startup items shall be tied logically to the correct construction activity in the overall CPM construction schedule.

2. Construction Activities: Construction activities will be physical work activities that describe how the job will be constructed.

3. Testing, Startup, Training and Close-out: CPM activities for this group shall include all work required to satisfy to appropriate specification sections and meet the requirements of substantial and final completion.

C. Break the work into activities, with durations of one to twenty (1 to 20) working days each, except for non-construction activities (such as procurement of materials and delivery of equipment), and other activities which may require longer durations. To the extent feasible, activities related to a specific physical area of the project shall be grouped on the network for ease of understanding and simplification. The selection and number of activities shall be subject to the review of the ARCHITECT and OWNER.

D. Each activity on the network shall have indicated for it the following:

1. A single duration, no longer than 20 days (i.e., the single best estimate of the expected elapsed time considering the scope of work involved in the activity) expressed in working days. City holidays and weather delays shall be included. One critical path shall be shown for the schedule.

2. An activity I.D. number will be assigned to each activity. The I.D. number will be numeric with a maximum of ten (10) digits.

3. A brief description of the activity will be included. If this description is not definitive, a separate listing of each activity and a descriptive narrative may be required.

4. Each activity (except for procurement activities) shall be cost loaded to indicate the total estimated costs of the activity. No activity shall exceed $60,000 except if an equipment item.

5. Each construction activity shall be man-hour loaded with the estimated man-hours to be expended on each activity.

E. When preparing the CPM construction schedule, consider all construction sequence and critical construction activities requirements.

F. Failure to include on a network any element of work required for the performance of this Contract shall not excuse the CONTRACTOR from completing all work required within the applicable Contract Time, notwithstanding OWNER's network review.


G. A CPM schedule which shows a completion of any portion of the construction work (not including testing and start-up) prior to the Contract Time dates may be accepted but in no event shall be acceptable as a basis for a claim for delay against the OWNER by the CONTRACTOR.

H. The schedule calendar shall be a 5 day work week with holidays corresponding to those observed by the City of Richmond's Department of Public Utilities.

1.7 COST LOADING

A. Schedule of Values:

1. Each activity for Work-in-Place on the construction schedule shall be allocated a dollar value in accordance with paragraph 1.6D.4 above. Each activity's assigned cost shall consist of labor, equipment, and materials costs, and a prorated contribution to overhead and profit. The sum of the activities costs shall be equal to the total contract price. Activities not directly related to Work-in-Place including Stored Materials, preparation and submittal of Shop or Working Drawings, or other required submittal or equipment and material procurement shall not be cost loaded. In submitting cost data the CONTRACTOR certifies that they are not unbalanced, and that the value assigned to each activity represents the CONTRACTOR's estimate of the actual costs of performing that activity. The listing of cost loaded CPM activities will become the Schedule of Values, and will serve as the basis for payments to the CONTRACTOR.

2. The accepted schedule of values shall represent a fair, reasonable and equitable dollar cost allocation for each activity on the CONTRACTOR's construction schedule.

B. Documentation: If it is determined that the cost data do not meet the requirements for a balanced bid breakdown, provide documentation substantiating any cost allocation on the cost data. Cost allocations shall be considered unbalanced if an activity on the construction schedule has been assigned a disproportionate allocation of direct costs, overhead and profit.

1.8 PROGRESS OF THE WORK

A. The work shall be started on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed, and shall be executed with such progress as may be required to prevent delay to other contractors or to the general completion of the project. The work shall be executed at such times and in or on such parts of the project, with such forces, material and equipment, as to assure completion of the work in the time established by the Contract. Additionally, schedule and direct the work so that it provides an orderly progression of the work to completion within the specified Contract Time.

B. Whenever it becomes apparent from the current monthly CPM Schedule update that delays to the critical path have resulted; and these delays are through no fault of the OWNER, or OWNER's representatives, and hence, that the Contract completion date


will not be met, or when so directed by the OWNER, take some or all of the following actions at no additional cost to the OWNER.

1. Increase construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as will substantially eliminate the backlog of work.

2. Increase the number of working hours per shift; shifts per working day, or days per week; the amount of construction equipment; the forms for concrete work; etc., or any combination of the foregoing to substantially eliminate the backlog of work.

3. Schedule activities to achieve maximum practical concurrence of accomplishment of activities, and comply with the revised schedule.

C. Submit for review a written statement of the steps to be taken to remove, or arrest the delay to the schedule. If the CONTRACTOR fails to submit a written statement of the steps he intends to take or fails to take such steps as required by the Contract; the OWNER may direct the level of effort in manpower and trades, equipment, work schedule and overtime to remove or arrest the delay to the critical path in the accepted schedule, and the CONTRACTOR shall promptly provide such level of effort at no additional cost to the OWNER. In addition, should schedule delays persist, the CONTRACTOR's bond agent will be asked to attend meetings to update the schedule.

D. Failure of the CONTRACTOR to comply with the requirements of this provision shall subject him to, at the OWNER's sole discretion, withholding, in partial or in total, payments otherwise due the CONTRACTOR for work performed under this Contract. The CONTRACTOR agrees that any withholding of moneys is not a penalty for noncompliance, but is an assurance for the OWNER that funds will be available to implement these requirements should the CONTRACTOR fail to do so, since failure of the CONTRACTOR to comply with these requirements shall mean that the CONTRACTOR failed to execute the work with such diligence as to ensure its completion within the time for completion.

1.9 SCHEDULE UPDATES

A. Monthly Meetings: A monthly Schedule Update Meeting will be held on the 25th day of each month, or nearest day thereto, at the construction site to review and update the CPM Schedule. The Schedule Update Meeting will be chaired by the CONTRACTOR and attended by the OWNER and the ARCHITECT. Actual progress of the previous month will be recorded and future activities will be reviewed. The duration of activities and their logical connections may be revised as needed. Decisions made at these meetings and agreed to by all parties are binding with the exception that no contract completion dates will be modified without formal written requests and acceptance as specified herein. In either case, provide the following information for each update at a minimum:

1. Actual start and finished dates for all completed activities.


2. Actual start dates for all started but incomplete activities including remaining durations and/or percent completes.

B. Withholding of Payments: Failure to provide specified updated information or failure to attend progress meetings may result in the withholding of progress payments.

1.10 CAUSES FOR EXTENSIONS OF TIME

A. The Contract completion time will be adjusted only for causes specified in this Contract. In the event the CONTRACTOR requests an extension of any contract completion date, he shall furnish justification and supporting evidence per the General Conditions, and provide a detailed CPM Schedule delay analysis based on the most current updated CPM Schedule. The OWNER will after receipt of such justification and supporting evidence, make findings of fact and will advise the CONTRACTOR in writing thereof. If the OWNER finds that the CONTRACTOR is entitled to an extension of the Contract completion date under the provisions of the Contract, the OWNER's determination as to the total number of days extensions shall be based upon the current accepted and updated CPM schedule and on all data relevant to the extension. Such data shall be included in the next monthly updating of the schedule. The CONTRACTOR acknowledges and agrees that actual delays in activities, which according to the CPM schedule, do not affect any contract completion date shown by the critical path in the network, do not have any effect on the Contract completion date or dates, and therefore will not be the basis for a change in Contract completion time.

1.11 ABNORMAL WEATHER

A. The Contract Period will be adjusted to account for unusually severe weather conditions which prevent or inhibit the CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work and lengthen the critical path indicated on the Schedule (such unusually severe weather conditions referred to herein as "Inclement Weather"). It is the intent of this provision to offset the impact of Inclement Weather with unusually favorable weather conditions which immediately precede and/or follow the occurrence of Inclement Weather which affects the performance of the Work on this project.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER in writing of the occurrence of Inclement Weather within two days after the onset of such Inclement Weather and shall describe in reasonable detail the type of Inclement Weather encountered by the CONTRACTOR and the Work thereby interfered with or interrupted.

C. This provision specifies the procedure for the determination of time extensions for unusually severe weather. In order for the OWNER to award a time extension under this clause, the following conditions must be satisfied:

1. The weather experienced at the project site during the contract period must be found to be unusually severe, that is, more severe than the adverse weather anticipated for the project location during any given month.


2. The unusually severe weather must actually cause a delay to the completion of the project. The delay must be beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the CONTRACTOR.

D. Schedule: The following Schedule of Monthly Anticipated Adverse Weather Delays is based on National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) or similar data for the project location and will constitute the base line for monthly weather time evaluations for the City of Richmond location. The CONTRACTOR's progress schedule must reflect these anticipated adverse weather and high river level delays in all weather dependent activities.

SCHEDULE OF MONTHLY ANTICIPATED ADVERSE WEATHER

WORK DAYS BASED ON (5) DAY WORK WEEK

JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC

Adverse Weather

10 9 9 6 8 7 8 7 6 5 7 9

E. Records: Upon acknowledgement of the Notice to Proceed and continuing throughout the contract, the CONTRACTOR will record daily, and submit to the OWNER, the occurrence of adverse weather and resultant impact to normally scheduled work. Actual adverse weather delay days must prevent work on critical activities for 50 percent or more of the CONTRACTOR's scheduled work day.

F. Impacted Days: The number of actual adverse weather days shall include days impacted by actual adverse weather (even if occurred in previous month), be calculated chronologically from the first to the last day in each month, and be recorded as full days. If the number of actual adverse weather delay and high James River level days exceeds the number of days anticipated in the Schedule of Monthly Anticipated Adverse Weather Delays, above, the OWNER will convert any qualifying delays to calendar days, giving full consideration for equivalent fair weather work days, and issue a modification in accordance with Specification Section - CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURE. Contract time extensions for abnormal weather do provide justifications for failure to comply with the work timing requirements established in Specification Section – Limitation on Sequence of Construction.

1.12 APPROVAL REQUESTS

A. From time to time, as the work progresses and in the sequence indicated by the accepted progress schedule, the CONTRACTOR must submit to the OWNER a specific request, in writing, for each item of information or approval required of him by the Contract. These requests must be submitted sufficiently in advance of the date upon which the information or approval is actually required by the CONTRACTOR to allow for the time the OWNER may take to act upon such submissions or resubmissions.


B. The CONTRACTOR shall not have any right to an extension of time on account of delays due to his failure to submit his requests for the required information or the required approval in accordance with these requirements.

1.13 ADJUSTMENT BY OWNER

A. From time to time it may be necessary for the Contract schedule and/or Contract Times to be adjusted by the OWNER due to the effects of job conditions, acts or omissions of other contractors not directly associated with this Contract, weather, technical difficulties, strikes, unavoidable delays on the part of the OWNER or his representatives, and other enforceable conditions which may indicate schedule adjustments and/or completion time extension. Under such conditions, the OWNER shall direct the CONTRACTOR to reschedule the work to reflect the changed conditions, and the CONTRACTOR shall revise his schedule accordingly. Schedule extensions affecting the Contract Times shall be granted only by the OWNER in writing. It is specifically pointed out that the use of available total float in the CPM schedule may be used by the OWNER and his representatives, as well as, by the CONTRACTOR.

B. Without obligation to extend the Contract Times or any intermediate completion dates set out in the CPM network, the OWNER may initiate changes to the Contract work that absorb float time only. OWNER-initiated changes that affect the critical path on the CPM network shall be the sole grounds for extending or shortening the Contract Times. CONTRACTOR initiated changes that encroach on the float time, identified in the CPM network, may be accomplished with the OWNER's concurrence. Such changes, however, shall give way to OWNER-initiated changes competing for the same float time.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1 Fire Station #8 Bathroom Alterations 1019 Williamsburg Road 20181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA Richmond, Virginia 23231 April 18, 2019

SECTION 014000

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Submittals

B. Inspection Services

C. Inspection of Materials

D. Quality Control

E. Costs of Inspection

F. Acceptance Tests

G. Failure to Comply with Contract


A. Section 013000 Administrative Requirement

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Provide all submittals, including the following, as specified in Section 013000 Administrative Requirements.

B. Certificate Submittals: Furnish the OWNER authoritative evidence in the form of Certificates of Manufacture that the materials and equipment to be used in the Work have been manufactured and tested in conformity with the Contract Documents. Include copies of the results of physical tests and chemical analyses, where necessary, that have been made directly on the product or on similar products of the manufacturer.

1.4 INSPECTION SERVICES

A. OWNER's Access: At all times during the progress of the Work and until the date of final completion, afford the OWNER, and ARCHITECT every reasonable, safe, and proper facility for inspecting the Work at the site. The observation and inspection of any work will not relieve the CONTRACTOR of any obligations to perform proper and satisfactory work as specified. Replace work rejected due to faulty design, inferior, or defective materials, poor workmanship, improper installation, excessive wear, or


nonconformity with the requirements of the Contract Documents, with satisfactory work at no additional cost to the OWNER. Replace as directed, finished or unfinished work found not to be in strict accordance with the Contract, even though such work may have been previously approved and payment made therefor.

B. Rejection: The OWNER and the OWNER's Authorized Representatives have the right to reject materials and workmanship which are defective or require correction. Promptly remove rejected work and materials from the site.

C. Inferior Work Discoveries: Failure or neglect on the part of the OWNER or the OWNER's Authorized Representatives to condemn or reject bad or inferior work or materials does not imply an acceptance of such work or materials. Neither is it to be construed as barring the OWNER or the OWNER's Authorized Representatives at any subsequent time from recovering damages or a sum of money needed to build anew all portions of the Work in which inferior work or improper materials were used.

D. Removal for Examination: Should it be considered necessary or advisable by the OWNER or the OWNER's Authorized Representatives, at any time before final acceptance of the Work, to make examinations of portions of the Work already completed, by removing or tearing out such portions, promptly furnish all necessary facilities, labor, and material, to make such an examination. If such Work is found to be defective in any respect, defray all expenses of such examination and of satisfactory reconstruction. If, however, such work is found to meet the requirements of the Contract, the cost of examination and restoration of the Work will be considered a change in the Work to be paid for in accordance with applicable provisions of the Contract.

E. Operation Responsibility: Assume full responsibility for the proper operation of equipment during tests and instruction periods. Make no claim for damage which may occur to equipment prior to the time when the OWNER accepts the Work.

F. Rejection Prior to Warrantee Expiration: If at anytime prior to the expiration of any applicable warranties or guarantees, equipment is rejected by the OWNER, repay to the OWNER all sums of money received for the rejected equipment on progress certificates or otherwise on account of the Contract lump sum prices, and upon the receipt of the sum of money, OWNER will execute and deliver a bill of sale of all its rights, title, and interest in and to the rejected equipment. Do not remove the equipment from the premises of the OWNER until the OWNER obtains from other sources, equipment to take the place of that rejected. The OWNER hereby agrees to obtain other equipment within a reasonable time and the CONTRACTOR agrees that the OWNER may use the equipment furnished by the CONTRACTOR without rental or other charge until the other new equipment is obtained.


1.5 INSPECTION OF MATERIALS

A. Premanufacture Notification: Give notice in writing to the OWNER sufficiently in advance of the commencement of manufacture or preparation of materials especially manufactured or prepared for use in or as part of the permanent construction. When required, the notice is to include a request for inspection, the date of commencement, and the expected date of completion of the manufacture or preparation of materials. Upon receipt of such notice, the OWNER will arrange to have a representative present at such times during the manufacture or testing as may be necessary to inspect the materials, or will notify CONTRACTOR that the inspection will be made at a point other than the point of manufacture or testing, or that the inspection will be waived. Comply with these provisions before shipping any materials. Such inspection will not constitute a release from the responsibility for furnishing materials meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Testing Standards: Tests of electrical and mechanical equipment and appliances shall be conducted in accordance with recognized test codes of the ANSI, ASME, or IEEE, except as may otherwise be stated herein.

1.6 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing

1. Field and Laboratory

a. Provide personnel to assist the Special Inspector in performing the following periodic observation and associated services.

(1) Soils: Observe and test excavations, placement and compaction of soils. Determine suitability of excavated material. Observe subgrade soils and foundations.

(2) Concrete: Observe forms and reinforcement; observe concrete placement; witness air entrainment tests, facilitate concrete cylinder preparation and assist with other tests performed by laboratory testing representatives.

(3) Masonry: Sample and test mortar, bricks, blocks and grout; inspect brick and block samples and sample panels; inspect placement of reinforcement and grouting.

b. Cooperate with the laboratory testing representatives. Provide at least 48 hours notice prior to when specified testing is required. Provide labor and materials, and necessary facilities at the site as required by the testing laboratory.

2. Equipment: Coordinate and demonstrate test procedures as specified in the Contract Documents or as otherwise required during the formal tests.


3. Pipeline and Other Testing: Conform to test procedures and requirements specified in the appropriate Specification Section.

B. Reports

1. Certified Test Reports: Where transcripts or certified test reports are required by the Contract Documents, meet the following requirements:

a. Before delivery of materials or equipment submit and obtain approval of the OWNER for all required transcripts, certified test reports, certified copies of the reports of all tests required in referenced specifications or specified in the Contract Documents.

b. Perform all testing in an approved independent laboratory or the manufacturer's laboratory. Submit for approval reports of shop equipment tests within thirty days of testing.

c. Transcripts or test reports are to be accompanied by a notarized certificate in the form of a letter from the manufacturer or supplier certifying that tested material or equipment meets the specified requirements and the same type, quality, manufacture and make as specified. The certificate shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer or the manufacturer's plant manager.

2. Certificate of Compliance: At the option of the OWNER, or where not otherwise specified, submit for approval a notarized Certificate of Compliance. The Certificates may be in the form of a letter stating the following:

a. Manufacturer has performed all required tests

b. Materials to be supplied meet all test requirements

c. Tests were performed not more than one year prior to submittal of the certificate

d. Materials and equipment subjected to the tests are of the same quality, manufacture and make as those specified

e. Identification of the materials

1.7 COSTS OF INSPECTION

A. OWNER's Obligation: Initial inspection and testing of materials furnished under this Contract will be performed by the OWNER or his authorized Representatives or inspection bureaus without cost to the CONTRACTOR, unless otherwise expressly specified. If subsequent testing is necessary due to failure of the initial tests or


because of rejection for noncompliance, reimburse the OWNER for expenditures incurred in making such tests.

B. CONTRACTOR's Obligation: Include in the Contract Price, the cost of all shop and field tests of equipment and other tests specifically called for in the Contract Documents.

C. Reimbursements to OWNER:

1. Materials and equipment submitted by the CONTRACTOR as the equivalent to those specifically named in the Contract may be tested by the OWNER for compliance. Reimburse the OWNER for expenditures incurred in making such tests on materials and equipment which are rejected for noncompliance.

2. Reimburse OWNER for the costs of jobsite inspection on weekends and holidays, and between the hours of 5:00 p.m. and 8:00 a.m. on workdays unless the weekend, holiday or after-hours work is specifically required by the OWNER to minimize operational impact or traffic disruption. Jobsite inspection costs for weekend, holidays or after-hours work, if authorized, solely to make up schedule slippage shall be reimbursable.

3. Reimburse OWNER for all costs associated with Witness Tests which exceed 5 Calendar Days per kind of equipment.

1.8 ACCEPTANCE TESTS

A. Preliminary Field Tests: As soon as conditions permit, furnish all labor and materials and services to perform preliminary field tests of all equipment provided under this Contract. If the preliminary field tests disclose that any equipment furnished and installed under this Contract does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, make all changes, adjustments and replacements required prior to the acceptance tests.

B. Final Field Tests: Upon completion of the Work and prior to final payment, subject all equipment, piping and appliances installed under this Contract to specified acceptance tests to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents.

1. Furnish all labor, fuel, energy, water and other materials, equipment, instruments and services necessary for all acceptance tests.

2. Conduct field tests in the presence of the OWNER. Perform the field tests to demonstrate that under all conditions of operation each equipment item:

a. Has not been damaged by transportation or installation

b. Has been properly installed

c. Has no mechanical defects

d. Is in proper alignment

e. Has been properly connected


f. Is free of overheating of any parts

g. Is free of all objectionable vibration

h. Is free of overloading of any parts

i. Is free of excessive noise

j. Operates as intended

3. Operate work or portions of work for a minimum of 100 hours or 14 days continuous service, whichever comes first.

C. Failure of Tests: If the acceptance tests reveal defects in material or equipment, or if the material or equipment in any way fails to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, then promptly correct such deficiencies. Failure or refusal to correct the deficiencies, or if the improved materials or equipment, when tested again, fail to meet the guarantees or specified requirements, the OWNER, notwithstanding its partial payment for work and materials or equipment, may reject said materials or equipment and may order the CONTRACTOR to remove the defective work from the site at no addition to the Contract Price, and replace it with material or equipment which meets the Contract Documents.

1.9 FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH CONTRACT

A. Unacceptable Materials: If it is ascertained by testing or inspection that the material or equipment does not comply with the Contract, do not deliver said material or equipment, or if delivered remove it promptly from the site or from the Work and replace it with acceptable material without additional cost to the OWNER. Fulfill all obligations under the terms and conditions of the Contract even though the OWNER or the OWNER's Authorized Representatives fail to ascertain noncompliance or notify the CONTRACTOR of noncompliance.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTSFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

014100 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 014100REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SUMMARY OF REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Regulatory requirements applicable to this project are the following:B. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.C. 29 CFR 1910 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition.D. State of Virginia amendments to some or all of the following.E. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2009.F. ICC (IFC) - International Fire Code; 2012.G. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2015.H. ICC (IPC) - International Plumbing Code; 2015.I. ICC (IMC) - International Mechanical Code; 2012.J. ICC (IFGC) - International Fuel Gas Code; 2012.K. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.L. ICC (IECC) - International Energy Conservation Code; 2012.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Contractor's Designer Qualifications: Refer to Section - 014000 - Quality Requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED

END OF SECTION

Floyd Cybulski

Text Box

2012

Floyd Cybulski

Text Box

2012

CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONSFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

014533 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 014533CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Code-required special inspections.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures.B. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements.

1.03 DEFINITIONSA. Code or Building Code: 2009 Edition of the Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code and, more

specifically, Chapter 17 - Structural Tests and Inspections, of same.B. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): Agency or individual officially empowered to enforce the

building, fire and life safety code requirements of the permitting jurisdiction in which the Projectis located.

C. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).D. Special Inspection:

1. Special inspections are inspections and testing of materials, installation, fabrication,erection or placement of components and connections mandated by the AHJ that also require special expertise to ensure compliance with the approved contract documents andthe referenced standards.

2. Special inspections are separate from and independent of tests and inspections conductedby Owner or Contractor for the purposes of quality assurance and contract administration.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or

Testing; 2014a.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Special Inspection Agency Qualifications: Prior to the start of work, the Special Inspection

Agency shall:1. Submit agency name, address, and telephone number, names of full time registered

Engineer and responsible officer.2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST Construction

Materials Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection, with memorandum ofremedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection.

3. Submit certification that Special Inspection Agency is acceptable to AHJ.C. Special Inspection Reports: After each special inspection, Special Inspector shall promptly

submit two copies of report; one to Architect and one to the AHJ.1. Include:

a. Date issued.b. Project title and number.c. Name of Special Inspector.d. Date and time of special inspection.e. Identification of product and specifications section.f. Location in the Project.g. Type of special inspection.h. Date of special inspection.i. Results of special inspection.j. Compliance with Contract Documents.


014533 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

2. Final Special Inspection Report: Document special inspections and correction ofdiscrepancies prior to the start of the work.

D. Test Reports: After each test or inspection, promptly submit two copies of report; one toArchitect and one to AHJ.1. Include:

a. Date issued.b. Project title and number.c. Name of inspector.d. Date and time of sampling or inspection.e. Identification of product and specifications section.f. Location in the Project.g. Type of test or inspection.h. Date of test or inspection.i. Results of test or inspection.j. Compliance with Contract Documents.

1.06 SPECIAL INSPECTION AGENCYA. Owner or Architect will employ services of a Special Inspection Agency to perform inspections

and associated testing and sampling in accordance with ASTM E329 and required by thebuilding code.

B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform work inaccordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS, GENERAL

A. Frequency of Special Inspections: Special Inspections are indicated as continuous or periodic.1. Continuous Special Inspection: Special Inspection Agency shall be present in the area

where the work is being performed and observe the work at all times the work is inprogress.

2. Periodic Special Inspection: Special Inspection Agency shall be present in the area wherework is being performed and observe the work part-time or intermittently and at thecompletion of the work.

B. See the "Schedule of Chapter 17 Inspections" immediately following this Section for the list ofrequired Special Inspections.

3.02 CONTRACTOR DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIESA. Contractor Responsibilities, General:

1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials for specialinspections that require material verification.

2. Cooperate with agency and laboratory personnel; provide access to the work, tomanufacturers' facilities, and to fabricators' facilities.

3. Provide incidental labor and facilities:a. To provide access to work to be tested or inspected.b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested or

inspected.c. To facilitate tests or inspections.d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.

4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiringtesting or inspection services.

5. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspectionsrequired by Contractor beyond specified requirements.

END OF SECTION


014533 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1 Fire Station #8 Bathroom Alterations 1019 Williamsburg Road 20181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA Richmond, Virginia 23231 April 18, 2019

SECTION 015000

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. General Requirements

B. Temporary Utilities

C. Temporary Construction

D. Barricades and Enclosures

E. Fences

F. Public Utility Installations and Structures

G. Temporary Controls

H. Traffic Regulation

I. Field Offices and Sheds

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Codes and standards referred to in this section are:

1. OSHA Regulations 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Plant and Facilities: Furnish, install, maintain and remove all false work, scaffolding, ladders, hoistways, braces, pumping plants, shields, trestles, roadways, sheeting, centering forms, barricades, drains, flumes, control equipment, and the like, any of which may be needed in the construction of any part of the Work and which are not herein described or specified in detail. Accept responsibility for the safety and efficiency of such works and for any damage that may result from their failure or from their improper construction, maintenance or operation.

B. First Aid: Maintain a readily accessible, completely equipped first aid kit at each

location where work is in progress.


C. Safety: Accept sole responsibility for safety and security at the site. Indemnify and hold harmless the OWNER and the OWNER's Authorized Representatives, including ARCADIS and nbj Architecture for any safety violation, or noncompliance with governing bodies and their regulations, and for accidents, deaths, injuries, or damage at the site during occupancy or partial occupancy of the site by CONTRACTOR's forces while performing any part of the Work.

1. Safety Plan:

a. Before any Work at the site is started, the CONTRACTOR shall prepare

a written plan for Project-specific safety precautions and programs, complete with respect to procedures and actions that the CONTRACTOR intends. CONTRACTOR and all others to follow in order for CONTRACTOR and all others to comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations, as well as specific site requirements.

b. The CONTRACTOR shall make available the following items for review: OSHA-200 Log for the past five years, current safety program, training program, and experience with other related processes. Documented evidence showing compliance with lockout/tagout, emergency response, and safe work practices are required.

c. The CONTRACTOR shall revise plan for safety precautions and programs at appropriate times to reflect changes in construction conditions, the Work, means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction.

2. Safety Representative: The CONTRACTOR shall designate a qualified and

experienced safety representative at the site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs.

D. Emergencies: In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, CONTRACTOR, without special instruction or authorization from OWNER or CONSTRUCTION MANAGER, is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. CONTRACTOR shall give CONSTRUCTION MANAGER prompt written notice if CONTRACTOR believes that any significant changes in the work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by CONTRACTOR in response to such an emergency, a Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action.

E. Work Zone Setup and Traffic Control Devices: Comply with Manual on Uniform Traffic

Control Devices (MUTCD), Virginia Work Area Protection Manual, and local guidelines.

.


1.4 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

A. Water: Provide all necessary programs, software, controls, monitoring facilities, and required water without additional cost to the OWNER, unless otherwise specified. If necessary, provide and lay water lines to the place of use; secure all necessary permits; pay for all taps to water mains and hydrants and for all water used at the established rates. Exercise measures to conserve water.

B. Light and Power: Provide without additional cost to the OWNER temporary lighting to

achieve a minimum lighting level of 2 watt/sq ft and power facilities required for the proper construction and inspection of the Work. If, in the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER's opinion, these facilities are inadequate, do NOT proceed with any portion of the Work affected thereby. Maintain temporary lighting and power until the Work is accepted. After dark, for security purposes, provide and maintain a minimum of 1 watt/sq ft lighting to exterior and staging areas and a minimum of 0.25 watt/sq ft lighting to interior work areas.

C. Heat: Provide and maintain temporary heat with minimum ambient temperature of 50

degrees F, as needed to maintain specified conditions for material installations and construction purposes.

D. Cooling: Provide and maintain temporary cooling to a maximum ambient temperature

of 80 degrees F as needed to maintain specified conditions for material installations and construction purposes.

E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide sufficient sanitary facilities for construction personnel.

Prohibit and prevent nuisances on the site of the Work or on adjoining property. Discharge any employee who violates this rule. Abide by all environmental regulations or laws applicable to the Work.

F. Connections to Existing Utilities:

1. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, make all necessary connections to

existing facilities including structures, drain lines, and utilities such as water, sewer, gas, telephone, and electricity. In each case, obtain permission from the OWNER or the owning utility prior to undertaking connections. Protect facilities against deleterious substances and damage.

2. Thoroughly plan in advance all connections to existing facilities. Have on hand

at the time of undertaking the connections, all material, labor and required equipment. Proceed continuously to complete connections in minimum time. Arrange for the operation of valves or other appurtenances on existing utilities, under the direct supervision of the owning utility.

1.5 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION

A. Access Roads, Causeways, and Bridges: Design and place suitable temporary access roads, causeways, and bridges where necessary for the maintenance of vehicular and pedestrian traffic. Assume responsibility for the sufficiency and safety of


all such temporary work or bridges and for any damage which may result from their failure or their improper construction, maintenance, or operation. Indemnify and save harmless the OWNER and the OWNER's representatives, including ARCADIS, and njb Architecture, from all claims, suits or actions, and damages or costs of every description arising by reason of failure to comply with the above provisions.

1.6 BARRICADES AND ENCLOSURES

A. Protection of Workmen and Public: Effect and maintain at all times during the prosecution of the Work, barriers necessary for the protection of Workmen and the Public. Provide suitable barricades, "danger" or "caution" or "street closed" signs and watchmen at all places where the Work causes obstructions to normal traffic, excavation sites, or constitutes in any way a hazard to the public.

B. Barricades:

1. Protect all streets, roads, highways, excavations and other public thoroughfares

which are closed to traffic; use effective barricades which display acceptable warning signs. Locate barricades at the nearest public highway or street on each side of the blocked section.

2. Statutory Requirements: Install and maintain all barricades, signs, and other

protective devices within highway rights-of-way in strict conformity with applicable statutory requirements by the authority having jurisdiction.

1.7 FENCES

A. Existing Fences: Obtain written permission from the OWNER prior to relocating or dismantling fences which interfere with construction operations. Reach agreements with the fence owner as to the period the fence may be left relocated or dismantled. Install adequate gates where fencing must be maintained. Keep gates closed and locked at all times when not in use.

B. Restoration: Restore all fences to their original or better condition and to their original

location on completion of the Work. 1.8 PUBLIC UTILITY INSTALLATIONS AND STRUCTURES

A. Public utility installations and structures include all poles, tracks, pipes, wires,

conduits, vaults, ductbanks, manholes, and other appurtenances and facilities, whether owned or controlled by public bodies or privately owned individuals, firms or corporations, used to serve the public with transportation, gas, electricity, telephone, storm and sanitary sewers, water, or other public or private utility services. Facilities appurtenant to public or private property which may be affected by the Work are deemed included hereunder.


B. The Contract Documents contain data relative to existing public utility installations and structures above and below the ground surface. Existing public utility installations and structures are indicated on the Drawings only to the extent such information was made available to, or found by, the ARCHITECT in preparing the Drawings. These data are not guaranteed for completeness or accuracy, and the CONTRACTOR is responsible for making necessary investigations to become fully informed as to the character, condition, and extent of all public utility installations and structures that may be encountered and that may affect the construction operations.

C. Contact utility locating service sufficiently in advance of the start of construction to

avoid damage to the utilities and delays to the completion date.

D. Remove, replace, relocate, repair, rebuild, and secure any public utility installations and structures damaged as a direct or indirect result of the Work under this Contract. Costs for such work are incidental to the Contract. Be responsible and liable for any consequential damages done to or suffered by any public utility installations or structures. Assume and accept responsibility for any injury, damage, or loss which may result from or be consequent to interference with, or interruption or discontinuance of, any public utility service.

E. Repair or replace any water, electric, sewer, gas, or other service connection or

equipment damaged during the Work with no addition to the Contract price.

F. At all times in performance of the Work, employ proven methods and exercise reasonable care and skill to avoid unnecessary delay, injury, damage, or destruction to public utility installations and structures. Avoid unnecessary interference with, or interruption of, public utility services. Cooperate fully with the owners thereof to that end.

G. Give written notice to the owners of all public utility installations and structures affected

by proposed construction operations, sufficiently in advance of breaking ground in any area or on any unit of the Work, to obtain their permission before disrupting the lines and to allow them to take measures necessary to protect their interests. Advise the Chiefs of Police, Fire and Rescue Services of any excavation in public streets or the temporary shut-off of any water main. Provide at least 72 hours notice to all affected property owners whenever service connections are taken out of service.

H. Miscellaneous Structures: Assume and accept responsibility for all injuries or damage

to culverts, building foundations and walls, retaining walls, or other structures of any kind met with during the prosecution of the Work. Assume and accept liability for damages to public property resulting therefrom. Adequately protect against freezing all pipes carrying liquid.

I. Protection of Trees and Lawn Areas:

1. Protect with boxes, trees and shrubs, except those ordered to be removed. Do

not place excavated material so as to cause injury to such trees or shrubs. Replace trees or shrubs destroyed by accident or negligence of the CONTRACTOR or CONTRACTOR's employees with new stock of similar size and age, at the proper season, at no additional cost to the OWNER.


2. Leave lawn areas in as good condition as before the start of the Work. Restore

areas where sod has been removed by seeding or sodding.

1.9 TEMPORARY CONTROLS

A. During Construction:

1. Keep the site of the Work and adjacent premises free from construction materials, debris, and rubbish. Pick up trash, debris, and rubbish each working day. Remove this material from any portion of the site if such material, debris, or rubbish constitutes a nuisance or is objectionable.

2. Remove from the site all surplus materials and temporary structures when they

are no longer needed.

3. Neatly stack construction materials such as concrete forms and scaffolding when not in use. Promptly remove splattered concrete, asphalt, oil, paint, corrosive liquids, and cleaning solutions from surfaces to prevent marring or other damage.

4. Properly store volatile wastes in covered metal containers and remove from the

site daily.

5. Do not bury or burn on the site or dispose of into storm drains, sanitary sewers, streams, or waterways, any waste material. Remove all wastes from the site and dispose of in a manner complying with applicable ordinances and laws.

B. Dust Control:

1. Take measures to prevent unnecessary dust. Keep earth surfaces exposed to

dusting moist with water or a chemical dust suppressant. Cover materials in piles or while in transit to prevent blowing or spreading dust.

2. Adequately protect buildings or operating facilities which may be affected

adversely by dust. Protect machinery, motors, instrument panels, or similar equipment by suitable dust screens. Include proper ventilation with dust screens.

C. Temporary Drainage Provisions:

1. Provide for the drainage of stormwater and any water applied or discharged on

the site in performance of the Work. Provide adequate drainage facilities to prevent damage to the Work, the site, and adjacent property.

2. Supplement existing drainage channels and conduits as necessary to carry all

increased runoff from construction operations. Construct dikes as necessary to divert increased runoff from entering adjacent property (except in natural


channels), to protect the OWNER's facilities and the Work, and to direct water to drainage channels or conduits. Provide ponding as necessary to prevent downstream flooding.

3. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping

equipment.

D. Erosion Control: Provide erosion control in accordance with Section 015713 – Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control.

E. Pollution: Prevent the pollution of drains and watercourses by sanitary wastes,

sediment, debris, fuels, oils and other substances resulting from construction activities. Do not permit sanitary wastes to enter any drain or watercourse other than sanitary sewers. Do not permit sediment, debris, or other substances to enter sanitary sewers. Take reasonable measures to prevent such materials from entering any drain or watercourse.

1. CONTRACTOR shall thoroughly wash and clean trucks carrying material prior

to entering the WTP site.

2. CONTRACTOR shall develop and use a pollution control plan to prevent the pollution of drains and watercourses. The pollution control plan shall be submitted to the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER for review and approval and shall be updated every six (6) months as the construction activities change. The pollution control plan shall include procedures and monitoring programs to be used for the de-chlorination of water discharged and drained from new and existing water mains, conduits and structures to watercourses.

1.10 TRAFFIC REGULATION

A. Parking: Provide and maintain suitable parking areas for the use of all construction workers and others performing work or furnishing services in connection with the Contract, to avoid any need for parking personal vehicles where they may interfere with public traffic or construction activities. Provide this parking and transportation for the duration of the project and include all costs for this parking and transportation in the base bid for the project.

B. Access: Conduct Work to interfere as little as possible with public travel, whether

vehicular or pedestrian. Provide and maintain suitable and safe bridges, detours, or other temporary expedients for the accommodation of public and private travel. Whenever it is necessary to cross, obstruct, or close roads, driveways, and walks, whether public or private, give reasonable notice to owners of private drives before interfering with them. Such maintenance of traffic will not be required when the CONTRACTOR has obtained permission from the owner or tenant of private property, or from the authority having jurisdiction over the public property involved, to obstruct traffic at the designated point.


1.11 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS

A. CONTRACTOR's Office: Furnish and maintain a field office with a telephone. Field office shall be located on the construction site. Have an authorized agent present at this office at all times while the Work is in progress. Keep readily accessible copies of the Contract Documents, required record documents, and the latest approved shop drawings at this field office.

B. Material Sheds and Temporary Structures: Provide material sheds and other

temporary structures of sturdy construction and neat appearance.

C. Location: Coordinate location of field offices, material sheds and temporary structures with CONSTRUCTION MANAGER and OWNER.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION

TEMPORARY UTILITIESFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

015100 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 015100TEMPORARY UTILITIES


A. Temporary Utilities: Provision of electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, and water.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls:1. Temporary telecommunications services for administrative purposes.2. Temporary sanitary facilities required by law.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 29 CFR 1926 - U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition.

1.04 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITYA. Cost: By Contractor.B. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes

located as required. Provide flexible power cords as required.C. Provide main service disconnect and over-current protection at convenient location and meter.D. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction.E. Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch

circuits for power and lighting.1.05 TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES

A. Provide and maintain LED, compact fluorescent, or high-intensity discharge lighting as suitablefor the application for construction operations in accordance with requirements of 29 CFR 1926and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq ft (10.8 watt/sq m) lighting to exterior staging and storage areasafter dark for security purposes.

C. Provide and maintain 0.25 watt/sq ft (2.7 watt/sq m) H.I.D. lighting to interior work areas afterdark for security purposes.

D. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails,and lamps as required.

E. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.F. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction.

1.06 TEMPORARY HEATINGA. Provide heating devices and heat as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction

operations.B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) in areas where

construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications.C. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that

installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provideand pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumedparts.

1.07 TEMPORARY COOLINGA. Provide cooling devices and cooling as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction

operations.B. Maintain maximum ambient temperature of 80 degrees F (26 degrees C) in areas where

construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications.

TEMPORARY UTILITIESFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

015100 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

C. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary cooling purposes, verify thatinstallation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provideand pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumedparts.

1.08 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICEA. Provide and maintain suitable quality water service for construction operations at time of project

mobilization.B. Connect to existing water source.

1. Exercise measures to conserve water.PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED

END OF SECTION

FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDSFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

015213 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 015213FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS


A. Temporary field offices for use of Contractor.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSPART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CONSTRUCTION

A. Portable or mobile buildings, or buildings constructed with floors raised above ground, securelyfixed to foundations, with steps and landings at entrance doors.

B. Construction: Structurally sound, secure, weather tight enclosures for office. Maintain duringprogress of Work; remove when no longer needed.

C. Lighting for Offices: 50 fc (538 lx) at desk top height, exterior lighting at entrance doors.D. Fire Extinguishers: Appropriate type fire extinguisher at each office.

2.02 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLA. Heating, Cooling, and Ventilating: Automatic equipment to maintain comfort conditions.

2.03 CONTRACTOR OFFICE AND FACILITIESA. Size: For Contractor's needs and to provide space for project meetings.B. Furnishings in Meeting Area: Conference table and chairs to seat at least eight persons; racks

and files for Contract Documents, submittals, and project record documents.C. Equipment: Six adjustable band protective helmets for visitors, one 10 inch (250 mm) outdoor

weather thermometer .PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Fill and grade sites for temporary structures to provide drainage away from buildings.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install office spaces ready for occupancy 15 days after date fixed in Notice to Proceed.3.03 REMOVAL

A. At completion of Work remove buildings, foundations, utility services, and debris. Restoreareas.

END OF SECTION

TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

015713 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 015713TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL


A. Prevention of erosion due to construction activities.B. Prevention of sedimentation of waterways, open drainage ways, and storm and sanitary sewers

due to construction activities.C. Restoration of areas eroded due to insufficient preventive measures.D. Performance bond.E. Compensation of Owner for fines levied by authorities having jurisdiction due to non-compliance

by Contractor.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete for temporary and permanent erosioncontrol structures indicated on drawings.

B. Section 313700 - Riprap: Temporary and permanent stabilization using riprap.C. Section 321123 - Aggregate Base Courses: Temporary and permanent roadways.D. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete for temporary and permanent erosion

control structures indicated on drawings.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM D4355/D4355M - Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure toLight, Moisture and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus; 2014.

B. ASTM D4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity;1999a (Reapproved 2014).

C. ASTM D4533 - Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles; 2011.D. ASTM D4632/D4632M - Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of

Geotextiles; 2015a.E. ASTM D4751 - Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile;

2012.F. ASTM D4873 - Standard Guide for Identification, Storage, and Handling of Geosynthetic Rolls

and Samples; 2002 (Reapproved 2009).G. EPA (NPDES) - National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES), Construction

General Permit; Current Edition.1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements of EPA (NPDES) for erosion and sedimentation control, as specifiedby the NPDES, for Phases I and II, and in compliance with requirements of ConstructionGeneral Permit (CGP), whether the project is required by law to comply or not.

B. Also comply with all more stringent requirements of State of Virginia Erosion and SedimentationControl Manual.

C. Develop and follow an Erosion and Sedimentation Prevention Plan and submit periodicinspection reports.

D. Do not begin clearing, grading, or other work involving disturbance of ground surface cover untilapplicable permits have been obtained; furnish all documentation required to obtain applicablepermits.1. Obtain and pay for permits and provide security required by authority having jurisdiction.2. Owner will withhold payment to Contractor equivalent to all fines resulting from

non-compliance with applicable regulations.


015713 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

E. Provide to Owner a Performance Bond covering erosion and sedimentation preventivemeasures only, in an amount equal to 100 percent of the cost of erosion and sedimentationcontrol work.

F. Timing: Put preventive measures in place as soon as possible after disturbance of surfacecover and before precipitation occurs.

G. Storm Water Runoff: Control increased storm water runoff due to disturbance of surface coverdue to construction activities for this project.1. Prevent runoff into storm and sanitary sewer systems, including open drainage channels,

in excess of actual capacity or amount allowed by authorities having jurisdiction, whicheveris less.

2. Anticipate runoff volume due to the most extreme short term and 24-hour rainfall eventsthat might occur in 25 years.

H. Erosion On Site: Minimize wind, water, and vehicular erosion of soil on project site due toconstruction activities for this project.1. Control movement of sediment and soil from temporary stockpiles of soil.2. Prevent development of ruts due to equipment and vehicular traffic.3. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at

no cost to Owner.I. Erosion Off Site: Prevent erosion of soil and deposition of sediment on other properties caused

by water leaving the project site due to construction activities for this project.1. Prevent windblown soil from leaving the project site.2. Prevent tracking of mud onto public roads outside site.3. Prevent mud and sediment from flowing onto sidewalks and pavements.4. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at

no cost to Owner.J. Sedimentation of Waterways On Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways on the project site,

including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitarysewers.1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to

Owner; remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities havingjurisdiction.

2. If sediment basins are used as temporary preventive measures, pump dry and removedeposited sediment after each storm.

K. Sedimentation of Waterways Off Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways off the project site,including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitarysewers.1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to

Owner; remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities havingjurisdiction.

L. Open Water: Prevent standing water that could become stagnant.M. Maintenance: Maintain temporary preventive measures until permanent measures have been

established.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan:

1. Submit not less than 30 days prior to anticipated start of clearing, grading, or other workinvolving disturbance of ground surface cover.

2. Include:a. Site plan identifying soils and vegetation, existing erosion problems, and areas

vulnerable to erosion due to topography, soils, vegetation, or drainage.b. Measurements of existing turbidity of waterways.


015713 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

c. Site plan showing grading; new improvements; temporary roads, traffic accesses, andother temporary construction; and proposed preventive measures.

d. Where extensive areas of soil will be disturbed, include storm water flow and volumecalculations, soil loss predictions, and proposed preventive measures.

e. Schedule of temporary preventive measures, in relation to ground disturbing activities.f. Other information required by law.g. Format required by law is acceptable, provided any additional information specified is

also included.3. Obtain the approval of the Plan by authorities having jurisdiction.4. Obtain the approval of the Plan by Owner.

C. Certificate: Mill certificate for silt fence fabric attesting that fabric and factory seams comply withspecified requirements, signed by legally authorized official of manufacturer; indicate actualminimum average roll values; identify fabric by roll identification numbers.

D. Inspection Reports: Submit report of each inspection; identify each preventive measure,indicate condition, and specify maintenance or repair required and accomplished.

E. Maintenance Instructions: Provide instructions covering inspection and maintenance fortemporary measures that must remain after Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. Mulch: Use one of the following:1. Straw or hay.2. Wood waste, chips, or bark.3. Erosion control matting or netting.4. Polyethylene film, where specifically indicated only.

B. Grass Seed For Temporary Cover: Select a species appropriate to climate, planting season,and intended purpose. If same area will later be planted with permanent vegetation, do not usespecies known to be excessively competitive or prone to volunteer in subsequent seasons.

C. Bales: Air dry, rectangular straw bales.1. Cross Section: 14 by 18 inches (350 by 450 mm), minimum.2. Bindings: Wire or string, around long dimension.

D. Bale Stakes: One of the following, minimum 3 feet (1 m) long:1. Steel U- or T-section, with minimum mass of 1.33 pound per linear foot (1.98 kg per linear

m).2. Wood, 2 by 2 inches (50 by 50 mm) in cross section.

E. Silt Fence Fabric: Polypropylene geotextile resistant to common soil chemicals, mildew, andinsects; non-biodegradable; in longest lengths possible; fabric including seams with thefollowing minimum average roll lengths:1. Average Opening Size: 30 U.S. Std. Sieve (0.600 mm), maximum, when tested in

accordance with ASTM D4751.2. Permittivity: 0.05 sec^-1, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4491.3. Ultraviolet Resistance: Retaining at least 70 percent of tensile strength, when tested in

accordance with ASTM D4355/D4355M after 500 hours exposure.4. Tensile Strength: 100 pounds-force (450 N), minimum, in cross-machine direction; 124

pounds-force (550 N), minimum, in machine direction; when tested in accordance withASTM D4632/D4632M.

5. Elongation: 15 to 30 percent, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4632/D4632M.6. Tear Strength: 55 pounds-force (245 N), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM

D4533.7. Color: Manufacturer's standard, with embedment and fastener lines preprinted.8. Manufacturers:

a. TenCate: www.tencate.com/#sle.b. North American Green: www.nagreen.com/#sle.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20D4632/D4632M



http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20D4533






015713 - 420181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

c. Propex Geosynthetics: www.geotextile.com/#sle.F. Silt Fence Posts: One of the following, minimum 5 feet (1500 mm) long:

1. Steel U- or T-section, with minimum mass of 1.33 pound per linear foot (1.98 kg per linearm).

G. Gravel: See Section 321123 for aggregate.H. Riprap: See Section 313700.I. Concrete: See Section 033000.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine site and identify existing features that contribute to erosion resistance; maintain suchexisting features to greatest extent possible.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Schedule work so that soil surfaces are left exposed for the minimum amount of time.

3.03 SCOPE OF PREVENTIVE MEASURESA. In all cases, if permanent erosion resistant measures have been installed temporary preventive

measures are not required.B. Construction Entrances: Traffic-bearing aggregate surface.

1. Width: As required; 20 feet (7 m), minimum.2. Length: 50 feet (16 m), minimum.3. Provide at each construction entrance from public right-of-way.4. Where necessary to prevent tracking of mud onto right-of-way, provide wheel washing

area out of direct traffic lane, with drain into sediment trap or basin.C. Linear Sediment Barriers: Made of silt fences.

1. Provide linear sediment barriers:a. Along downhill perimeter edge of disturbed areas, including soil stockpiles.b. Along the top of the slope or top bank of drainage channels and swales that traverse

disturbed areas.c. Along the toe of cut slopes and fill slopes.d. Perpendicular to flow across the bottom of existing and new drainage channels and

swales that traverse disturbed areas or carry runoff from disturbed areas; space atmaximum of 200 feet apart (at maximum of 60 m apart).

e. Across the entrances to culverts that receive runoff from disturbed areas.2. Space sediment barriers with the following maximum slope length upslope from barrier:

a. Slope of Less Than 2 Percent: 100 feet (30 m)..b. Slope Between 2 and 5 Percent: 75 feet (23 m).c. Slope Between 5 and 10 Percent: 50 feet (15 m).d. Slope Between 10 and 20 Percent: 25 feet (7.5 m).e. Slope Over 20 Percent: 15 feet (4.5 m).

D. Storm Drain Curb Inlet Sediment Trap: Protect each curb inlet using one of the followingmeasures:1. Filter fabric wrapped around hollow concrete blocks blocking entire inlet face area; use one

piece of fabric wrapped at least 1-1/2 times around concrete blocks and secured toprevent dislodging; orient cores of blocks so runoff passes into inlet.

2. Straw bale row blocking entire inlet face area; anchor into pavement.E. Storm Drain Drop Inlet Sediment Traps: As detailed on drawings.F. Temporary Splash Pads: Stone aggregate over filter fabric; size to suit application; provide at

downspout outlets and storm water outlets.G. Soil Stockpiles: Protect using one of the following measures:

1. Cover with polyethylene film, secured by placing soil on outer edges.

























































015713 - 520181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

2. Cover with mulch at least 4 inches (100 mm) thickness of pine needles, sawdust, bark,wood chips, or shredded leaves, or 6 inches (150 mm) of straw or hay.

H. Mulching: Use only for areas that may be subjected to erosion for less than 6 months.1. Wood Waste: Use only on slopes 3:1 or flatter; no anchoring required.

I. Temporary Seeding: Use where temporary vegetated cover is required.3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Traffic-Bearing Aggregate Surface:1. Excavate minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).2. Place geotextile fabric full width and length, with minimum 12 inch (300 mm) overlap at

joints.3. Place and compact at least 6 inches (150 mm) of 1 1/2 to 3 1/2 inch (40 to 90 mm)

diameter stone.B. Silt Fences:

1. Store and handle fabric in accordance with ASTM D4873.2. Where slope gradient is less than 3:1 or barriers will be in place less than 6 months, use

nominal 16 inch (405 mm) high barriers with minimum 36 inch (905 mm) long postsspaced at 6 feet (1830 mm) maximum, with fabric embedded at least 4 inches (100 mm) inground.

3. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 or barriers will be in place over 6 months, usenominal 28 inch (710 mm) high barriers, minimum 48 inch (1220 mm) long posts spacedat 6 feet (1830 mm) maximum, with fabric embedded at least 6 inches (150 mm) inground.

4. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 and vertical height of slope between barriers ismore than 20 feet (6 m), use nominal 32 inch (810 mm) high barriers with woven wirereinforcement and steel posts spaced at 4 feet (1220 mm) maximum, with fabricembedded at least 6 inches (150 mm) in ground.

5. Install with top of fabric at nominal height and embedment as specified.6. Embed bottom of fabric in a trench on the upslope side of fence, with 2 inches (50 mm) of

fabric laid flat on bottom of trench facing upslope; backfill trench and compact.7. Do not splice fabric width; minimize splices in fabric length; splice at post only, overlapping

at least 18 inches (460 mm), with extra post.8. Fasten fabric to steel posts using wire, nylon cord, or integral pockets.9. Wherever runoff will flow around end of barrier or over the top, provide temporary splash

pad or other outlet protection; at such outlets in the run of the barrier, make barrier notmore than 12 inches (300 mm) high with post spacing not more than 4 feet (1220 mm).

C. Straw Bale Rows:1. Install bales in continuous rows with ends butting tightly, with one bale at each end of row

turned uphill.2. Install bales so that bindings are not in contact with the ground.3. Embed bales at least 4 inches (100 mm) in the ground.4. Anchor bales with at least two stakes per bale, driven at least 18 inches (450 mm) into the

ground; drive first stake in each bale toward the previously placed bale to force balestogether.

5. Fill gaps between ends of bales with loose straw wedged tightly.6. Place soil excavated for trench against bales on the upslope side of the row, compacted.

D. Mulching Over Large Areas: 1. Dry Straw and Hay: Apply 2-1/2 tons per acre (6350 kg per hectare); anchor using dull

disc harrow or emulsified asphalt applied using same spraying machine at 100 gallons ofwater per ton of mulch.

2. Wood Waste: Apply 6 to 9 tons per acre (15,200 to 20,800 kg per hectare).3. Erosion Control Matting: Comply with manufacturer's instructions.

E. Mulching Over Small and Medium Areas:




























































015713 - 620181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

1. Dry Straw and Hay: Apply 4 to 6 inches (100 to 150 mm) depth.2. Wood Waste: Apply 2 to 3inches (50 to 75 mm) depth.3. Erosion Control Matting: Comply with manufacturer's instructions.

F. Temporary Seeding:1. When hydraulic seeder is used, seedbed preparation is not required.2. When surface soil has been sealed by rainfall or consists of smooth undisturbed cut

slopes, and conventional or manual seeding is to be used, prepare seedbed by scarifyingsufficiently to allow seed to lodge and germinate.

3. If temporary mulching was used on planting area but not removed, apply nitrogen fertilizerat 1 pound per 1000 sq ft (0.5 kg per 100 sq m).

4. On soils of very low fertility, apply 10-10-10 fertilizer at rate of 12 to 16 pounds per 1000 sqft (6 to 8 kg per 100 sq m).

5. Incorporate fertilizer into soil before seeding.6. Apply seed uniformly; if using drill or cultipacker seeders place seed 1/2 to 1 inch (12 to 25

mm) deep.7. Irrigate as required to thoroughly wet soil to depth that will ensure germination, without

causing runoff or erosion.8. Repeat irrigation as required until grass is established.

3.05 MAINTENANCEA. Inspect preventive measures weekly, within 24 hours after the end of any storm that produces

0.5 inches (13 mm) or more rainfall at the project site, and daily during prolonged rainfall.B. Repair deficiencies immediately.C. Silt Fences:

1. Promptly replace fabric that deteriorates unless need for fence has passed.2. Remove silt deposits that exceed one-third of the height of the fence.3. Repair fences that are undercut by runoff or otherwise damaged, whether by runoff or

other causes.D. Straw Bale Rows:

1. Promptly replace bales that fall apart or otherwise deteriorate unless need has passed.2. Remove silt deposits that exceed one-half of the height of the bales.3. Repair bale rows that are undercut by runoff or otherwise damaged, whether by runoff or

other causes.E. Clean out temporary sediment control structures weekly and relocate soil on site.F. Place sediment in appropriate locations on site; do not remove from site.

3.06 CLEAN UPA. Remove temporary measures after permanent measures have been installed, unless permitted

to remain by Architect.B. Clean out temporary sediment control structures that are to remain as permanent measures.C. Where removal of temporary measures would leave exposed soil, shape surface to an

acceptable grade and finish to match adjacent ground surfaces.END OF SECTION
















































TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLSFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

015719 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 015719TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS


A. Construction procedures to promote adequate indoor air quality after construction.1.02 PROJECT GOALS

A. Dust and Airborne Particulates: Prevent deposition of dust and other particulates in HVACducts and equipment.1. Cleaning of ductwork is not contemplated under this Contract.2. Contractor shall bear the cost of cleaning required due to failure to protect ducts and

equipment from construction dust.B. Airborne Contaminants: Procedures and products have been specified to minimize indoor air

pollutants.1. Furnish products meeting the specifications.2. Avoid construction practices that could result in contamination of installed products leading

to indoor air pollution.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASHRAE Std 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for RemovalEfficiency by Particle Size; 2012, with 2015 amendments.

B. SMACNA (OCC) - IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction; 2007.1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Adsorptive Materials: Gypsum board, acoustical ceiling tile and panels, carpet and carpet tile,fabrics, fibrous insulation, and other similar products.

B. Contaminants: Gases, vapors, regulated pollutants, airborne mold and mildew, and the like, asspecified.

C. Particulates: Dust, dirt, and other airborne solid matter.D. Wet Work: Concrete, plaster, coatings, and other products that emit water vapor or volatile

organic compounds during installation, drying, or curing.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. Low VOC Materials: See other sections for specific requirements for materials with low VOCcontent.

B. Auxiliary Air Filters: MERV of 8, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASHRAE Std 52.2.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES

A. Prevent the absorption of moisture and humidity by adsorptive materials by:1. Sequencing the delivery of such materials so that they are not present in the building until

wet work is completed and dry.2. Delivery and storage of such materials in fully sealed moisture-impermeable packaging.3. Provide sufficient ventilation for drying within reasonable time frame.

B. Begin construction ventilation when building is substantially enclosed.C. HVAC equipment and supply air ductwork may be used for ventilation during construction:

1. Operate HVAC system on 100 percent outside air, with 1.5 air changes per hour,minimum.

2. Ensure that air filters are correctly installed prior to starting use; replace filters when theylose efficiency.

3. Do not use return air ductwork for ventilation unless absolutely necessary.

TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLSFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

015719 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

4. Where return air ducts must be used for ventilation, install auxiliary filters at return inlets,sealed to ducts; use filters with at least the equivalent efficiency as those required atsupply air side; inspect and replace filters when they lose efficiency.

D. Do not store construction materials or waste in mechanical or electrical rooms.E. Prior to use of return air ductwork without intake filters clean up and remove dust and debris

generated by construction activities.1. Inspect duct intakes, return air grilles, and terminal units for dust.2. Clean plenum spaces, including top sides of lay-in ceilings, outsides of ducts, tops of pipes

and conduit.3. Clean tops of doors and frames.4. Clean mechanical and electrical rooms, including tops of pipes, ducts, and conduit,

equipment, and supports.5. Clean return plenums of air handling units.6. Remove intake filters last, after cleaning is complete.

F. Do not perform dusty or dirty work after starting use of return air ducts without intake filters.G. Use other relevant recommendations of SMACNA (OCC) for avoiding unnecessary

contamination due to construction procedures.END OF SECTION

TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGEFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

015813 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 015813TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE


A. Project identification sign.1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Design sign and structure to withstand 50 miles/hr (80 km/hr) wind velocity.B. Sign Painter: Experienced as a professional sign painter for minimum three years.C. Finishes, Painting: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for duration of

construction.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SIGN MATERIALS

A. Structure and Framing: New, wood, structurally adequate.B. Sign Surfaces: Exterior grade plywood with medium density overlay, minimum 3/4 inch (19

mm) thick, standard large sizes to minimize joints.C. Rough Hardware: Galvanized.D. Paint and Primers: Exterior quality, two coats; sign background of white color.E. Lettering: Exterior quality paint, contrasting colors.

2.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNA. One painted sign, 48 sq ft (4.5 sq m) area, bottom 6 feet (2 m) above ground.B. Content:

1. Project number, title, logo and name of Owner as indicated on Contract Documents.2. Names and titles of Architect and Consultants.3. Name of Prime Contractor and major Subcontractors.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install project identification sign within 30 days after date fixed by Notice to Proceed.B. Erect at location of high public visibility adjacent to main entrance to site.C. Erect supports and framing on secure foundation, rigidly braced and framed to resist wind

loadings.D. Install sign surface plumb and level, with butt joints. Anchor securely.E. Paint exposed surfaces of sign, supports, and framing.

3.02 MAINTENANCEA. Maintain signs and supports clean, repair deterioration and damage.

3.03 REMOVALA. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at completion of Project and restore the

area.END OF SECTION

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTSFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

016000 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 016000PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS


A. General product requirements.B. Re-use of existing products.C. Transportation, handling, storage and protection.D. Product option requirements.E. Substitution limitations.F. Procedures for Owner-supplied products.G. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 012500 - Substitution Procedures: Substitutions made during procurement and/or

construction phases.B. Section 016116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions: Requirements for

VOC-restricted product categories.C. Section 017419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Waste disposal

requirements potentially affecting product selection, packaging and substitutions.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. 16 CFR 260.13 - Guides for the Use of Environmental Marketing Claims; Federal TradeCommission; Recycled Content; Current Edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to

identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers'standard data to provide information specific to this Project.

B. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electricalcharacteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service forfunctional equipment and appliances.

C. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, withintegral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the

manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 EXISTING PRODUCTS

A. Reused Products: Reused products include materials and equipment previously used in this orother construction, salvaged and refurbished as specified.

2.02 NEW PRODUCTSA. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents.B. Use of products having any of the following characteristics is not permitted:

1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's.2. Made of wood from newly cut old growth timber.

C. Where other criteria are met, Contractor shall give preference to products that:1. If used on interior, have lower emissions, as defined in Section 016116.2. If wet-applied, have lower VOC content, as defined in Section 016116.3. Are extracted, harvested, and/or manufactured closer to the location of the project.4. Have longer documented life span under normal use.


016000 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

5. Result in less construction waste. See Section 017419D. Regionally-Sourced Products:

1. Overall Project Requirement: Provide materials amounting to a minimum of 10 percent ofthe total value of all materials (excluding plumbing, HVAC, electrical, elevators, and otherequipment) that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured,within a radius of 500 miles (805 km) from the project site.

2. Specific Product Categories: Provide regionally-sourced products as specified elsewhere.E. Products with Recycled Content:

1. Specific Product Categories: Provide recycled content as specified elsewhere.2. Calculations: Where information about recycled content is required to be submitted:

a. Determine percentage of post-consumer and post-industrial content separately, usingthe guidelines contained in 16 CFR 260.7(e).

b. Previously used, reused, refurbished, and salvaged products are not consideredrecycled.

c. Wood fabricated from timber abandoned in transit to original mill is consideredreused, not recycled.

d. Determine percentage of recycled content of any item by dividing the weight ofrecycled content in the item by the total weight of all material in the item.

e. Determine value of recycled content of each item separately, by multiplying thecontent percentage by the value of the item.

2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONSA. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting

those standards or description.B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the

manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions:

Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.2.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified inindividual specification sections.

B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 SUBSTITUTION LIMITATIONS

A. See Section 012500 - Substitution Procedures.B. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during

the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section.C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution

with Contract Documents.D. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter:

1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the qualitylevel of the specified product.

2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the

Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become

apparent.5. Will reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with

re-approval by authorities.


016000 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing orproduct data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will requirerevision to the Contract Documents.

F. Substitution Submittal Procedure:1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one

proposed substitution.2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed

product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer.3. The Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request.

3.02 OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTSA. Owner's Responsibilities:

1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples, toContractor.

2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site.3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor.4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient

items.5. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections, and service.

B. Contractor's Responsibilities:1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage jointly with

Owner.3. Handle, store, install and finish products.4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt.

3.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLINGA. Package products for shipment in manner to prevent damage; for equipment, package to avoid

loss of factory calibration.B. If special precautions are required, attach instructions prominently and legibly on outside of

packaging.C. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site

storage time and potential damage to stored materials.D. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.E. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of

surrounding areas.F. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are

correct, and products are undamaged.G. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,

disfigurement, or damage, and to minimize handling.H. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible.

3.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTIONA. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to

installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due toexcessive materials handling and misapplication. See Section 017419.

B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.D. Store sensitive products in weathertight, climate-controlled enclosures in an environment

favorable to product.E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.


016000 - 420181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

F. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection.G. Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations, weather,

precipitation, humidity, temperature, sunlight and ultraviolet light, dirt, dust, and othercontaminants.

H. Comply with manufacturer's warranty conditions, if any.I. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to

prevent condensation and degradation of products.J. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining.K. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,

disfigurement, or damage.L. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify

products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.END OF SECTION

VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENTRESTRICTIONSFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

016116 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 016116VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS


A. Requirements for Indoor-Emissions-Restricted products.B. Requirements for VOC-Content-Restricted products.C. Requirement for installer certification that they did not use any non-compliant products.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures.

1.03 DEFINITIONSA. Indoor-Emissions-Restricted Products: All products in the following product categories, whether

specified or not:1. Interior paints and coatings applied on site.2. Interior adhesives and sealants applied on site, including flooring adhesives.3. Flooring.4. Composite wood.5. Products making up wall and ceiling assemblies.6. Thermal and acoustical insulation.

B. VOC-Content-Restricted Products: All products in the following product categories, whetherspecified or not:1. Interior paints and coatings applied on site.2. Interior adhesives and sealants applied on site, including flooring adhesives.

C. Interior of Building: Anywhere inside the exterior weather barrier.D. Adhesives: All gunnable, trowelable, liquid-applied, and aerosol adhesives, whether specified or

not; including flooring adhesives, resilient base adhesives, and pipe jointing adhesives.E. Sealants: All gunnable, trowelable, and liquid-applied joint sealants and sealant primers,

whether specified or not; including firestopping sealants and duct joint sealers.F. Inherently Non-Emitting Materials: Products composed wholly of minerals or metals, unless

they include organic-based surface coatings, binders, or sealants; and specifically the following:1. Concrete.2. Clay brick.3. Metals that are plated, anodized, or powder-coated.4. Glass.5. Ceramics.6. Solid wood flooring that is unfinished and untreated.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for

Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.B. ASTM D3960 - Standard Practice for Determining Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content of

Paints and Related Coatings; 2005 (Reapproved 2013).C. CAL (CDPH SM) - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical

Emissions From Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers; California Department ofPublic Health; v1.1, 2010.

D. CARB (ATCM) - Airborne Toxic Control Measure to Reduce Formaldehyde Emissions fromComposite Wood Products; California Air Resources Board; current edition.

E. CARB (SCM) - Suggested Control Measure for Architectural Coatings; California Air ResourcesBoard; 2007.


016116 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

F. CHPS (HPPD) - High Performance Products Database; Current Edition at www.chps.net/.G. CRI (GLP) - Green Label Plus Testing Program - Certified Products; www.carpet-rug.org;

current edition.H. UL (GGG) - GREENGUARD Gold Certified Products; UL Environment; current listings at

http://http://productguide.ulenvironment.com/QuickSearch.aspx.I. GreenSeal GS-36 - Commercial Adhesives; 2011.J. SCAQMD 1113 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1113; current edition.K. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition.L. SCS (CPD) - SCS Certified Products; current listings at www.scscertified.com.M. UL (GGG) - GREENGUARD Gold Certified Products; current listings at

http://http://productguide.ulenvironment.com/QuickSearch.aspx.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: For each VOC-restricted product used in the project, submit evidence of

compliance.C. Installer Certifications Regarding Prohibited Content: Require each installer of any type of

product (not just the products for which VOC restrictions are specified) to certify that either 1) noadhesives, joint sealants, paints, coatings, or composite wood or agrifiber products have beenused in the installation of installer's products, or 2) that such products used comply with theserequirements.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Indoor Emissions Standard and Test Method: CAL (CDPH SM), using Standard Private Office

exposure scenario and the allowable concentrations specified in the method, and range of totalVOC's after 14 days.1. Wet-Applied Products: State amount applied in mass per surface area.2. Paints and Coatings: Test tinted products, not just tinting bases.3. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are the following;

a. Current UL (GGG) certification.b. Current SCS (CPD) Floorscore certification.c. Current SCS (CPD) Indoor Advantage Gold certification.d. Current listing in CHPS (HPPD) as a low-emitting product.e. Current CRI (GLP) certification.f. Test report showing compliance and stating exposure scenario used.

4. Product data submittal showing VOC content is NOT acceptable evidence.5. Manufacturer's certification without test report by independent agency is NOT acceptable

evidence.B. VOC Content Test Method: 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), or ASTM D3960, unless

otherwise indicated.1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are:

a. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements.C. Composite Wood Emissions Standard: CARB (ATCM) for ultra-low emitting formaldehyde

(ULEF) resins.1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are:

a. Current SCS "No Added Formaldehyde (NAF)" certification; www.scscertified.com.b. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements.c. Published product data showing compliance with requirements.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing andinspections of the type specified in this section.


016116 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. Indoor-Emissions-Restricted Products: Comply with Indoor Emissions Standard and TestMethod, except for:1. Composite Wood, Wood Fiber, and Wood Chip Products: Comply with Composite Wood

Emissions Standard or contain no added formaldehyde resins.2. Inherently Non-Emitting Materials.

B. VOC-Content-Restricted Products: VOC content not greater than required by the following:1. Adhesives, Including Flooring Adhesives: SCAQMD 1168 Rule.2. Aerosol Adhesives: GreenSeal GS-36.3. Joint Sealants: SCAQMD 1168 Rule.4. Paints and Coatings: Each color; most stringent of the following:

a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.b. SCAQMD 1113 Rule.c. CARB (SCM).

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner reserves the right to reject non-compliant products, whether installed or not, and requiretheir removal and replacement with compliant products at no extra cost to Owner.

B. Additional costs to restore indoor air quality due to installation of non-compliant products will beborne by Contractor.

END OF SECTION

EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTSFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

017000 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 017000EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS


A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures.B. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition.C. Pre-installation meetings.D. Cutting and patching.E. Surveying for laying out the work.F. Cleaning and protection.G. Starting of systems and equipment.H. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel.I. Closeout procedures, including Contractor's Correction Punch List, except payment procedures.J. General requirements for maintenance service.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 017900 - Demonstration and Training: Demonstration of products and systems to be

commissioned and where indicated in specific specification sectionsB. Section 078400 - Firestopping.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONSA. For surveying work, employ a land surveyor registered in the State in which the Project is

located and acceptable to Architect. Submit evidence of surveyor's Errors and Omissionsinsurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate. Employ only individual(s) trainedand experienced in collecting and recording accurate data relevant to ongoing constructionactivities,

B. For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specificservice on Project, licensed in the State in which the Project is located. Employ onlyindividual(s) trained and experienced in establishing and maintaining horizontal and verticalcontrol points necessary for laying out construction work on project of similar size, scope and/orcomplexity.

C. For design of temporary shoring and bracing, employ a Professional Engineer experienced indesign of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Use of explosives is not permitted.B. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain

pumping equipment.C. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site

from soil erosion.D. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent

accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.


017000 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

E. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and overadjacent property.

F. Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainagefrom cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation.1. Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time.2. Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes, and drains, to prevent water flow.3. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or

clays.4. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly

apply corrective measures.G. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by

construction operations.1. Outdoors: Limit conduct of especially noisy exterior work to the hours of 8 am to 5 pm.

H. Pest and Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insectsfrom damaging the work.

I. Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing orinvading premises.

J. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil,water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced byconstruction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS

A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patchingand extending work.

B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products wherenecessary, referring to existing work as a standard.

C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitutiondescribed in Section 016000 - Product Requirements.


A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work beingapplied or attached.

C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize

waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication.E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct

locations.F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements

subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work,assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching meansacceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.


017000 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior toapplying any new material or substance in contact or bond.

3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGSA. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site

prior to commencing work of the section.B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section.C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date.D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting:

1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures.2. Review coordination with related work.

E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with twocopies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORKA. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.B. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered.C. Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points.D. Control datum for survey is that established by Owner provided survey.E. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points

during construction.F. Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required

because of changes in grades or other reasons.G. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes

without prior written notice to Architect.H. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.I. Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to established control

points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on project record documents.J. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar

appropriate means:1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement;

utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations.2. Grid or axis for structures.3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations.

K. Periodically verify layouts by same means.L. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.

3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTSA. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and

horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated.D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.

3.06 ALTERATIONSA. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation only.

Record documents do no exist.1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as indicated.


017000 - 420181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.3. Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required forreplacement or modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage.1. Where openings in exterior enclosure exist, provide construction to make exterior

enclosure weatherproof.2. Insulate existing ducts or pipes that are exposed to outdoor ambient temperatures by

alterations work.C. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.

1. Remove items indicated on drawings.2. Relocate items indicated on drawings.3. Where new surface finishes are to be applied to existing work, perform removals, patch,

and prepare existing surfaces as required to receive new finish; remove existing finish ifnecessary for successful application of new finish.

4. Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicated, patch holes and damagedsurfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible.

D. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, andTelecommunications): Remove, relocate, and extend existing systems to accommodate newconstruction.1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to

equipment and operational components; if necessary, modify installation to allow access orprovide access panel.

2. Where existing systems or equipment are not active and Contract Documents requirereactivation, put back into operational condition; repair supply, distribution, and equipmentas required.

3. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with newservices, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and readyfor service.a. Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections; minimize

duration of outages.b. Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in service.

4. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities.5. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above

accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stuband tag with identification; patch holes left by removal using materials specified for newconstruction.

E. Protect existing work to remain.1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.

F. Adapt existing work to fit new work: Make as neat and smooth transition as possible.1. When existing finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not

possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division andmake recommendation to Architect.

2. Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one, reworkfloors, walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads.

3. Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch (6 mm) or more occurs in existing work, submitrecommendation for providing a smooth transition for Architect review and requestinstructions.

G. Patching: Where the existing surface is not indicated to be refinished, patch to match thesurface finish that existed prior to cutting. Where the surface is indicated to be refinished, patchso that the substrate is ready for the new finish.

H. Refinish existing surfaces as indicated:


017000 - 520181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

1. Where rooms or spaces are indicated to be refinished, refinish all visible existing surfacesto remain to the specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacentfinishes.

2. If mechanical or electrical work is exposed accidentally during the work, re-cover andrefinish to match.

I. Clean existing systems and equipment.J. Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off-site;

do not burn or bury.K. Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete.L. Comply with all other applicable requirements of this section.

3.07 CUTTING AND PATCHINGA. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching.B. See Alterations article above for additional requirements.C. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to:

1. Complete the work.2. Fit products together to integrate with other work.3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services.4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work.5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition.6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work.7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.8. Remove and replace defective and non-complying work.

D. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriatesurfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore tooriginal condition.

E. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistantelements, and sight exposed surfaces.

F. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without priorapproval.

G. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.H. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.I. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids

with fire rated material in accordance with Section 078400, to full thickness of the penetratedelement.

J. Patching:1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous

surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entireunit.

2. Match color, texture, and appearance.3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other

imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repairsubstrate prior to repairing finish.

3.08 PROGRESS CLEANINGA. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly

condition.B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed

or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning

to eliminate dust.


017000 - 620181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and disposeoff-site; do not burn or bury.

3.09 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORKA. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate

work area to prevent damage.D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement

of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is

necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing materialmanufacturer.

G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle coverings if possible.3.10 SYSTEM STARTUP

A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.B. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive

rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage.C. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by

the equipment or system manufacturer.D. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.E. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's

representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.F. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning

correctly.3.11 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION

A. See Section 017900 - Demonstration and Training.3.12 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.3.13 FINAL CLEANING

A. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.B. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains

and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and softsurfaces.

C. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels ornameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment.

D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to thesurface and material being cleaned.

E. Clean filters of operating equipment.F. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, scuppers, overflow drains, area drains, and

drainage systems.G. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.H. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site;

dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury.


017000 - 720181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

3.14 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURESA. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.B. Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for

completion or correction in the Contractor's Correction Punch List for Contractor's Notice ofSubstantial Completion.

C. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Architect's Substantial Completioninspection.

D. Submit written certification containing Contractor's Correction Punch List, that ContractDocuments have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete inaccordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's Substantial Completioninspection.

E. Conduct Substantial Completion inspection and create Final Correction Punch List containingArchitect's and Contractor's comprehensive list of items identified to be completed or correctedand submit to Architect.

F. Correct items of work listed in Final Correction Punch List and comply with requirements foraccess to Owner-occupied areas.

G. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete and ready for Architect's SubstantialCompletion final inspection.

H. Complete items of work determined by Architect listed in executed Certificate of SubstantialCompletion.

3.15 MAINTENANCEA. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections.B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one

year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whicheveris longer.

C. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust,and lubricate as required.

D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replaceparts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component.

E. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor withoutprior written consent of the Owner.

END OF SECTION

SHUTDOWNS & TIE-INS 017450 - 1 Fire Station #8 Bathroom Alterations 1019 Williamsburg Road 20181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA Richmond, Virginia 23231 April 18, 2019

SECTION 017450

SHUTDOWNS AND TIE-INS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. General Requirements

B. Scheduling of Shutdown


A. Section 011000 - Summary of Work

1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination of Work: Perform all cutting, fitting or patching of the Work that may be required to make the several parts thereof join in accordance with the Contract Documents. Perform restoration with competent workmen skilled in the trade.

B. Coordination of Shutdowns: Coordinate shutdown of existing facilities with OWNER. Shutdowns may include, but not be limited to, connections, tie-ins, or anything that will affect the OWNER’s normal operations.

1.4 SCHEDULING OF SHUTDOWN

A. Connections to Existing Facilities: If any connections, replacement, or other work requiring the shutdown of an existing facility is necessary, schedule such work at times when the impact on the OWNER's normal operation is minimal. Overtime, night and weekend work without additional compensation from the OWNER, may be required to make these connections, especially if the connections are made at times other than those specified.

B. Request for Shutdowns: Submit a final written request for each shutdown and tie-in to the OWNER and the ARCHITECT at least seven City working days in advance of any required shutdown. Written requests for each shutdown shall be made by means of a Notice of Operational Impact (NOI). Section 1.5 below summarizes requirements of NOIs.

C. All shutdowns to existing plant and pumping facilities shall be kept to an absolute minimum duration. Shutdowns and tie-ins to existing facilities and to new work to be done under this construction contract shall be done in a manner and at a time approved by the OWNER. A detailed plan of each shutdown and tie-in shall be submitted by the Contractor (including procedure and time table) for the OWNER’s approval. The detailed plan shall


be submitted well in advance of the date scheduled for starting such work to allow time for review by the OWNER and for making revisions to the plan as may be required.

D. No shutdowns shall be made to any part of the existing facilities without the permission of the OWNER.

E. To keep shutdowns to an absolute minimum time:

1. Do all preparatory work possible at each place of work prior to the specified facility being taken out of service.

2. Have adequate personnel and equipment to work simultaneously, if required, at more than one location of shutdown work.

3. Work continuously more than the regularly scheduled working day or work double shifts, if directed by the OWNER.

4. Perform work at a time of day, night or on weekends when the least water demand on the plant or pumping facility exists if directed by the OWNER.

5. Use non-shrink grout or high early-strength concrete at those connection points which may require new concrete work to be joined to existing.

F. Provide all temporary connections and/or controls to operate equipment which may be necessary until final connections and/or controls are complete.

G. The "maximum permissible shutdown", as referred to hereinafter, shall be the total number of consecutive hours or days that normal plant or pumping operation may be interrupted for the performance of that portion of the work. Schedule a work force of sufficient number and shifts to complete the work within the allowed time. If no maximum permissible shutdown time is given, it shall be understood that it will be kept at the absolute minimum duration required to perform the work and within the time frame established by the approved Progress Schedule.

1.5 NOTICE OF OPERATIONAL IMPACT (NOI)

A. Format: Written requests for shutdowns or other impacts on existing facilities shall be accompanied by a NOI. The format of the NOI shall include:

1. Location

2. Activity

3. Impacts

4. Schedule

5. Procedure

6. Support Requirements

7. Personnel


B. Procedure for Development of Final NOI: Submit a draft NOI to the OWNER at least three weeks prior to the written request for shutdown or for notification of operational impacts on existing facilities. The draft NOI will include the following sections prepared by the CONTRACTOR: Location, Activity, Impacts, Schedule, Procedure, and Support Requirements. It will also include Contractor Personnel proposed for the impact. Include supporting information with the draft NOI.

C. The OWNER will review the draft plan and provide comments to the CONTRACTOR. Revise the draft NOI and re-submit for comment. Make necessary submittals until an acceptable NOI is developed. The OWNER will assist the CONTRACTOR to revise the NOI drafts.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Safeguards: Provide all shoring, bracing, supports, and protective devices necessary to safeguard all work and existing facilities during shutdown and tie-in operations.

END OF SECTION

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

017800 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 017800CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS


A. Operation and Maintenance Data.B. Warranties and bonds.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product

data, and samples.B. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data.C. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents beforestart of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments.

2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction andoperated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance.

3. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy willbe reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise contentof all document sets as required prior to final submission.

4. Submit two physical sets and an electronic, searchable and bookmarked file (PDF, etc.) ofrevised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection.

B. Warranties and Bonds:1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with

Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance.2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final

Application for Payment.3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial

Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as thebeginning of the warranty period.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers ofSubcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.

B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, anddata applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.

C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment andsystems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents asmaintenance drawings.

D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructionsfor each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.

3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHESA. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish:

1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations.2. Information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.


017800 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agentsand methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, andrecommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

C. Moisture protection and weather-exposed products: Include product data listing applicablereference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Providerecommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair.

D. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections.E. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed

instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation andmaintenance of the specific products.

3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMSA. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System:

1. Description of unit or system, and component parts.2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests.4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.

B. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printedinstructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation andmaintenance of the specific products.

C. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed.D. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and

sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.

E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventativemaintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; andalignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.

F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.G. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.H. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.I. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams

required for maintenance.J. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed.K. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as installed.L. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and

control diagrams.M. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities

to be maintained in storage.N. Include test and balancing reports.O. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.

3.04 ASSEMBLY OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALSA. Assemble operation and maintenance data into durable manuals for Owner's personnel use,

with data arranged in the same sequence as, and identified by, the specification sections.B. Where systems involve more than one specification section, provide separate tabbed divider for

each system.C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch (216 by 280 mm) three D side ring binders with

durable plastic covers; 2 inch (50 mm) maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used,correlate data into related consistent groupings.


017800 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCEINSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents.

E. Project Directory: Title and address of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers ofArchitect, Consultants, Contractor and subcontractors, with names of responsible parties.

F. Tables of Contents: List every item separated by a divider, using the same identification as onthe divider tab; where multiple volumes are required, include all volumes Tables of Contents ineach volume, with the current volume clearly identified.

G. Dividers: Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system; identify the contentson the divider tab; immediately following the divider tab include a description of product andmajor component parts of equipment.

H. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 20 pound paper.I. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to

size of text pages.J. Arrangement of Contents: Organize each volume in parts as follows:

1. Project Directory.2. Table of Contents, of all volumes, and of this volume.3. Operation and Maintenance Data: Arranged by system, then by product category.

a. Source data.b. Product data, shop drawings, and other submittals.c. Operation and maintenance data.d. Field quality control data.e. Photocopies of warranties and bonds.

4. Design Data: To allow for addition of design data furnished by Architect or others, providea tab labeled "Design Data" and provide a binder large enough to allow for insertion of atleast 20 pages of typed text.

3.05 WARRANTIES AND BONDSA. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers,

and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except foritems put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty untilDate of Substantial completion is determined.

B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.C. Co-execute submittals when required.D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.E. Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 by 11 inch (216 by 279 mm) three D side ring binders

with durable plastic covers.F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of

Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and nameof responsible company principal.

G. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the ProjectManual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in whichspecified, and the name of product or work item.

H. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor,supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.

END OF SECTION

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAININGFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

017900 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 017900DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SUMMARY

A. Demonstration of products and systems to be commissioned and where indicated in specificspecification sections.

B. Training of Owner personnel in operation and maintenance is required for:1. All software-operated systems.2. HVAC systems and equipment.3. Plumbing equipment.4. Electrical systems and equipment.5. Landscape irrigation.6. Items specified in individual product Sections.

C. Training of Owner personnel in care, cleaning, maintenance, and repair is required for:1. Roofing, waterproofing, and other weather-exposed or moisture protection products.2. Finishes, including flooring, wall finishes, ceiling finishes.3. Fixtures and fittings.4. Items specified in individual product Sections.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures; except:1. Make all submittals specified in this section, and elsewhere where indicated for

commissioning purposes, directly to the Commissioning Authority.2. Submit one copy to the Commissioning Authority, not to be returned.3. Make commissioning submittals on time schedule specified by Commissioning Authority.4. Submittals indicated as "Draft" are intended for the use of the Commissioning Authority in

preparation of overall Training Plan; submit in editable electronic format, Microsoft Word2003 preferred.

B. Draft Training Plans: Owner will designate personnel to be trained; tailor training to needs andskill-level of attendees.1. Submit to Commissioning Authority for review and inclusion in overall training plan.2. Submit not less than four weeks prior to start of training.3. Revise and resubmit until acceptable.4. Provide an overall schedule showing all training sessions.5. Include at least the following for each training session:

a. Identification, date, time, and duration.b. Description of products and/or systems to be covered.c. Name of firm and person conducting training; include qualifications.d. Intended audience, such as job description.e. Objectives of training and suggested methods of ensuring adequate training.f. Methods to be used, such as classroom lecture, live demonstrations, hands-on, etc.g. Media to be used, such a slides, hand-outs, etc.h. Training equipment required, such as projector, projection screen, etc., to be provided

by Contractor.C. Training Manuals: Provide training manual for each attendee; allow for minimum of two

attendees per training session.1. Include applicable portion of O&M manuals.2. Include copies of all hand-outs, slides, overheads, video presentations, etc., that are not

included in O&M manuals.3. Provide one extra copy of each training manual to be included with operation and

maintenance data.


017900 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

D. Training Reports: 1. Identification of each training session, date, time, and duration.2. Sign-in sheet showing names and job titles of attendees.3. List of attendee questions and written answers given, including copies of and references to

supporting documentation required for clarification; include answers to questions that couldnot be answered in original training session.

4. Include Commissioning Authority's formal acceptance of training session.E. Video Recordings: Submit digital video recording of each demonstration and training session

for Owner's subsequent use.1. Format: DVD Disc.2. Label each disc and container with session identification and date.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Instructor Qualifications: Familiar with design, operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of

the relevant products and systems. 1. Provide as instructors the most qualified trainer of those contractors and/or installers who

actually supplied and installed the systems and equipment.2. Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects, provide specialists with necessary

qualifications.PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 DEMONSTRATION - GENERAL

A. Demonstrations conducted during system start-up do not qualify as demonstrations for thepurposes of this section, unless approved in advance by Owner.

B. Demonstrations conducted during Functional Testing need not be repeated unless Ownerpersonnel training is specified.

C. Demonstration may be combined with Owner personnel training if applicable.D. Operating Equipment and Systems: Demonstrate operation in all modes, including start-up,

shut-down, seasonal changeover, emergency conditions, and troubleshooting, and maintenanceprocedures, including scheduled and preventive maintenance.1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion.2. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other

season within six months.E. Non-Operating Products: Demonstrate cleaning, scheduled and preventive maintenance, and

repair procedures.1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion.

3.02 TRAINING - GENERALA. Commissioning Authority will prepare the Training Plan based on draft plans submitted.B. Conduct training on-site unless otherwise indicated.C. Owner will provide classroom and seating at no cost to Contractor.D. Do not start training until Functional Testing is complete, unless otherwise specified or approved

by the Commissioning Authority.E. Provide training in minimum two hour segments.F. The Commissioning Authority is responsible for determining that the training by the Contractor

was satisfactorily completed by either interviews or by attending the training sessions, and willprovide approval forms.

G. Training schedule will be subject to availability of Owner's personnel to be trained; re-scheduletraining sessions as required by Owner; once schedule has been approved by Owner failure toconduct sessions according to schedule will be cause for Owner to charge Contractor forpersonnel "show-up" time.


017900 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

H. Review of Facility Policy on Operation and Maintenance Data: During training discuss:1. The location of the O&M manuals and procedures for use and preservation; backup

copies.2. Typical contents and organization of all manuals, including explanatory information, system

narratives, and product specific information.3. Typical uses of the O&M manuals.

I. Product- and System-Specific Training:1. Review the applicable O&M manuals.2. For systems, provide an overview of system operation, design parameters and constraints,

and operational strategies.3. Review instructions for proper operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-down,

seasonal changeover and emergency procedures, and for maintenance, includingpreventative maintenance.

4. Provide hands-on training on all operational modes possible and preventive maintenance.5. Emphasize safe and proper operating requirements; discuss relevant health and safety

issues and emergency procedures.6. Discuss common troubleshooting problems and solutions.7. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation.8. Discuss warranties and guarantees, including procedures necessary to avoid voiding

coverage.9. Review recommended tools and spare parts inventory suggestions of manufacturers.10. Review spare parts and tools required to be furnished by Contractor.11. Review spare parts suppliers and sources and procurement procedures.

J. Be prepared to answer questions raised by training attendees; if unable to answer duringtraining session, provide written response within three days.

END OF SECTION

SPECIAL PROJECT PROVISIONS 019000 - 1 Fire Station #8 Bathroom Alterations 1019 Williamsburg Road 20181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA Richmond, Virginia 23231 April 18, 2019

SECTION 019000

SPECIAL PROJECT PROVISIONS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Powers of the OWNER’S Representatives

B. Subcontracts and Assignments

C. CONTRACTOR's Employees

D. CONTRACTOR’s Default

E. Security

F. Limited Phase II Environmental Site Assessment

G. Miscellaneous Provisions

H. Clarification Requests

I. Area of Operations

J. Work Adjacent to Existing Facilities

K. Existing Facilities Shown on Contract Drawings

L. Relocation of Existing Facilities

M. Photographs or Video Recording

N. Permits

O. Diagrammed Pipelines

P. Connections to Existing Mains


A. Section 013000 Administrative Requirement

B. Section 013216 Construction Progress Schedule

C. Section 017000 Execution and Closeout requirements

1.3 POWERS OF THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVES

A. The OWNER and the ARCHITECT

1. It is covenanted and agreed that the ARCHITECT, in addition to those matters elsewhere herein expressly made subject to his determination, or approval, shall have the power, subject to review by the OWNER:

a. To observe the performance of the work.

b. To condemn or reject work not in conformance with the Contract Documents.


c. To determine the amount, sequence and location of work to be paid for hereunder and, when completed, to make required measurements for payment.

d. To determine all questions of an architectural/engineering character in relation to the work, and to interpret the Plans, Specifications and Addenda.

e. To make minor changes in the work as he deems necessary, provided such changes do not result in a net increase in the cost to the OWNER or to the CONTRACTOR of the work to be done under the Contract.

f. To amplify the Plans, add explanatory information and furnish additional Specifications and Drawings consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents.

g. To determine how the work of this Contract shall be coordinated with the work of other contractors engaged simultaneously on this project, including the power to suspend any part of the work, but not the whole thereof. No compensation shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for such partial suspension other than extending the time for this completion of the work as much as it may have been, in the opinion of the OWNER delayed.

2. The power of the OWNER and the ARCHITECT shall not be limited to the foregoing enumeration, for it is the intent of this Contract that all of the work shall be subject to his reviews and approval, except where the reviews or approval of someone other than the ARCHITECT is expressly called for herein and except as subject to review by the OWNER'S representative. All orders of the OWNER and the ARCHITECT requiring the CONTRACTOR to perform work as Contract work shall be promptly obeyed by the CONTRACTOR.

3. The ARCHITECT, however, shall not have the power to issue an extra work order. The performance of such work on the order of the ARCHITECT without previously obtaining written confirmation thereof from the OWNER in accordance with Section 012500 - Change Order Procedure, shall constitute a waiver of any right to extra compensation therefor. The ARCHITECT has no power to change the terms and provisions of this Contract, except for minor changes where such changes result in no net increase in the Contract price.

4. The OWNER and the ARCHITECT are not responsible for the CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, and the OWNER and the ARCHITECT is not responsible for the CONTRACTOR's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. The OWNER


1. The OWNER in addition to those matters expressly made subject to his determination, direction or approval shall also have the power:

a. To decide any and all questions, claims and disputes in relation to this Contract and its performance, except as herein otherwise specifically provided, and his decisions upon such questions, claims and disputes shall be final and conclusive upon the parties hereto.

b. To authorize modifications or changes in the Contract so as to require:

(1) the performance of Extra Work, or

(2) the omission of Contract Work whenever he deems it in the interest of the OWNER to do so, or both.

c. To suspend any part of the work for a period of up to 30 days whenever, in his judgment, such suspension is required:

(1) for the coordination of work of the various contractors engaged on this project, or

(2) for expediting the completion of the entire project, even though the completion of this particular Contract may be thereby delayed, or

(3) coordination of equipment system testing with plant operations, or

(4) coordination of the work with plant operations.

d. The CONTRACTOR shall not be compensated for any such suspensions other than extending the time for the completion of the work, as much as it may have been, in the opinion of the OWNER, delayed by such suspension, provided the approved aggregate total of such delays does not exceed 60 days. The CONTRACTOR shall be compensated for any additional suspensions which cause the approved aggregate total of such delays to exceed 60 days as outlined in Item 5.8 of the General Conditions of the Contract.

e. If, before the final acceptance of all the work contemplated herein, it shall be deemed necessary by the OWNER to take over, use, occupy, or operate any part of the completed or partly completed work, the OWNER shall have the right to do so and the CONTRACTOR will not, in any way, interfere with or object to the beneficial use, occupation, or operation of such work by the OWNER after receipt of notice in writing from the OWNER that such work or part thereof will be used beneficially by the OWNER on and after the date specified in such notice. Such taking over, beneficial use, occupancy or operation of any part of the completed or partially completed work shall not constitute final acceptance or approval of any such part of the work.

C. No Estoppel

1. The OWNER shall not, nor shall any department, officer, agent, or employee thereof, be bound, precluded, or estopped by any determination, decision, acceptance, return, certificate, or payment made or given under or in connection with this


Contract by any officer, agent or employee of the OWNER from, at any time either before or after final completion and acceptance of the work and payment therefor:

a. showing the true and correct classification, amount, quality, or character of the work done, or that any determination, decision, acceptance, return certificate or payment is untrue, incorrect or improperly made in any particular, or that the work or any part thereof does not in fact conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, and;

b. from demanding and recovering from the CONTRACTOR any overpayments made to him or such damages as it may sustain by reason of his failure to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, or both.

D. No Waiver of Rights

1. Neither the inspection by the OWNER nor observation by the ARCHITECT or any of their employees, nor by any order, measurements or certificate of the OWNER or its employees, officers, or agents, nor by any order of the OWNER for payment of money nor any money, nor any payments for or acceptance of the whole or any part of the work by the OWNER, nor any extension of time, nor any changes in the Contract, Specifications, or Plans, nor any possession by the OWNER or its employees shall operate as a waiver of any provisions of this Contract, nor any power herein provided nor shall any waiver of any breach of this Contract be held as a waiver of any other subsequent breach.

2. Any remedy provided in this Contract shall be taken and construed as cumulative, namely, in addition to each and every other suit, action or legal proceeding. The OWNER shall also be entitled as of right to an injunction against any breach of the provisions of this Contract.

1.4 SUBCONTRACTS AND ASSIGNMENTS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall not assign, transfer, convey, sublet or otherwise dispose of this Contract or of his right, title, or interest therein, or his power to execute such Contract, or to assign any moneys due or to become due thereunder to any other person, firm or corporation unless the previous written consent of the OWNER shall first be obtained thereto and the giving of any such consent to a particular subcontract or assignment shall not dispense with the necessity of such consent to any further or other assignment.

B. The CONTRACTOR is not to subcontract to anyone currently debarred or suspended.

C. If the OWNER finds that the proposed subcontractor is qualified, the CONTRACTOR will be notified in writing. The OWNER may revoke approval of any subcontractor when such subcontractor evidences an unwillingness or inability to perform his work in strict accordance with these Contract Documents. Notice of such revocation of approval will be given in writing to the CONTRACTOR.


D. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly, upon request, file with the OWNER a conformed copy of the subcontract. The CONTRACTOR shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relative to the work to bind subcontractors to the CONTRACTOR by the terms of these Contract Documents, insofar as applicable to the work of subcontractors, and to give the CONTRACTOR the same power as regards terminating any subcontract that the OWNER may exercise over the CONTRACTOR under provisions of these Contract Documents.

E. Each subcontract and each lower tier subcontract shall include appropriate provisions to bind all subcontracting tiers to the requirements of this Contract.

F. No assignment will receive approval unless the instrument of assignment contains a clause to the effect that it is agreed that the funds to be paid the assignee under the assignment are subject to a prior lien for services rendered or materials supplied for the performance of the work called for in the Contract in favor of all persons, firms, or corporations rendering such services or supplying such materials.

1.5 CONTRACTOR'S EMPLOYEES

A. Character and Competency: The CONTRACTOR and his subcontractors shall employ upon all parts of the work herein contracted for only competent, skillful, and trustworthy employees. Should the OWNER at any time give notice, in writing, to the CONTRACTOR or his duly authorized representative on the work that any employee in his opinion is incompetent, disorderly, careless, unobservant of instructions, or in any way a detriment to the satisfactory progress of the work, such employee shall immediately be dismissed and not again allowed upon the "Site".

B. Payroll Reports: The CONTRACTOR and each subcontractor shall furnish to the OWNER, on demand, a duly certified copy of his payroll and also any other information required to document the CONTRACTOR's compliance with the provisions of the law as to the hours of employment and rates of wages. The CONTRACTOR shall not carry on his payroll persons not employed by him. Subcontractor's employees shall be carried only on the payrolls of the employing subcontractor.

1.6 CONTRACTOR'S DEFAULT

A. OWNER'S Right and Notice: It is mutually agreed that; (a) if the CONTRACTOR fails to begin work when required to do so, or (b) if at any time during the progress of the work it shall appear to the OWNER that the CONTRACTOR is not prosecuting the work with reasonable speed, or is delaying the work unreasonably and unnecessarily, or (c) if the force of workmen or quality or quantity of material furnished are not sufficient to insure completion of the work within the specified time and in accordance with the Specifications, or (d) if the CONTRACTOR fails to make prompt payments for materials or labor or to subcontractors for work performed under the Contract, or (e) if legal proceedings have been instituted by others than the OWNER in such manner as to interfere with the progress of the work and may subject the OWNER to peril of litigation or outside claims, or (f) if the CONTRACTOR is adjudged as bankrupt or makes an assignment for the benefit of creditors, or (g) if in any proceeding instituted by or against the CONTRACTOR an order is made or entered granting an extension of time of payment, composition, adjustment, modification, settlement or


satisfaction of his debts or liabilities, or (h) if a receiver or trustee is appointed for the CONTRACTOR or the CONTRACTOR's property, or (i) if the Contract or any part thereof is sublet without the consent of the OWNER being first obtained in writing, or (j) if this Contract or any right, moneys, or claim thereunder is assigned by the CONTRACTOR, otherwise than as herein specified, or (k) if the CONTRACTOR fails in any manner of substance to observe the provisions of this Contract, or (l) if any of the work, machinery, or equipment is defective, and is not replaced as herein provided, or (m) if the work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, then such fact or conditions shall be certified by the OWNER and thereupon the OWNER without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the OWNER, shall have the right to declare the CONTRACTOR in default and so notify the CONTRACTOR by a written notice, setting forth the ground or grounds upon which such default is declared and the CONTRACTOR must discontinue the work, either as a portion of the work or the whole thereof, as directed.

B. CONTRACTOR's Duty Upon Default: Upon receipt of such notice that his Contract is in default, the CONTRACTOR shall immediately discontinue all further operations on the work or such part thereof, and shall immediately quit the site or such part thereof, leaving untouched all plant, materials, equipment, tools and supplies.

C. Completion of Work After CONTRACTOR's Default

1. OWNER, after declaring the CONTRACTOR in default, may then have the work completed or the defective equipment or machinery replaced or anything else done to complete the work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents by such means and in such manner, by Contract with or without public letting, or otherwise, as it may deem advisable, utilizing for such purpose without additional cost to the OWNER such of the CONTRACTOR's plant, materials, equipment, tools and supplies belonging to the CONTRACTOR and remaining on the site, and also such subcontractors as it may deem advisable.

2. The OWNER will withhold funds to cover the costs of all parties, including itself, for the expenses of such completion including liquidated damages, if any, and the cost of reletting. The OWNER shall deduct this expense from moneys due or to become due to the CONTRACTOR under this Contract, or any part thereof, and in case such expense is more than the sum remaining unpaid of the original Contract price, the CONTRACTOR and his sureties shall pay the amount of such deficiency to the OWNER.

3. In the event of default by the CONTRACTOR, the CONTRACTOR hereby waives the right to receive any sums for lost profits on work he has completed and work which must be completed by others as a result of such default.

D. Partial Default: In case the OWNER declares the CONTRACTOR in default as to a part of the work only, the CONTRACTOR shall discontinue such part, shall continue performing the remainder of the work in strict conformity with the terms of the Contract, and shall in no wise hinder or interfere with any other contractor or persons whom the OWNER may engage to complete the work as to which the CONTRACTOR was declared in default.


1.7 SECURITY

A. Project Security

1. The CONTRACTOR is fully responsible for the security of the Work during the construction period. The CONTRACTOR shall take any and all precautions necessary to prevent vandalism, theft etc. to the Work. All costs associated with the replacement or repair of any part of the Work due to vandalism, theft, etc. shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR and included in lump sum bid item #2..

B. Preservation of Property:

1. Preserve from damage equipment structures, pipe and underground structures, existing station security system, and public streets. Note: Normal wear and tear of streets resulting from legitimate use by the CONTRACTOR are not considered as damage. Whenever damages occur to such property, immediately restore to its original condition. Costs for such repairs are incidental to the Contract.

2. In case of failure on the part of the CONTRACTOR to restore property or make good on damage or injury, the OWNER may, upon 24 hours written notice, proceed to repair, rebuild, or otherwise restore such property as may be deemed necessary, and the cost thereof will be deducted from any moneys due or which may become due the CONTRACTOR under this Contract.

1.8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

A. CONTRACTOR's Warranties: In consideration of, and to induce the award of this Contract to him, the CONTRACTOR represents and warrants:

1. That he is not in arrears to the OWNER upon debt or contract, and he is not a defaulter, as surety, contractor, or otherwise.

2. That he is financially solvent and sufficiently experienced and competent to perform the work.

3. That the work can be performed as called for by the Contract Documents.

4. That the facts stated in his proposal and the information given by him are true and correct in all respects.

5. That he is fully informed regarding all the conditions affecting the work to be done and labor and materials to be furnished for the completion of this Contract, and that his information was secured by personal investigation and research.

6. The one (1) warranty period described in General Condition Section 6.13 shall state the date of substantial completion for the Phase I and Phase II portions of the project.


B. Suits at Law

1. In case any action at law or suit in equity may or shall be brought against the OWNER and the ARCHITECT or either of their officers, partners, agents, or employees for or on account of the failure, omission, or neglect of the CONTRACTOR or his subcontractors, employees, or agents, to do or perform any of the covenants, acts, matters, or things by this Contract undertaken to be done or performed by the CONTRACTOR or his subcontractors, employees, or agents, or from any injuries done to property or persons and caused by the negligence or alleged negligence of the CONTRACTOR or his subcontractors, employees, or agents, or in any other manner arising out of the performance of this Contract, then the CONTRACTOR shall immediately assume and take charge of the defense of such actions or suits in like manner and to all intents and purposes as if said actions or suits have been brought directly against the CONTRACTOR, and the CONTRACTOR shall also indemnify and save harmless the OWNER and ARCHITECT and their officers, partners, agents and employees from any and all loss, cost or damage including attorney's fees whatever arising out of such actions or suits, in like manner and to all intents and purposes as if said actions or suits had been brought directly against the CONTRACTOR and the CONTRACTOR shall also indemnify and save harmless the OWNER, and ARCHITECT and their officers, partners, agents and employees from any and all loss, cost or damage including attorney's fees whatever brought as aforesaid.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall and does hereby assume all liability for and agrees to indemnify the OWNER and ARCHITECT against any or all loss, costs, damages including attorney's fees and liability for any or by reason of any lien, claims or demands, either for materials purchased or for work performed by laborers, mechanics, and others, and from any damages, costs, actions, or causes of action and judgment arising from injuries sustained by mechanics, laborers, or other persons by reason of accidents or otherwise, whether caused by the carelessness or inefficiency or neglect of said CONTRACTOR, his subcontractors, agents, employees, workmen or otherwise.

C. Claims for Damages: If the CONTRACTOR claims compensation for any damage sustained, other than for extra or disputed work covered by these Subsections, by reason of any act or omission of the OWNER, its agents, or other persons, he shall, within 15 days after sustaining such damage, make and deliver to the OWNER a written statement of the nature of the damage sustained and of the basis of the claim against the OWNER. Within 15 days after sustaining such damage, or within such additional time beyond that date as may be granted by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall make and deliver to the OWNER an itemized statement of the details and amounts of such damage. Unless such statements are made and delivered within the times aforesaid, it is agreed that all claims for such compensation shall be forfeited and invalidated, and the CONTRACTOR shall be deemed to have waived his right to recover on such claims.

D. No Claims against Individuals: No claim whatsoever shall be made by the CONTRACTOR against any officer, agent, or employee of the OWNER for, or on account of, anything done or omitted to be done in connection with this Contract.


E. Liability Unaffected: Nothing herein contained shall in any manner create any liability against the OWNER on behalf of any claim for labor, services, or materials, or of subcontractors, and nothing herein contained shall affect the liability of the CONTRACTOR or his sureties to the OWNER or to any workmen or material men upon bond given in connection with this Contract.

F. Unlawful Provisions Deemed Stricken: If this Contract contains any unlawful provisions not an essential part of the Contract and which shall not appear to have been a controlling or material inducement to the making thereof, such provisions shall be deemed of no effect and shall, upon notice by either party, be deemed stricken from the Contract without affecting the binding force of the remainder.

G. Legal Provisions Deemed Included: Each and every provision of any law and clause required by law to be inserted in this Contract shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though it were included herein and if, through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted or is not correctly inserted, then upon application of either party the Contract shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion.

H. Death or Incompetency of CONTRACTOR: In the event of death or legal incompetency of a CONTRACTOR who shall be an individual or surviving member of a contracting firm, such death or adjudication of incompetency shall not terminate the Contract, but shall act as a default hereunder to the effect provided in paragraph hereof and the estate of the CONTRACTOR and his surety shall remain liable hereunder to the same extent as though the CONTRACTOR had lived or not been so adjudicated. Notice of default, as provided in Paragraph 1.6.A shall not be required to be given in the event of such death or adjudication of incompetency.

I. Number and Gender of Words: Whenever the context so admits or requires, all references herein in one number shall be deemed extended to and including the other number, whether singular or plural, and the use of any gender shall be applicable to all genders.

1.9 CLARIFICATION REQUESTS

A. During the work the CONTRACTOR may request clarification of the information presented of the Contract Documents. Such requests for information shall be in writing on a Clarification Request Form. The final format for the Clarification Request Form will be provided to the CONTRACTOR at the preconstruction meeting.

1.10 AREA OF OPERATIONS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall limit his operations generally to the area around the facilities included in the Contract.

B. Access or work required in other areas of the site shall be arranged and coordinated with the OWNER.


1.11 WORK ADJACENT TO EXISTING FACILITIES

A. All existing facilities, construction or adjacent property shall be adequately protected, to the satisfaction of the OWNER, during all work under the Contract. Such facilities include but are not limited to structure, building, utilities, process pipelines, storm and sanitary sewerage, excavations, ditches, tress, conduits and electrical systems, any existing facilities and any appurtenances thereto.

B. Any existing facilities, construction or adjacent property which are damaged, disturbed, destroyed or otherwise, in the opinion of the OWNER, have their usefulness or operation impaired by work under this Contract shall be replaced by new and equal items or restored, all to the satisfaction of the OWNER, by the CONTRACTOR at his own expense and no separate payment will be made therefor.

1.12 EXISTING FACILITIES SHOWN ON CONTRACT DRAWINGS

A. The Contract Drawings are considered to be substantially complete and accurate with respect to the types and locations of existing facilities, but are not guaranteed to be absolutely so.

B. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to make his own investigations to fully inform himself of the location, character, condition and extent of all existing facilities as may be encountered and as may affect the construction operations.

1.13 RELOCATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

A. The work shall include all labor, materials, equipment and all work necessary to relocate any existing facilities (including lights, ductwork, electrical conduit and wiring, small piping and the like), whether shown or not, that interfere with the proper installation of the new and relocated piping and equipment as required.

1.14 PHOTOGRAPHS OR VIDEO RECORDING

A. From time to time during progress of the work, photographs or video record of the work will be taken by the OWNER or their authorized representatives at no expense to the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall, however, furnish access to the work at all times for this purpose and shall furnish such assistance as may be required.

B. The photographs or DVDs thus taken shall be the property of the OWNER. Nothing herein outlined shall be construed as prohibiting the taking of photographs or videotapes by the CONTRACTOR or his agents provided it is done at no expense to the OWNER.

1.15 PERMITS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain permits from various City agencies necessary for the work. This will include but not be limited to:

Building Permit


Electrical Permit

Mechanical Permit

Demolition Permit

Land Disturbance Permit

Work in Streets Permit

Storm water Permit

All Utility Permits

B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a copy of the permit application and approved permit to the OWNER prior to starting any work that involves land disturbance, demolition, blasting, construction access, work in the waters of the state or work in the street.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain any other permits required from any Federal, State, or City agencies having jurisdiction for the work. The CONTRACTOR shall be required to comply with all provisions of such permits regarding workmanship, schedules, maintenance of existing operations, notification of starting construction time restrictions upon closing streets, traffic control, and other conditions under which the permit is issued.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all permits, licenses and other authorizations required from the prosecution of the work, including the cost of all work performed in compliance with the terms and conditions of such permits, licenses and authorizations, whether by himself or others. The CONTRACTOR's cost to obtain any required permits shall be included under the various unit price or lump sump Contract Items and no separate payment will be made therefor.

E. The CONTRACTOR shall provide copies of such permits to the OWNER prior to commencing any work associated with a required permit. The CONTRACTOR shall abide by all requirements of such permits.

F. Compliance with any permit does not relieve the CONTRACTOR from the responsibility to complete the work as shown, specified and required for a complete operating system.

1.16 DIAGRAMMED PIPELINES

A. Various pipelines are shown on the Contract Drawings in diagram form. Where such pipelines are shown only in diagram, they shall be arranged clear of other pipelines, equipment and walking areas, and be accessible for maintenance. Such pipelines shall be fitted and installed in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with approved shop drawings. An adequate number of unions shall be provided in main pipe and branch pipe runs to facilitate dismantling or removal of pipeline sections without disturbing adjacent branch or connecting lines.

B. The final locations of hose valves, pipe drain valves, and other such appurtenances included as a part of diagrammed pipelines shall be as shown on approved shop drawings or as approved in the field by the OWNER or ARCHITECT.


C. The cost of furnishing, fabricating, locating, erecting and otherwise completely and properly installing all diagramed pipelines shall be included in the lump sum Contract Item for Structures and Equipment Work and no separate payment will be made therefor.

1.17 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING MAINS AND INSTALLATION OF NEW VALVES

A. Connections to existing mains and installation of new valves shall be governed by the following conditions:

1. Locations of existing piping shown on the Plans should be considered approximate.

2. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for determining exact location of existing piping to which he shall make connections, or which he may disturb during earth-moving operations, or which may be affected by his work in any way.

3. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the removal of any pipelines from service to fit the needs of the OWNER. This could require the performance of certain connections at night.

4. Cut pipes as shown or required with machines specifically designed for this work.

5. Install temporary plugs to keep out all mud, dirt, water and debris from pipes during connection or valve installation work.

6. Provide all necessary adapters, fittings, pipe and appurtenances required.

7. Connections to existing water mains and installation of new valves shall be performed by City forces. CONTRACTOR is to coordinate with these forces.

8. Submit to the OWNER for approval a detailed, dimensioned drawing and laying schedule showing laying lengths of all pipe, fittings, and specials proposed for each connection or valve installation prior to performing the work.

9. Scheduling connections to the existing mains shall be coordinated with the utility provider. The work shall be performed when water demands are not critical, as

directed by the utility provider. Existing valves shall be operated by the utility company personnel only.

10. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the OWNER for approval a detailed schedule of operations for each connection, at least fourteen (14) days prior to beginning the work. After receiving approval, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the OWNER with at least 48 hours notice prior to beginning work.

B. All work and costs associated with conditions governing connections to existing mains shall be included with the prices bid for the various classified unit price and lump sump Contract Items and no separate payment will be made therefor.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION

DEMOLITIONFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

024100 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 024100DEMOLITION


A. Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes.B. Abandonment and removal of existing utilities and utility structures for alteration purposes.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Appendix A - Hazardous Materials Report: Existing building survey conducted by Owner;

information about known hazardous materials.B. Section 011000 - Summary: Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises.C. Section 011000 - Summary: Description of items to be salvaged or removed for re-use by

Contractor.D. Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers,

and waste removal.E. Section 015713 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control.F. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Handling and storage of items removed for salvage

and relocation.G. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of

bench marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation ofremoved products; temporary bracing and shoring.

H. Section 017419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal ofremoved materials; requirements for recycling.

I. Section 312323 - Fill: Fill material for filling holes, pits, and excavations generated as a result ofremoval operations.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 29 CFR 1926 - U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition.B. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations;

2013.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Site Plan: Showing:

1. Areas for temporary construction and field offices.C. Demolition Plan: Submit demolition plan as specified by OSHA and local authorities.

1. Indicate extent of demolition, removal sequence, bracing and shoring, and location andconstruction of barricades and fences.

2. Identify demolition firm and submit qualifications.D. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities

and subsurface construction.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Company specializing in the type of work required.PART 2 PRODUCTS -- NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 SCOPE

A. Repair, patch and prepare all existing substrates disturbed during demolition to receive newwork as indicated on the drawings or if disturbed and not part of new work to match originaladjacent substrate and finish in materials, texture, sheen, color, dimensions and workmanship.


024100 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

B. Saw cut and remove areas of existing concrete floor slab as indicated on drawings.C. Remove existing utilities, plumbing fixtures and accessories, electrical fixtures and accessories,

toilet partitions, toilet accessories, doors and door frames, thick set wall, sill, threshold and floortile, stone accessories, window treatments and finish carpentry as indicated on the drawings,including for example, mounting hardware, anchors and supports. Items embedded in substrateshall be removed a minimum of 1" beyond/beneath/above existing substrate face. Repair andpatch substrate to provide solid, sound, flat aligned surface to recieve new work.

D. Make safe and cap all utilities at point where removal is terminated. Prior to capping existingutilities verify termination will allow capped utility a minimum of 1" of sustrate repair materialcover that is solid, sound, flat, and aligned with existing adjacent substate face.

E. Remove other items indicated, for salvage, relocation, and recycling.F. Fill excavations, open pits, and holes in ground areas generated as result of removals, using

specified fill; compact fill as specified in Section 312200.3.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Comply with other requirements specified in Section 017000.B. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent

structures and the public.1. Obtain required permits.2. Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 241.3. Use of explosives is not permitted.4. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be

removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse ofunstable structures.

5. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices.6. Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the

public.7. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and

occupants.8. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit.9. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do

not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits fromremoval operations.

10. Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipmentwill traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property.

C. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner.D. Do not begin removal until built elements to be salvaged or relocated have been removed.E. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed.

1. Provide bracing and shoring.2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures.3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger.

F. Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will result inice, flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution.

G. Hazardous Materials: Comply with 29 CFR 1926 and state and local regulations.H. Perform demolition in a manner that maximizes salvage and recycling of materials.

1. Dismantle existing construction and separate materials.3.03 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with theirrequirements; obtain required permits.

B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage.


024100 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction.D. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7

days prior written notification to Owner.E. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take-offs that are in use without at

least 3 days prior written notification to Owner.F. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of

utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades ifnecessary.

G. Remove exposed piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of disconnectedand abandoned utilities as indicated on the drawings.

3.04 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONSA. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation only.

1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as indicated.2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be

apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition.B. Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for

replacement or modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage.C. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.

1. Remove rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete; replacewith new construction specified.

2. Remove items indicated on drawings.D. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, and

Telecommunications): Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated.1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to

equipment and operational components.2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new

services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and readyfor service.

3. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal.4. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above

accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stuband tag with identification.

E. Protect existing work to remain.1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.4. Patch as specified for patching new work.

3.05 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVALA. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site.B. Remove from site all materials not to be reused on site; comply with requirements of Section

017419 - Waste Management.C. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.D. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands.

END OF SECTION

ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 028213-1 Fire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations 138 South Jefferson Street 20181101 – CORFS-6+8-BA Richmond, Virginia 23220 April 18, 2019

SECTION 028213 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. RELATED DOCUMENTS: Asbestos Sampling Report, Asbestos Abatement Drawing, and General Provisions of the Contract apply to this work.

B. SCOPE OF WORK: Removals and relocations shall include all work required and

inferred to be consistent with the drawings and as necessary to provide completed work starting with the conditions existing prior to commencing work.

C. SPECIFICATION: This section of the specification covers the removal of asbestos-

containing building materials (ACBM). At all times an Asbestos Abatement Supervisor and Asbestos Project Monitor shall be on site and available while asbestos abatement is taking place. All abatement work shall be done in strict accordance with the specifications. The contractor shall field verify all materials, quantities, locations, and field conditions prior to submitting their bid proposal. Compliance with all applicable Federal, State, and local procedures, and methods for preparation, execution, cleanup, disposal, and safety are absolutely required. This compliance is the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

D. QUANTITIES: The quantities presented in this document or referenced documents are

estimates and shall not be relied upon by the Contractor as the sole source for their bids. The contractor shall field verify all materials, quantities, locations, and field conditions prior to submitting their bid proposal.

E. PROJECT SUMMARY: Building materials determined or assumed to contain asbestos

and scheduled to be abated under the scope of this project include the following:

1. Remove and dispose of asbestos-containing Textured ceiling plaster located in the restroom and shower area. The remaining asbestos-containing textured ceiling plaster located throughout the rest of the building shall remain in place and not disturbed as a part of this renovation project.

2. Remove and dispose of asbestos-containing pipe insulation expected to be found above the plaster ceiling. Exposed asbestos-containing pipe insulation and mudded joint packing (MJP) elbow insulation was previously removed from the bathroom. It is expected that the pipes concealed above the plaster ceiling are still insulated with asbestos insulation.

3. Remove and dispose of assumed asbestos-containing adhesive / mastic that is assumed to be located behind bathroom fixtures such as the mirrors.

1.02 DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish all labor, materials, services, insurance, and equipment in accordance with the most stringent requirements of EPA and OSHA and all other applicable regulatory agencies, to complete the removal of asbestos-containing materials as described in the Summary of Work. Disturbance of asbestos-containing materials (including materials


determined to contain a trace of asbestos) shall only be done by individuals licensed as asbestos-containing Supervisors or Workers by the Virginia Department of Professional Occupational Regulations (DPOR).

1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Pre-work Submittal

1. ABATEMENT PLAN: Submit a drawing (8 ½ x 11) showing the expected set-up of the containment including, but not limited to, decontamination unit(s), barriers, location of negative air machines, routes of removing asbestos-containing waste.

2. SCHEDULE: Submit an expected work schedule showing the number of days for anticipated completion.

3. NOTIFICATION: Submit notices required by federal, state, and local regulations together with proof of timely transmittal to agency requiring the notice.

4. LICENSES: Submit copies of all state and local licenses and permits necessary to carry out the work including but not limited to contractor license, supervisor licenses, and worker licenses.

5. WORKER TRAINING: The Contractor shall submit a list of the persons who will be employed by him and his subcontractors in the removal work. Present evidence that workers have received proper training required by regulations and the medical examinations required by OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101. Distinguish between trained, full-time personnel and "pick-up" labor.

6. EQUIPMENT: Submit manufacturer's certification that vacuums, negative pressure equipment, respirators, and air supply equipment meet all requirements of OSHA and EPA. Include descriptions of any equipment to be employed not previously discussed.

7. NOTICES TO SUPPLIERS: Copies of notices sent to suppliers of rental equipment and vehicles informing them of the nature of the use of their equipment.

8. MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET: Submit a Material Safety Data Sheet, or equivalent for each material proposed for use on the work in accordance with the OSHA Hazard Communication Standard (29 CFR 1910.1200). Include a separate attachment for each sheet indicating the specific worker protective equipment proposed for use with the material indicated and/or manufacturer's specification.

B. Close-Out Submittal

1. Submit copies of the fully completed Waste Shipment Records (WSR) as

documentation of compliance with NESHAP 61.150 (d) (3) and (4). 2. Submit copies of the daily progress log. 3. Submit copies of Visitors' Log. 4. Submit certification that rental vehicles and equipment have received clearance

inspection by Project Superintendent prior to return to Rental Company. 5. Submit OSHA compliance air monitoring records conducted during the work.

1.04 TERMINOLOGY (Definitions)

A. ABATEMENT: Procedure to control fiber release from asbestos-containing building materials.


B. FOR THIS PROJECT:

1. Removal - All herein specified procedures necessary to remove asbestos-containing materials from an area and dispose of the materials at an acceptable site in an acceptable manner.

2. Post-Removal Surface Encapsulation - Procedures necessary to coat surfaces from which asbestos-containing materials have been removed to control any residual fiber release.

3. Abatement Activities - Any activity requiring respiratory protection as per this project manual, which disturbs or has the potential to disturb any asbestos-containing building material. This includes, but is not limited to, the following activities: precleaning, installing polyethylene, ACBM removal, encapsulation, and enclosure.

C. ACBM OR ACM: Asbestos-containing building materials or asbestos-containing

materials. D. AIR LOCK: A system for permitting ingress or egress without permitting air movement

from a contaminated area into an uncontaminated area, typically consisting of two (2) curtained doorways at least three (3) feet apart.

E. AIR MONITORING: The process of measuring the fiber content of a specific volume of air in a stated period of time. For this project, NIOSH Analytical Method 7400 shall be used. When "aggressive" air sampling is specified, blowers/fans are used to disperse settled fibers into the air during sampling.

F. AMENDED WATER: Water to which a surfactant has been added to reduce water surface tension and thereby provide a more rapid penetration.

G. AUTHORIZED VISITOR: The Building Owner, the Building Owner's representative or a representative of any regulatory or other agency having jurisdiction over the project.

F. BARRIER: Any surface that inhibits air and fiber movement from the work area to non-work areas. Can be comprised of one or a combination of several materials, including but not limited to plywood, polyethylene sheeting, duct tape, and spray-poly. A critical barrier is one that seals any opening (such as doorways, vents, windows, penetrations) between the work area and non-work area.

G. BUILDING OWNER: The Owner or authorized representative. H. CURTAINED DOORWAY: Device to allow ingress or egress from one room to another

while permitting minimal air movement between the rooms, typically constructed by placing three overlapping sheets of opaque 6-mil polyethylene over an existing or temporarily framed doorway, securing each along the top of the doorway, securing the vertical edge of one sheet along one vertical side of the doorway, and securing the vertical edge of the other sheet along the opposite vertical side of the doorway.

I. DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE SYSTEM: A series of connected rooms, with air

locks between any two adjacent rooms, for the decontamination of workers and/or materials and equipment, constructed or moved onto site.

J. EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION UNIT: Decontamination enclosure system for

materials and equipment, typically consisting of a designated area of the work area


(wash-down station), a washroom, a holding room, a container room, and an uncontaminated area.

K. GROSS ABATEMENT AREA: An asbestos removal area that is sealed and fully

contained in polyethylene. Workers enter the abatement area through a decontamination enclosure system.

L. PERSONNEL DECONTAMINATION UNIT: A decontamination enclosure system for

workers, typically consisting of a designated area of the work area (gross contaminant removal station), an equipment room, an air lock, a shower, an air lock, and a clean room.

1. Equipment Room: A contaminated area or room in the personnel decontamination

enclosure system with provisions for storage of contaminated clothing and equipment.

2. AIR LOCK 3. Shower Room: A room between the two (2) air locks in the personnel

decontamination enclosure system with hot and cold running water suitably arranged for complete showering during decontamination.

4. AIR LOCK 5. Clean Room: An uncontaminated area or room that is part of the worker

decontamination unit with provisions for storage of workers' street clothes and protective equipment.

M. FIXED OBJECT: A unit of equipment or furniture in the work area that cannot be

removed from the work area without dismantling. N. HEPA FILTER: A high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter capable of trapping and

retaining 99.97% of asbestos fibers greater than 0.3 microns in length. O. HEPA VACUUM EQUIPMENT: High efficiency particulate air filtered vacuuming

equipment with a filter system capable of collecting and retaining asbestos fibers. Filters should be of 99.97% efficiency for retaining fibers greater than 0.3 microns in length.

P. NEGATIVE AIR PRESSURE EQUIPMENT: A local exhaust system, capable of

maintaining constant, low velocity airflow through the Decontamination Unit and into the Work Area from adjacent uncontaminated areas and exhausting that air outside the building through HEPA filters.

Q. NIOSH: National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health. R. ON-SITE REPRESENTATIVE: Owner's full-time representative responsible for air

monitoring and site observation. Also referred to as Project Monitor. S. PLASTICIZING: Procedures necessary using polyethylene sheeting, adhesives, and/or

taping to seal an area airtight. T. POST REMOVAL ENCAPSULATION: A liquid material which can be applied to surfaces

from which asbestos-containing materials have been removed to control the possible release of residual asbestos fibers, either by creating a membrane over the surface (bridging encapsulant) or by penetrating into the material and binding its components (penetrating encapsulant).


U. SURFACTANT: A chemical wetting agent added to water to improve penetration, thus reducing the quantity of water required for a given operation or area.

V. WET CLEANING/WIPING: The process of eliminating contamination from building

surfaces and objects by using cloths, mops, or other cleaning tools which have been dampened with water, and by afterwards disposing of these cleaning tools as asbestos-contaminated waste.

1.05 CODES AND REGULATIONS

A. GENERAL APPLICABILITY OF CODES, REGULATIONS, AND STANDARDS: Except to the extent that more explicit or more stringent requirements are written directly into the contract documents, all applicable codes, regulations, and standards have the same force and effect (and are made a part of the contract documents by reference) as if copied directly into the contract documents, or as if published copies are bound herewith.

B. FEDERAL REGULATIONS: Those which govern asbestos abatement work or hauling and disposal of asbestos waste materials include but are not limited to the following:

1. US Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, (OSHA),

including but not limited to:

a. Asbestos Regulations - Title 29, Part 1910, Section 1001 of the Code of Federal Regulations

b. Respiratory Protection - Title 29, Part 1910, Section 134 of the Code of Federal Regulations

c. Construction Industry - Title 29, Part 1926, Section 1101 of the Code of Federal Regulations

d. Access to Employee Exposure & Medical Records - Title 29, Part 1910, Section 20 of the Code of Federal Regulations

e. Hazard Communication - Title 29, Part 1910, Section 1200 of the Code of Federal Regulations

f. Specifications for Accident Prevention Signs and Tags - Title 29, Part 1910, Section 145 of the Code of Federal Regulations

2. US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) including but not limited to:

Worker Protection Rule 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart G CPTS 62044, FLR 2843-9 Federal Register, Vol. 50, No. 134, 7/12/85 P28530-28540

a. Regulation for Asbestos - Title 40, Part 61, Subpart A of the Code of Federal

Regulations b. National Emission Standard for Asbestos - Title 40, Part 61, Subpart M of the

Code of Federal Regulations including Asbestos NESHAP Revision; Final Rule, Federal Register; Tuesday, November 20, 1990.

c. Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA) - 40 CFR Part 763

3. US Department of Transportation (DOT) including but not limited to:


a. Hazardous Substances: Final Rule - Regulation 49 CFR, Parts 171 and 172

C. STATE AND LOCAL REGULATIONS: Abide by all state and local regulations which govern asbestos abatement work or hauling and disposal of asbestos waste materials, including but not limited to:

1. Virginia Department of Labor and Industry

a. Licensed Asbestos Contractor Notification, Asbestos Project Permits, and

Permit Fees Regulations VR 425-01-74

2. Virginia Department of Environmental Quality

a. Solid Waste Regulations VR 672-20-10

D. STANDARDS: Those which discuss asbestos abatement work or hauling and disposal of asbestos waste materials are not limited to the following:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

a. Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, Publication Z9.2-79

b. Practices for Respiratory Protection, Publication Z88.2-80

E. EPA GUIDANCE DOCUMENTS: Those that discuss asbestos abatement work or hauling and disposal of asbestos waste materials are listed below only for the Contractor's information. These documents do not describe the work and are not a part of the work of this contract.

1. Guidance for Controlling Asbestos-Containing Materials in Buildings (Purple Book)

EPA560/5-85-024. 2. Asbestos Waste Management Guidance EPA 530-SW-85-007.

1.06 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT PHASING

A. Asbestos abatement work shall be scheduled and coordinated with the General Contractor and Owner’s Project Monitor. A minimum of 48-hours’ notice shall be provided to the Project Monitor prior to mobilization. No abatement activities shall take place without the knowledge of the Owner’s Project Monitor. To do so would be a breach of contract.

PART 2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 2.01 PERSONNEL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Prior to commencement of work, the workers shall be instructed and shall be knowledgeable on the hazards of asbestos exposure, use and fitting of respirators, protective clothing, decontamination procedures, and all aspects of asbestos work procedures; workers shall have medical examinations.


B. The Contractor acknowledges that he alone is responsible for enforcing personnel protection requirements and that these specifications provide only a minimum acceptable standard for each phase of operation.

C. Provide workers with personally issued and marked respiratory equipment approved by

NIOSH and accepted by OSHA. D. Where not in violation of NIOSH and OSHA requirements, the contractor shall provide, as

a minimum, the following respirator protection for each phase of operation:

1. Precleaning/Wet Wiping of Area: No respiratory protection is required in this phase.

2. Plastic Installation: No respiratory protection is required in this phase. 3. Asbestos Removal: MSHA/NIOSH half-face dual cartridge respirators equipped

with HEPA cartridges. If removal solvents are to be utilized on site, appropriate respiratory protection is required in accordance with the manufactures recommendation.

4. Plastic Removal: MSHA/NIOSH half-face dual cartridge respirators equipped with HEPA cartridges.

5. Loading Waste Material on Truck (outside work area): MSHA/NIOSH half-face dual cartridge respirators equipped with HEPA cartridges.

6. Unloading Bags at Landfill: MSHA/NIOSH half-face dual cartridge respirators equipped with HEPA cartridges.

E. The above schedule is the minimum respiratory protection acceptable. Should any

condition, for any reason, be encountered where the exposure level, after application of the appropriate protection factor of the respiratory equipment in use, exceeds 0.01 f/cc, substitute respiratory equipment with protection factors that reduce worker exposure levels below 0.01 f/cc.

F. No visitors shall be allowed in work areas, except as authorized by the Owner.

G. Provide workers with sufficient sets of disposable protective full-body clothing. Such

clothing shall consist of full-body coveralls, footwear, and headgear as manufactured by Kimberly Clark "Kleenguard", one-piece coveralls or equal. Provide eye protection and hard hats as required by applicable safety regulations. Reusable type protective clothing and footwear intended for reuse shall be left in the Contaminated Equipment Room until the end of the asbestos abatement work at which time shall be disposed of as asbestos waste. Disposable clothing shall not be allowed to accumulate and shall be disposed of as contaminated waste.

H. Provide authorized visitors, including the Owner’s Project Monitor, with suitable protective

clothing, headgear, footwear, and gloves as described above whenever they are required to enter the work area.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Deliver all materials in the original packages, containers, or bundles bearing the name of the manufacturer and the brand name.

1. Store all materials subject to damage off the ground, away from wet or damp

surfaces, and under cover sufficient to prevent damage or contamination.


2. Damaged or deteriorating materials shall not be used and shall be removed from the premises. Material that becomes contaminated with asbestos shall be disposed of in accordance with applicable regulations.

B. PLASTIC SHEETING: Flame retardant polyethylene sheeting shall be used where

applicable to comply with fire code requirements. C. TAPE: Capable of sealing joints of adjacent sheets of polyethylene and for attachment of

polyethylene sheets to finished or unfinished surfaces of dissimilar materials and capable of adhering under both dry and wet conditions, including use of amended water, duct tape, poly prep tapes or approved equal.

D. ADHESIVES: Capable of sealing joints of adjacent sheets of polyethylene and for

attachment of polyethylene sheet to finished or unfinished surfaces of dissimilar materials and capable of adhering under both dry and wet conditions, including use of amended water.

E. CAULKS: Not Applicable. F. SURFACTANT: Shall consist of 50% polyoxyethylene ether and 50% of polyoxyethylene

ester, or equivalent, and shall be mixed with water to provide a concentration of one ounce of surfactant to 5 gallons of water. Use "Aqua-Gro" by Aquatrols Corp. of America, Pennsauken, New Jersey, or approved equal. Prior to bidding, the Contractor shall be responsible for verifying that this surfactant is compatible with the materials to be removed and their substrates. If found to be incompatible, the Contractor shall supply suitable wetting agents at no extra cost to the Owner.

G. IMPERMEABLE CONTAINERS: Suitable to receive and retain any asbestos-containing

or contaminated materials until disposal at an approved site. The containers shall be labeled in accordance with OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1926.1101 and NESHAP Regulation 40 CFR 61, Subpart M. Containers must be both air and watertight and must be resistant to damage and rupture.

H. WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS: As required by OSHA regulations 29 CFR 1926.1101.

I. GLOVE BAGS: Safe-T-Strip as manufactured by Asbeguard Equipment, Inc., 130 Esna

Park Drive, Markham, Ontario, Canada, L3R 1E3, Profo-Bag as manufactured by Asbestos Control Technology, Inc., P. O. Box 183, 38 North Pine Avenue, Maple Shade, New Jersey, 08052, or approved equal.

J. ENCAPSULANTS: American coatings Corporation, Cable Coating 22P, penetrating

encapsulant; Better Working Environments, Inc., removal encapsulant; and Cable Coating 2B, bridging encapsulant, as applicable, or approved equal.

K. MASTIC REMOVER: Shall be commercially available product formulated for the removal

of mastics, shall have closed cup flashpoint of 140 degrees F. or higher, (NFPA Class III), shall contain no chlorinated compounds, and shall contain no compounds which could render the waste as hazardous waste for disposal. Products which meet these requirements include, but are not limited to De-Solv-It, and ADL-1 by Orange-Sol; Foster 32-69 by H.B. Fuller Company; Sentinel 7200 Mastic Remover by Sentinel Chemical Company; Certane 77 by Certified Technologies Corporation; and Orange Stuff by I. Scheid, Inc.


L. OTHER MATERIALS: Provide all other materials, such as, but not limited to lumber, plywood, nails, and hardware, which may be required to properly prepare and complete this project.

2.03 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Provide suitable tools for asbestos removal.

1. Water Sprayer: Airless or a low-pressure sprayer for amended water application as applicable.

2. Air-Purifying Equipment: High Efficiency Particulate Air Filtration Systems (HEPA) shall comply with ANSI Z9.2-79. No air movement system or air equipment should discharge asbestos fibers outside the work area. Thus, the negative air unit shall be equipped with a three filter bank with the last being the HEPA filter capable of removing 99.97% of fibers >0.3 u (microns).

3. Paint/Encapsulant Sprayer: Airless. 4. Scaffolding: As required to accomplish the specified work and meet all applicable

safety regulations. 5. Vacuums: Use HEPA type such as Nilfisk GA 73, or approved equal. 6. Other tools and equipment as necessary.

PART 3 EXECUTION OF ABATEMENT 3.01 POSTING OF THE PROJECT

A. Post caution signs in and around the work area to comply with OSHA regulation 29 CFR 1926.1101 and in compliance with all other Federal, State, and local requirements.

B. As required by OSHA regulations 29 CFR 1926.1101, warning shall bear the following

information: DANGER

ASBESTOS

CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD

AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY

RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING

ARE REQUIRED IN THIS AREA C. Remove signs upon completion of abatement.

3.02 WORK AREA PREPARATION – WORK BY OWNER

A. Before the work is begun, and unless otherwise specified, the Owner shall remove from work areas, all removable items and equipment from the work area. Owner shall later replace furniture and movable objects only after the Project Monitor specifies the area is safe for reoccupancy.


3.03 WORK AREAS - WORK BY CONTRACTOR

A. Preclean fixed objects within the work area, first using HEPA vacuum equipment and then wet cleaning methods as appropriate. Mechanical and/or electrical equipment which is still operable and used to run the daily operations of the building systems shall not be included in the work area. This equipment shall be properly vented in accordance with the manufacture’s specifications.

B. The Contractor may use existing electrical service to the building for temporary electrical

power during abatement work. C. Prior to commencing abatement work, the Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to

shut down and isolate heating, cooling, and ventilating air systems to prevent contamination and fiber dispersal to other areas of the building. Seal any vents within the work area with tape and 6-mil plastic sheeting.

D. Clean work areas where debris or visible dust is present. Clean the work area first using

HEPA vacuum equipment and then wet cleaning methods as appropriate. Do not use methods that raise dust, such as dry sweeping or vacuuming with equipment not equipped with HEPA filters. Do not use HEPA vacuum equipment on wet surfaces unless units are specially constructed for wet/dry use. Do not use amended water on gypsum board or other material that would be damaged by the wetting agent. HEPA vacuum or damp sponge with regular water would be appropriate.

E. Seal off all openings, including but not limited to windows, corridors, doorways, skylights, ducts, grilles, diffusers, and any other penetrations of the work areas, with 6-mil plastic sheeting sealed with tape (Critical Barriers).

F. Prepare areas undergoing abatement in accordance with the following requirements.

1. Textured Ceiling Paint: The textured ceiling plaster shall be abated while under a full negative pressure containment with a Decontamination Enclosure System as described in Section 13280, Paragraph 3.4. The negative pressure containment shall consist of critical barriers over windows, doors, and openings (i.e. HVAC diffusers, returns, exhaust fans, etc.). Two (2) layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheeting shall be installed on the walls and floors. Use additional layer(s) of polyethylene sheeting or other protective materials on floors as necessary to protect floors from damage. Any asbestos-containing pipe insulation or adhesive behind bathroom fixtures shall be removed within the negative pressure containment used for the ceiling plaster abatement. Material shall be removed in accordance with Section 13280, Paragraph 3.12.

G. Maintain and mark emergency exits from the work areas, or establish alternate exits

satisfactory to the local fire marshal. 3.04 DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE SYSTEMS

A. GENERAL: The Contractor shall use portable decontamination units acceptable to EPA and OSHA, connected to the work area with framed-in or accordion tunnels, if necessary,


and line the tunnels with plastic, sealed with tape at all joints in the plastic, or shall construct decontamination units on-site.

B. ACCESS: In all cases, access to contained areas shall be through an air lock. In all

cases, access between any two rooms within the decontamination enclosure system shall be through an air lock.

C. WORKER DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE SYSTEM: Construct a worker decontamination enclosure system contiguous to the work area consisting of three totally enclosed chambers as follows:

1. An equipment room with two (2) curtained doorways, one to the work area and one

to the shower room, via an air lock. 2. A shower room with two (2) curtained doorways, one to the equipment room and

one to the clean room, via air locks. The shower room shall contain at least one shower with hot and cold or warm water with individual shut-off valves inside the showers. Careful attention shall be paid to the shower enclosure to insure against leakage of any kind. Ensure a supply of soap at all times in the shower room. Drainage from showers shall be disposed of as contaminated water or filtered as specified below.

3. Waste water containing asbestos, including drainage from decontamination showers, shall be either disposed of as contaminated waste or filtered in accordance with federal, state, and local requirements prior to introduction into the sanitary sewer system.

4. A clean room with one curtained doorway into the shower (via an air lock) and one entrance or exit to noncontaminated areas of the building. The clean room shall have sufficient space for storage of the workers' street clothes, towels, and other noncontaminated items.

D. EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE SYSTEM: Provide or construct an

equipment decontamination enclosure system consisting of two totally enclosed chambers as follows:

1. A washroom, constituting an air lock, with a curtained doorway to a designated

area of the work area and a curtained doorway to the holding area. 2. A holding area, constituting an air lock, with a curtained doorway to the washroom

and a curtained doorway to the uncontaminated area. 3. Contractor may elect to construct equipment decon unit on side of equipment room

of worker decontamination unit.

3.05 MAINTENANCE OF DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURES

A. At the beginning of each work shift and throughout removal, all seals and curtained doorways shall be inspected, and if not found in proper condition, repaired immediately.

B. Respiratory equipment shall be cleaned, repaired, and sanitized after each use. C. Soap and shampoo shall be in the showers at all times. D. Fresh towels shall be available at all times. E. All areas shall be kept clean and in order.


F. Provide a disposal bag for contaminated filters in the shower room. G. Provide storage for wet and dry towels. H. Ensure that the drainage filtering systems are kept clean and operable at all times. I. At the end of each decontamination period, the shower, air locks, and clean room shall

be cleaned and dried.

J. At the end of each work shift: the two air locks and the shower shall be thoroughly disinfected; the filter bag (if applicable) shall be returned to the equipment room for disposal; the equipment room and first air lock shall be thoroughly HEPA vacuumed and wet cleaned.

3.06 WORKER PROTECTION

A. All workers and authorized personnel, in order to enter the work area, shall:

1. Don protective clothing (coveralls, gloves, boots, etc.). Two suites may be worn in lieu of a shower facility.

2. Don the appropriate respiratory protection, following all training procedures and manufacturer's instructions. Hood shall be worn over respirator straps.

B. All workers and authorized personnel, in order to leave the work area, shall:

1. Remove gross (visible) contamination from themselves and their equipment with

the use of a HEPA Vacuum. 2. Respirator still in place, remove the exterior suit and move to the clean area. 3. Remove the second suit and return respirator to the storage area. 4. No smoking, eating, or drinking shall be allowed inside the work area.

3.07 FIRE EXITS

A. Designate and maintain emergency and fire exits from the work area in accordance with local codes and regulations. All exits shall be clearly marked with fluorescent tape or red enamel and shall be clearly visible from any part of the work area.

3.08 LOCATION AND ACTIVATION OF NEGATIVE AIR PRESSURE

A. Maintain negative pressure system in the work areas during all asbestos abatement work for which gross abatement techniques are specified or required.

B. Comply with Paragraph J.2 of the EPA document, Guidance for Controlling Friable

Asbestos-Containing Materials in Buildings, June 1985. C. Provide one spare exhaust unit per three units at all times. Spare exhaust units shall be

of the same size and capacity as the largest operating units.


D. Suspend electrical cords off the floor and out of workers' way to protect the cords from damage from traffic, sharp objects, and pinching. Do not fasten cords with staples, and do not hang cords from nails or suspend with wire.

E. Provide number of exhaust units in each work area to provide one air change every 15 minutes in all locations of the work areas.

F. Locate units so that make-up air enters the work area primarily through the

decontamination facility and traverses the work area as much as possible. Use Section J.3 of the EPA document, Guidance for Controlling Friable Asbestos-Containing Materials in Buildings, "Purple Book", June 1985. It is recommended units be relocated, within the work area, during the removal process to ensure proper air changes within the immediate work area.

G. Provide additional make-up air openings as shall be necessary to effectively move air

through the work area and to avoid creating too high a pressure differential that would damage or cause "blown-in" of temporary barriers and plastic coverings. Provide inlets by making openings in the plastic sheeting near the ceiling and as far as possible from the exhaust units. Provide self-closing polyethylene flaps over the openings to prevent backflow of air from the contained area to the outside.

H. Provide minimum number of auxiliary make-up air openings to maintain negative

pressure. A negative pressure in excess of 0.02 inches of water differential shall be maintained.

I. Vent all exhaust units to the outside of the building. Provide flexible or rigid duct as

necessary to provide exterior venting and proper location of exhaust units. Ducts shall be completely sealed, in good repair, and protected from possible damage within the work area.

J. After the work area has been prepared, the decontamination facility set up, and the

exhaust units installed, start the units (one at a time if more than one is provided). Visually check the direction of air movement through the openings in the barriers, and verify movement of air in all locations of the work areas by use of ventilation smoke tubes. Adjust the location of exhaust units, or provide additional exhaust units for the work area if the test indicates inadequate or improper air movement.

K. After removal has begun, maintain operation of exhaust units continuously to maintain a

constant negative pressure until decontamination of the work area is complete. Do not turn units off at the end of the work shift or when removal operations temporarily stop.

L. Change filters in exhaust units in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and

Paragraph J.3.2.2.1 of the EPA document, Guidance for Controlling Friable Asbestos-Containing Materials in Buildings, "Purple Book", June 1985 or when there is obvious loss of negative pressure.

M. When a final inspection and the results of the final air monitoring tests indicate an

acceptable level of airborne fibers, remove and dispose of prefilters and shut off the exhaust units. If the exhaust units are to be used in another work area, leave the final filter in place and seal all intake openings to the unit to prevent contamination due to asbestos fibers collected on the final filter. If the exhaust units are not to be used in other work areas, remove the final filter and dispose of as contaminated waste.


N. If dismantling operations result in visible dust on surfaces, replace filters, restart exhaust units, reclean surfaces and perform additional area air monitoring (at Contractor's expense) until the level of airborne fibers is acceptable as specified.

O. Dispose of all filters as asbestos-contaminated waste material as specified.

3.09 EQUIPMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURES

A. Clean external and internal surfaces of all nonfixed equipment and/or objects by thoroughly wet wiping and/or rinsing, before moving such items into the Equipment Decontamination Unit for final cleaning and removal to uncontaminated areas.

B. Objects and equipment removed shall be stored in areas designated by the Owner.

3.10 VISUAL INSPECTIONS

A. Upon completion of each phase of work area activities and before the next phase work activities are to begin, notify the Project Monitor that the work area is ready for inspection.

B. The Contractor shall not begin the next work activities until the Project Monitor has

inspected the area and any deficiencies have been corrected. C. The Project Monitor with the Contractor present will perform the following minimum

schedule of inspections.

1. Prior to the initiation of any site activities. 2. After work area preparation with plastic sheeting and prior to start of abatement. 3. After fine cleaning and before encapsulation. 4. After Final Clearance and all barriers are removed.

3.11 GROSS REMOVAL OPERATIONS

A. Any housings, grills, vents, or penetrations concealing asbestos-containing materials shall be removed to provide access to the materials.

B. Spray asbestos-containing materials with amended water, using spray equipment

capable of providing a “mist” application to reduce the release of fibers. Saturate the material sufficiently to wet it to the substrate without causing excessive dripping. The use of high RPM power equipment, pressure washers, or hydroblasters shall not be acceptable. Remove the saturated asbestos material in small sections from all areas. Material shall not be allowed to dry before placing in sealable polyethylene bags of 6-mil minimum thickness. All material shall be removed thoroughly and totally. Nylon fiber brushes shall be used to clean asbestos fibers from rough surfaces. No asbestos-containing material is to remain for any reason. Any contaminated material capable of puncturing the polyethylene bags shall be packaged separately.

C. Maintain work areas free of accumulated asbestos-containing materials at all times.

Keep waste materials wet until enclosed in sealed plastic bags.


D. Seal all polyethylene bags airtight. Move the bagged material to the wash-down station adjacent to the equipment decontamination enclosure. Once inside the washroom, the bags shall be wet cleaned or HEPA vacuumed and passed into the holding room. Single bagged material shall be placed in a clean bag or into a lined drum. At no time shall a removal worker pass the curtained doorway between the holding room and the container room.

E. Ensure all disposal containers are properly labeled in conformance with 29 CFR 1926.1101 and 40 CFR 61. Refer to Section 13280, Paragraph 1.5 - Codes and Regulations of this section.

F. The Contractor shall mobilize truck and/or dumpster to entrance of staging area to load

out asbestos-containing materials (double bagged). This load out procedure shall be conducted in a manner to avoid public view. The Contractor shall maintain this load out practice at all times during load out.

3.12 ASBESTOS FLOOR TILE REMOVAL (NOT USED) 3.13 DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING WASTE MATERIALS.

A. As the work progresses, and to prevent exceeding available storage capacity on site, workers from uncontaminated areas in full protective clothing and dual cartridge respirators shall enter the equipment decontamination unit and place the appropriate supply of specified containers within the container room. Workers in the holding room shall be passed empty containers for receiving bagged material. Full sealed containers from the holding room shall be passed back into the container room for storage. Ensure all curtained doorways are closed. Ensure that all containers are sealed properly before removing for transport and disposal. At no time shall a removal worker pass the curtained doorway between the holding room and the container room. Drums will not be required if Contractor uses sealed bins or enclosed trucks to store and transport double-bagged waste. Approval must be obtained from the Asbestos Designer prior to employment of this method.

1. LABEL REQUIREMENTS: Provide labels affixed to all asbestos waste containers:

a. Warning labels as required by OSHA regulation 40 CFR 1926.1101 as follows:

DANGER

CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS

MAY CAUSE CANCER

CAUSES DAMAGE TO LUNGS

DO NOT BREATHE DUST

AVOID CREATING DUST

b. Informational labels as required by NESHAP regulation 40 CFR 61, Subpart M

with the name of the waste generator and the location at which the waste was


generated. If handwritten, use, at a minimum, indelible ink to legibly record the required information.

B. Vehicles used for transporting asbestos-containing materials to disposal sites shall have

a completely enclosed, lockable storage compartment if drum requirement is to be deleted. Storage compartments shall be plasticized and sealed with a minimum of one (1) layer of 6-mil polyethylene on the sides and top and two (2) layers of 6-mil polyethylene on the floor. The compartments shall be thoroughly wet cleaned and/or HEPA vacuumed following the disposal of each load of material at the dumpsite. At the conclusion of the project (or before transport vehicles are used for other purposes), the polyethylene shall be properly removed and disposed of as contaminated waste. After this is accomplished, compartments shall once again be wet cleaned and/or HEPA vacuumed in order to eliminate all debris prior to reuse of the vehicles. Rented vehicles shall receive clearance inspection prior to being returned to the rental company. All plastic sheeting, tape, cleaning material, including mops and sponges, clothing, filters, and all other contaminated disposable materials shall be packaged, labeled, and disposed of as asbestos-containing waste.

1. TRANSPORT SIGN REQUIREMENTS: Provide signs during waste transport and

disposal as follows:

a. As required by the US Department of Transportation, 49 CFR 171 and 172, warning signs shall display the following:

RQ HAZARDOUS

SUBSTANCE

SOLID, NOS

ORM-E, NA 9188

(ASBESTOS)

b. As required by NESHAP, 40 CFR 61, Subpart M, mark vehicle used to

transport asbestos-containing waste material during the loading and unloading of the waste so that the signs are visible as follows:

DANGER

ASBESTOS DUST HAZARDS



C. Dispose of materials at an authorized disposal site in accordance with the requirements

of federal, state, and local disposal authorities.


3.14 GROSS CLEANUP

A. Remove all visible accumulations of asbestos-containing materials and debris by HEPA vacuums, sponging, etc. Wet clean all surfaces within the work area.

B. The entire work area shall be totally, visibly clean. The Contractor shall notify the

Owner’s Certified Industrial Hygienist/Project Monitor of the time the work area will be subject for visual inspection. This inspection shall be certified by the Contractor and will be verified by the representative using the "Certification of Visual Inspection" found in the Testing Section.

3.15 POST-REMOVAL ENCAPSULATION OF AFFECTED AREAS

A. The work area shall have passed visual inspection prior to post-removal encapsulation. B. An approved encapsulant shall be applied, using airless spraying equipment, to all areas

of the project where asbestos-containing materials have been removed. Encapsulant shall be colored for ready visibility.

C. ENCAPSULANTS

1. The encapsulant shall be compatible with the replacement paint. 2. If any encapsulant is incompatible with the substrate, the Contractor shall be fully

responsible for providing an alternate encapsulant that is compatible, at no additional cost to the Owner.

3. Upon completion of encapsulation of surfaces from which asbestos has been removed, the Contractor shall inform the on-site representative that the area is ready for compliance monitoring.

3.16 RE-ESTABLISHMENT OF OBJECTS AND SYSTEMS

A. Fixtures, equipment, or objects relocated by the contractor to storage areas designated by the Owner shall be reestablished under this contract as to their exact position and material shape. Contractor assumes full responsibility for damage to objects on premises.

END OF SECTION 028213

ASBESTOS AIR MONITORING / TESTING 028216-1 Fire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations 138 South Jefferson Street 20181101 – CORFS-6+8-BA Richmond, Virginia 23220 April 18, 2019

SECTION 028216 ASBESTOS AIR MONITORING/TESTING

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 TESTING/AIR MONITORING

A. Throughout the entire removal and cleaning operations, air monitoring will be conducted by an accredited Project Monitor to ensure Contractor compliance with EPA and OSHA regulations, excluding personnel samples required by OSHA, and any additional applicable state and local government regulations. Air monitoring results gathered by the Owner’s Project Monitoring Firm will not be used by the Contractor to verify OSHA compliance. Air monitoring for OSHA compliance by the Contractor shall be conducted according to the method prescribed by 29 CFR 1926.1101, Appendix A or applicable state or local regulations.

B. Air monitoring shall be conducted by a Project Monitor licensed by the Virginia Department of

Professional and Occupational Regulation pursuant to the requirements of Title 54.1, Chapter 5 of the Code of Virginia.

C. Air monitoring will be performed by an independent firm. Selection of and payment to the

Project Monitoring Firm will be made by the Owner.

D. The Abatement Contractor shall be responsible for providing personal monitoring of his employees as per OSHA 1926.1101.

E. Monitoring Prior to Actual Removal: The environmental health testing laboratory will provide

area monitoring and establish the reference baseline ambient fiber concentrations 24 hours prior to the masking and sealing operations for each removal site. A volume of air sufficient to obtain a limit of quantification of 0.01 fibers/cc shall be secured. Field blanks shall be secured in accordance with the latest revision of the NIOSH 7400 Method.

F. Monitoring During Asbestos Removal: The Project Monitor will provide environmental and

work area monitoring, for the Owner, during exposure to airborne concentrations of asbestos. 1. If monitoring outside the asbestos control area shows airborne concentrations

exceeding the reference baseline ambient fiber concentration and is due to the abatement contractor’s work practices or breach in the containment, the Contractor shall stop all work, notify the Owner immediately, identify and correct the condition(s) causing the increase.

G. Monitoring Results During Asbestos Abatement: PCM fiber counting shall be completed and

results reviewed by the Project Monitor within 24 hours after conducting sampling. The Project Monitor shall notify the Contractor and the Owner immediately of any exposures to asbestos fibers greater than or equal to 0.01 fibers/cc.

1. The services of a testing laboratory will be employed by the Owner’s Project Monitor to

perform laboratory analysis of the air samples. A microscope and technician will be set up at the job site, or samples will be sent daily to a laboratory, so that written reports on air samples can be obtained within 24 hours of conducting sampling.


H. Final Compliance Monitoring: Final Compliance Monitoring shall be conducted in accordance

with the Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA) Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA) and these specifications. Analysis of samples taken after final cleanup shall be by Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM). The Owner’s Project Monitor will conduct final air clearance monitoring. Sampling shall start after the following:

1. HEPA vacuuming and wet cleaning of all surfaces of the work area must have been

conducted. 2. All visible accumulations of asbestos-containing waste material must have been

removed from the work area, as determined by the Owner’s Certified Industrial Hygienist/Project Monitor.

3. First polyethylene layer must have been removed from walls and floors. 4. Completion of a satisfactory visual inspection by the Project Monitor. 5. The area completely covered by a spray encapsulant. 6. All surfaces within the regulated area shall be completely dry, spray applied

encapsulant shall be completely dry.

a. Clearance Criteria: All samples will have a concentration of airborne fibers at or below 0.01 fibers/cc by Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM). If the final clearance samples do not meet the minimum clearance requirements, re-cleaning and re-sampling must be accomplished. The Abatement Contractor shall pay for the additional cost of re-sampling and re-analysis. The method of sampling and analysis will be the same as that used for the first set of samples.

1.02 CERTIFICATION OF VISUAL INSPECTION

A. The following Certification of Visual Inspection shall be completed by the Contractor and Project Monitor following completion of removal work, cleanup, and his/her visual inspection of the work area. The Certification of Visual Inspection shall be provided to the Owner upon completion of the job.


CERTIFICATION OF VISUAL INSPECTION

Building: Project Number: Specific Area: In accordance with Section 13280 - Asbestos Abatement, the Contractor hereby certifies that he has visually inspected the work area (all surfaces including pipes, beams, ledges, walls, ceiling and floor, decontamination unit, sheet plastic, etc.) and has found no dust, debris, or residue. By: (Signature) Date: (Print Name) Title: ______________ Company Name: _______________________________________ ABATEMENT INSPECTOR’S CERTIFICATION The Abatement Inspector hereby certifies that he has accompanied the Contractor on his visual inspection and verifies that this inspection has been thorough and to the best of his knowledge and belief, the Contractor's certification above is a true and honest one. The final air sampling has been completed and the sample results are in accordance with the Contract Documents. The final air samples were analyzed by: PCM or TEM. Clearance air sample numbers are: By: (Signature) Date: (Print Name) Title: Final Air Clearance Passed the Clearance Criteria of (<0.01 f/cc) by PCM Analysis: Final Air Clearance Passed the Clear. Criteria of (<70 structures/mm2) by TEM Analysis: Final Air Clearance Failed the Clearance Criteria of (>0.01 f/cc) by PCM Analysis: Final Air Clearance Failed the Clear. Criteria of (>70 structures/mm2) by TEM Analysis:


ASBESTOS ABATEMENT SCOPE OF WORK DRAWING

Asbestos Specific Notes:

Remove / Dispose of Asbestos-Containing Textured Ceiling Plaster.

Remove / Dispose of Asbestos-Containing Pipe Insulation Expected To Be Above Ceiling.

Remove / Dispose of Assumed Asbestos-Containing Mirror Mastic / Adhesive.

Asbestos Scope of Work Drawing

City of Richmond, Fire Station #8Bathroom Alterations Project

1018 Williamsburg Rd, Richmond, Virginia FEI Proj: FEI-19SPEC250

April 18, 2019

2

Asbestos General Notes:

1. Locations of Asbestos-Containing Materials (ACM) are approximate. Contractor shall field verify all locations and quantities of materials to be removed.

1

3

21

3

21

BATHROOM

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETEFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

033000 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 033000CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE


A. Concrete formwork.B. Floors and slabs on grade.C. Concrete reinforcement.D. Joint devices associated with concrete work.E. Concrete curing.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 079200 - Joint Sealants: Products and installation for sealants and joint fillers for saw

cut joints and isolation joints in slabs.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010(Reapproved 2015).

B. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and MassConcrete; 1991 (Reapproved 2009).

C. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2016.D. ACI 302.1R - Guide to Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; 2015.E. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; 2000

(Reapproved 2009).F. ACI 305R - Guide to Hot Weather Concreting; 2010.G. ACI 306R - Guide to Cold Weather Concreting; 2016.H. ACI 308R - Guide to External Curing of Concrete; 2016.I. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2011.J. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; 2014.K. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement; 2015.L. ASTM A767/A767M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement; 2016.M. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire

Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2017.N. ASTM C1602/C1602M - Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of

Hydraulic Cement Concrete; 2012.O. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2016, with Editorial

Revision (2016).P. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete

Specimens; 2018.Q. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2017a.R. ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement

Mortars (Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube Specimens); 2016a.S. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2015a.T. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2018.U. ASTM C173/C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the

Volumetric Method; 2016.


033000 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

V. ASTM C260/C260M - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a(Reapproved 2016).

W. ASTM C330/C330M - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for StructuralConcrete; 2017a.

X. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2017.Y. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan

for Use in Concrete; 2015.Z. ASTM C685/C685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and

Continuous Mixing; 2014.AA. ASTM C827/C827M - Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical

Specimens of Cementitious Mixtures; 2016.AB. ASTM C845/C845M - Standard Specification for Expansive Hydraulic Cement; 2012.AC. ASTM C1059/C1059M - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to

Hardened Concrete; 2013.AD. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout

(Nonshrink); 2014a.AE. ASTM C1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures; 2015.AF. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving

and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004, with EditorialRevision (2013).

AG. ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of WaterVapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 2011(Reapproved 2017).

AH. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact withSoil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2017.

AI. ICRI 310.2R - Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings,Polymer Overlays, and Concrete Repair; 2013.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Mix Design: Submit proposed concrete mix design.

1. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 301, Section 4 - ConcreteMixtures.

2. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 318, Chapter 5 -Concrete Quality, Mixing and Placing.

C. Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used.D. Test Reports: Submit report for each test or series of tests specified.E. Sustainable Design Submittal: If any fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace slag, silica fume,

rice hull ash, or other waste material is used in mix designs to replace Portland cement, submitthe total volume of concrete cast in place, mix design(s) used showing the quantity of portlandcement replaced, reports showing successful cylinder testing, and temperature on day of pour ifcold weather mix is used.

F. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities andcomponents that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work.

G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner'sname and registered with manufacturer.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.

1. Maintain one copy of each document on site.


033000 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.

1.06 WARRANTYA. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Termite-Resistant Vapor Barrier Sheet: Provide five year manufacturer's limited warranty.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 FORMWORK

A. Formwork Design and Construction: Comply with guidelines of ACI 347R to provide formworkthat will produce concrete complying with tolerances of ACI 117.

B. Form Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstandhydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances.1. Form Ties: Cone snap type that will leave no metal within 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of

concrete surface.2.02 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (60,000 psi) (420 MPa).1. Type: Deformed billet-steel bars.2. Finish: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A767/A767M, Class I, unless otherwise

indicated.B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR): Galvanized, plain type, ASTM A1064/A1064M.

1. Form: Coiled Rolls.2. WWR Style: 4 x 8-W6 x W10 (102 x 203-MW39 x MW65).

C. Reinforcement Accessories:1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage, 0.0508 inch (1.29 mm).2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of

reinforcement during concrete placement.2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I - Normal Portland type. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M.

1. Acquire aggregates for entire project from same source.C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C330/C330M.D. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F.E. Calcined Pozzolan: ASTM C618, Class N.F. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240, proportioned in accordance with ACI 211.1.G. Water: ASTM C1602/C1602M; clean, potable, and not detrimental to concrete.

2.04 ADMIXTURESA. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight

of cement.B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M.C. Shrinkage Reducing Admixture:

1. ASTM C494/C494M, Type S.D. Shrinkage Compensating Admixture: For on site production of concrete with ASTM

C845/C845M, Type K cement.2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Sheet material complying with ASTM E1745, Class A; stated bymanufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. The use of single ply polyethylene is prohibited.

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C845/C845M






033000 - 420181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

1. Installation: Comply with ASTM E1643.2. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive,

mastic, prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations.B. Termite-Resistant Vapor Barrier Sheet: Plastic sheet complying with ASTM E1745, Class C;

stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill underconcrete slabs, and for exclusion of subterranean termites.1. Installation: Comply with ASTM E1643.2. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive,

prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations.C. Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate,

cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents.1. Grout: Comply with ASTM C1107/C1107M.2. Height Change, Plastic State; when tested in accordance with ASTM C827/C827M:

a. Maximum: Plus 4 percent.b. Minimum: Plus 1 percent.

3. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours, ASTM C109/C109M: 2,000 pounds persquare inch (13.7 MPa).

4. Products containing aluminum powder are not permitted.2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS

A. Latex Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C1059/C1059M,Type II.

B. Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removabletop section that will form 1/2 inch (13 mm) deep sealant pocket after removal.1. Material: ASTM D1751, cellulose fiber.

2.07 CURING MATERIALSA. Curing Compound, Naturally Dissipating: Clear, water-based, liquid membrane-forming

compound; complying with ASTM C309.1. Product dissipates within 4 to 6 weeks.2. Provide product containing fugitive red dye.

2.08 CONCRETE MIX DESIGNA. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.B. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates

recommended or required by manufacturer.C. Normal Weight Concrete:

1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at 28 days: 3,000 pounds per square inch (20.7 MPa).

2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight.3. Calcined Pozzolan Content: Maximum 10 percent of cementitious materials by weight.4. Silica Fume Content: Maximum 5 percent of cementitious materials by weight.5. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight.6. Total Air Content: 4 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M.7. Maximum Slump: 3 inches (75 mm).8. Maximum Aggregate Size: 5/8 inch (16 mm).

2.09 MIXINGA. On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C685/C685M. Mix each

batch not less than 1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes.B. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.C. Adding Water: If concrete arrives on-site with slump less than suitable for placement, do not

add water that exceeds the maximum water-cement ratio or exceeds the maximum permissibleslump.










































http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C39/C39M


033000 - 520181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019


A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support allapplied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete.

B. Prepare existing concrete surfaces to be repaired according to ICRI 310.2R.C. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by

cleaning and applying bonding agent in according to bonding agent manufacturer's instructions.1. Use latex bonding agent only for non-load-bearing applications.

D. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete,insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout.

E. Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap jointsminimum 6 inches (150 mm). Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight withmanufacturer's recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repairdamaged vapor retarder before covering.1. Vapor Retarder Over Granular Fill: Install compactible granular fill before placing vapor

retarder as indicated on drawings. Do not use sand.3.03 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, andaccurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concretecoverage required for protection.

B. Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in bothdirections. Splice laps with tie wire.

C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete areaccurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement.

3.04 PLACING CONCRETEA. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R.C. Notify Architect not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations.D. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and

test samples taken.E. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint

devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement.F. Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below.

3.05 SLAB JOINTINGA. Locate joints as indicated on drawings.B. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement.C. Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total

height equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab.1. Install wherever necessary to separate slab from other building members, including

columns, walls, equipment foundations, footings, stairs, manholes, sumps, and drains.D. Saw Cut Contraction Joints: Saw cut joints before concrete begins to cool, within 4 to 12 hours

after placing; use 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick blade and cut at least 1 inch (25 mm) deep but not lessthan one quarter (1/4) the depth of the slab.


033000 - 620181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

3.06 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCESA. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas

requiring corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process.3.07 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork.B. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows:

1. Surfaces to Receive Thin Floor Coverings: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1R; thinfloor coverings include carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, and thin set ceramictile.

2. Other Surfaces to Be Left Exposed: Trowel as described in ACI 302.1R, minimizingburnish marks and other appearance defects.

C. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at1:50 nominal.

3.08 CURING AND PROTECTIONA. Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from

premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period

necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.C. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:

1. Slabs and Floors To Receive Adhesive-Applied Flooring: Curing compounds and othersurface coatings are usually considered unacceptable by flooring and adhesivemanufacturers. If such materials must be used, either obtain the approval of the flooringand adhesive manufacturers prior to use or remove the surface coating after curing toflooring manufacturer's satisfaction.

2. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-saturatedsand, water-fog spray, or saturated burlap.a. Saturated Burlap: Saturate burlap-polyethylene and place burlap-side down over floor

slab areas, lapping ends and sides; maintain in place.3. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry.

a. Moisture-Retaining Sheet: Lap strips not less than 3 inches (75 mm) and seal withwaterproof tape or adhesive; secure at edges.

b. Curing Compound: Apply in two coats at right angles, using application raterecommended by manufacturer.

3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section

014000 - Quality Requirements.B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.C. Submit proposed mix design to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of

concrete operations.D. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure compliance

with specified requirements.E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M, for each test, mold and cure three concrete

test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cubic yards (76 cu m) or less of each class ofconcrete placed.

F. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under sameconditions as concrete it represents.

G. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTMC143/C143M.



033000 - 720181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

3.10 DEFECTIVE CONCRETEA. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor

within 24 hours of test.B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not complying with required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances

or specified requirements.C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of

additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified.D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction

of Architect for each individual area.3.11 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected concrete floor surface until fully cured.END OF SECTION



















MAINTENANCE OF MASONRYFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

040100 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 040100MAINTENANCE OF MASONRY


A. Water cleaning of entire wall plane containing area of repair surfaces.1. Existing masonry to remain shall be cleaned prior to selecting new materials to match

existing.2. Entire wall shall be cleaned upon completion of the work.

B. Repair of damaged masonry.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 042000 - Unit Masonry: Brick masonry units.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structuresand Related Commentaries; 2011.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section.

1. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section.2. Review conditions of installation, installation procedures, and coordination with related

work.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate setting details of stone. Detail shoring.C. Product Data: Provide data on cleaning compounds.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, except where exceeded by requirements of the

contract documents.1. Maintain one copy of each document on project site.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver masonry neatly stacked and tied on pallets. Store clear of ground with adequate

waterproof covering.1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA orapplicable building code, whichever is more stringent.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CLEANING MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agent: Detergent type.2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Conform to requirements of Section 042000.2.03 MASONRY MATERIALS

A. Concrete Brick: Section 042000.B. Block: Section 042000.


A. Verify that surfaces to be cleaned are ready for work of this section.


040100 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Protect surrounding elements from damage due to restoration procedures.B. Carefully remove and store removable items located in areas to be restored, including fixtures,

fittings, finish hardware, and accessories; reinstall upon completion.C. Separate areas to be protected from restoration areas using means adequate to prevent

damage.D. Cover existing landscaping with tarpaulins or similar covers.E. Mask immediately adjacent surfaces with material that will withstand cleaning and restoration

procedures.F. Close off adjacent occupied areas with dust proof and weatherproof partitions.G. When using cleaning methods that involve water or other liquids, install drainage devices to

prevent runoff over adjacent surfaces unless those surfaces are impervious to damage fromrunoff.

H. Do not allow cleaning runoff to drain into sanitary or storm sewers.3.03 REBUILDING

A. Cut out damaged and deteriorated masonry with care in a manner to prevent damage to anyadjacent remaining materials.

B. Support structure as necessary in advance of cutting out units.C. Cut away loose or unsound adjoining masonry to provide firm and solid bearing for new work.D. Build in new units following procedures for new work specified in other section(s).E. Mortar Mix: Colored and proportioned to match existing work.F. Ensure that anchors are correctly located and built in.G. Install built in masonry work to match and align with existing, with joints and coursing true and

level, faces plumb and in line. Build in all openings, accessories and fittings.3.04 REPOINTING

A. Perform repointing prior to cleaning masonry surfaces.B. Cut out loose or disintegrated mortar in joints to minimum 1/2 inch (6 mm) depth or until sound

mortar is reached.C. Use hand tools only. Do not use power tools.D. Do not damage masonry units.E. When cutting is complete, remove dust and loose material by brushing.F. Premoisten joint and apply mortar. Pack tightly in maximum 1/4 inch (6 mm) layers. Form a

smooth, compact concave joint to match existing.G. Moist cure for 72 hours.

3.05 CLEANING EXISTING MASONRYA. Cleaning Detergent: Brush clean masonry surfaces at entire wall plane, corner to corner, top to

bottom, surounding area of repair locations with cleaning agent in accordance with themanufacturer's instructions. Saturate masonry with clean water and flush loose mortar and dirt.

3.06 CLEANING NEW MASONRYA. Verify mortar is fully set and cured.B. Clean surfaces and remove large particles with wood scrapers, brass or nylon wire brushes.C. Scrub walls with cleaning agent solution using stiff brush. Thoroughly rinse and wash off

cleaning solution, dirt and mortar crumbs using clean, pressurized water.3.07 CLEANING

A. Remove excess mortar, smears, and droppings as work proceeds and upon completion.


040100 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

B. Clean surrounding surfaces.END OF SECTION

UNIT MASONRYFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

042000 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 042000UNIT MASONRY


A. Concrete block.B. Concrete building brick.C. Mortar and grout.D. Reinforcement and anchorage.E. Flashings.F. Lintels.G. Accessories.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures

and Related Commentaries; 2011.B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware; 2016a.C. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement; 2015.D. ASTM A641/A641M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire;

2009a (Reapproved 2014).E. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire

Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2017.F. ASTM C55 - Standard Specification for Concrete Building Brick; 2017.G. ASTM C67 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile;

2017.H. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2016a.I. ASTM C91/C91M - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2012.J. ASTM C140/C140M - Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units

and Related Units; 2017a.K. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2017.L. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2018.M. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006

(Reapproved 2011).N. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2014a.O. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2011.P. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2018.Q. ASTM C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars

for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry; 2017.R. ASTM C979/C979M - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete;

2016.S. ASTM C1324 - Standard Test Method for Examination and Analysis of Hardened Masonry

Mortar; 2015.T. ASTM C1531 - Standard Test Methods for In Situ Measurment of Masonry Mortar Joint Shear

Strength Index; 2016U. ASTM C1634 - Standard Specification for Concrete Facing Brick; 2017.


042000 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

V. TMS 402/602 - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures; 2016.1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work ofthis section; require attendance by all relevant installers.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, mortar, and

masonry accessories.C. Samples for verification: Submit four samples of decorative block units to illustrate color,

texture, and extremes of color range.D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements.E. Existing mortar strength test results in accordance with ASTM C1531 - 16 Standard Test

Methods for In Situ Measurment of Masonry Mortar Joint Shear Strength Index.F. Formulated repair mortar strength test results in accordance with ASTM C780 Annex A.7.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, except where exceeded by requirements of the

contract documents.1. Maintain one copy of each document on project site.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of productsspecified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and withat least three years of documented experience.

D. Test existing mortar strength in accordance with ASTM C1531 - Standard Test Methods for InSitu Measurment of Masonry Mortar Joint Shear Strength Index; 2016.

E. Prior to commencing repairs test approved color matched repair mortar in accordance withASTM C780 Annex A.7. to verify it does not exceed and is within 10% of existing mortarstrength.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and

contamination by other materials.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Concrete Brick:1. For architectural and paver use, ASTM C1634 (or ASTM C55, Grade N), non-cored (solid),

normal weight.2. For below grade use, ASTM C1634 (or ASTM C55, Grade N), normal weight.3. For other uses, ASTM C55, normal weight.4. Size: As indicated on drawings.5. Special Shapes: Provide non-standard brick configured for corners, lintels, headers, and

other detailed conditions.2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91/C91M, Type N.B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I; color as required to produce approved color

sample.1. Not more than 0.60 percent alkali.

C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.D. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144.


042000 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

E. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.F. Pigments for Colored Mortar: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for

mixing into mortar and complying with ASTM C979/C979M.1. Color(s): Provide pigments required to formulate colored mortar to match existing mortar

color.G. Water: Clean and potable.

2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGEA. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 40 (40,000 psi) (280 MPa), deformed billet bars;

galvanized.B. Joint Reinforcement: Use ladder type joint reinforcement where vertical reinforcement is

involved and truss type elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.C. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss or ladder type; ASTM A1064/A1064M steel wire, mill

galvanized to ASTM A641/A641M, Class 3; 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm) side rods with 0.1483 inch(3.8 mm) cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch (25 mm) and not lessthan 1/2 inch (13 mm) of mortar coverage on each exposure.

D. Strap Anchors: Bent steel shapes, 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) width, 0.105 inch (2.7 mm) thick, 24 inch(610 mm) length, with 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) long, 90 degree bend at each end to form a U or Zshape or with cross pins, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M, Class B.

E. Flexible Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry andbuilding frame, sized to provide not less than 5/8 inch (16 mm) of mortar coverage frommasonry face.

2.04 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXINGA. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, using the Proportion Specification.

1. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type S.2. Exterior, loadbearing masonry: Type N.3. Exterior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type N.4. Interior, loadbearing masonry: Type N.

B. Colored Mortar: Proportion selected pigments and other ingredients to match Architect'ssample, without exceeding manufacturer's recommended pigment-to-cement ratio.

C. New Mortar for Old Brick: Proportioned by volume only; not more than 20 percent of the totalvolume of Portland cement and lime combined shall be Portland cement.1. Sand: Match original mortar as closely as possible in color, size, and texture, without use

of other additives.2. Do not use modern additives unless permitted in writing by Architect.3. Repointing Mortar: Use proportions from 1 part lime to 2 parts sand with no Portland

cement, up to 2 parts Portland cement to 3 parts lime to 6 parts sand.4. White Portland Cement: Use for repointing mortar where Portland cement is permitted.5. Use mortar within 30 minutes after final mixing; do not add more water after the initial mix

is prepared.D. Grout: ASTM C476; consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated for grouting; fine

grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches (50 mm) or less; coarse groutfor spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches (50 mm).

E. Admixtures: Add to mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate and in accordance withmanufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.


A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.


042000 - 420181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections.B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building

structure provides permanent bracing.3.03 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or applicable building code, whichever ismore stringent.

3.04 COURSINGA. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform

thickness.C. Concrete Masonry Units:

1. Bond: Running.2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches (200 mm).3. Mortar Joints: Concave.

3.05 PLACING AND BONDINGA. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.B. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.C. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.D. Interlock intersections and external corners.E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must

be made, remove mortar and replace.F. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped

edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.G. Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled or resilient base is scheduled.

3.06 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - GENERAL, SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY, AND CAVITYWALL MASONRYA. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install horizontal

joint reinforcement 16 inches (400 mm) on center.B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below

openings. Extend minimum 16 inches (400 mm) each side of opening.C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches (150 mm).E. Fasten anchors to structural framing and embed in masonry joints as masonry is laid. Unless

otherwise indicated on drawings or closer spacing is indicated under specific wall type, spaceanchors at maximum of 36 inches (900 mm) horizontally and 24 inches (600 mm) vertically.

3.07 BUILT-IN WORKA. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames, window frames, and anchor bolts and

other items to be built into the work and furnished under other sections.B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line.C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid

with grout.1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches (300 mm) from framed

openings.D. Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to deterioration.


042000 - 520181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

3.08 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft (6 mm/3 m) and 1/2 inch in 20 ft (13

mm/6 m) or more.C. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch (13 mm) in

two stories or more.D. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft (3 mm/m) and 1/4 inch in 10 ft (6

mm/3 m); 1/2 inch in 30 ft (13 mm/9 m).E. Maximum Variation of Mortar Joint Thickness: Head joint, minus 1/4 inch, plus 3/8 inch (minus

6.4 mm, plus 9.5 mm).F. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

3.09 CUTTING AND FITTINGA. Cut and fit for chases. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape,

and location.B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or

strength of masonry work may be impaired.3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section014000 - Quality Requirements.

B. Clay Masonry Unit Tests: Test clay masonry in accordance with ASTM C67 requirements,sampling 5 randomly chosen units for each 50,000 installed.

C. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: Test each variety of concrete unit masonry in accordance withASTM C140/C140M for compliance with requirements of this specification.

D. Mortar Tests: Test each type of mortar in accordance with ASTM C780, testing with samefrequency as masonry samples.

3.11 CLEANINGA. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings.B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.

3.12 PROTECTIONA. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that

are subject to damage by construction activities.END OF SECTION













METAL FABRICATIONSFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

055000 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 055000METAL FABRICATIONS


A. Shop fabricated steel items.B. Lavatory Support Frames.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon

Steel Plates; 2013.B. ASTM A501/A501M - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing; 2014.C. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015.D. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer; 1999 (Ed. 2004).

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size

and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and detailswhere applicable.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL

A. Steel Tubing: ASTM A501/A501M hot-formed structural tubing.B. Plates: ASTM A283/A283M.C. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.D. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities

having jurisdiction.2.02 FABRICATION

A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt

tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.D. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related

components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically notedotherwise.

2.03 FINISHES - STEELA. Prime paint steel items.B. Prime Painting: One coat.

2.04 FABRICATION TOLERANCESA. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements.B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch.C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch.D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches.E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches.

METAL FABRICATIONSFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

055000 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019


A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until

completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.C. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.D. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed.

END OF SECTION

ROUGH CARPENTRYFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

061000 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 061000ROUGH CARPENTRY


A. Non-structural dimension lumber framing.B. Preservative treated wood materials.C. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware; 2016a.B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.C. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2017.D. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.E. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2015.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and application

instructions.1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to preventdeformation and to allow air circulation.

1.05 WARRANTYA. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no

grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting thespecified requirements.

2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review,American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading servicefor the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unlessotherwise indicated.

B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.C. Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile (805 km) radius of the project site.

2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONSA. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.B. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.C. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring:

1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.


061000 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

2.03 STRUCTURAL COMPOSITE LUMBERA. At Contractor's option, structural composite lumber may be substituted for concealed dimension

lumber and timbers.B. Structural Composite Lumber: Factory fabricated beams, headers, and columns, of sizes and

types indicated on drawings; structural capacity as published by manufacturer.2.04 CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium densityfiberboard; 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

B. Other Applications:1. Plywood Concealed From View But Located Within Exterior Enclosure: PS 1, C-C

Plugged or better, Exterior grade.2. Plywood Exposed to View But Not Exposed to Weather: PS 1, A-D, or better.3. Other Locations: PS 1, C-D Plugged or better.

2.05 ACCESSORIESA. Fasteners and Anchors:

1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A153/A153M forhigh humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.

2. Anchors: Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete.2.06 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT

A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category Systemfor wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specificapplications. 1. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an

ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance withAWPA standards.

B. Preservative Treatment:1. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category

UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative.a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.b. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory

components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately

after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.3.03 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures,specialty items, and trim.

B. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings foranchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing.

C. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items,unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support isexplicitly indicated.


061000 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

D. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports aboveceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELSA. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with

edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches (610 mm) on center on alledges and into studs in field of board.1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly.2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board

parallel to studs.3. Install adjacent boards without gaps.

3.05 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENTA. Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site-sawn cuts,

complying with manufacturer's instructions.B. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.

3.06 TOLERANCESA. Framing Members: 1/4 inch (6 mm) from true position, maximum.B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet (2 mm/m) maximum, and 1/4 inch

in 30 feet (7 mm in 10 m) maximum.3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.3.08 CLEANING

A. Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of Section 017419 - Construction WasteManagement and Disposal.1. Comply with applicable regulations.2. Do not burn scrap on project site.3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated.4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation

facilities or “waste-to-energy” facilities.B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.

END OF SECTION

FINISH CARPENTRYFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

062000 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 062000FINISH CARPENTRY


A. Finish carpentry items.B. Wood casings and moldings.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 099113 - Exterior Painting: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items.B. Section 099123 - Interior Painting: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014, with Errata (2016).B. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S. Version 3.1;

2016, with Errata (2017).C. HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; 2016.D. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Coordinate the work with plumbing rough-in, electrical rough-in, and installation of associated

and adjacent components.B. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious

manner.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.B. Product Data:

1. Provide instructions for attachment hardware and finish hardware.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and

accessories.1. Scale of Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot (125 mm to 1 m), minimum.2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS).3. Include certification program label.

D. Certificate: Submit labels and certificates required by quality assurance and quality control programs.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this

section.B. Quality Certification:

1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the work complies with AWI/AWMAC/WI(AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements for grade or grades specified.

2. Provide designated labels on shop drawings as required by certification program.3. Provide designated labels on installed products as required by certification program.4. Submit certifications upon completion of installation that verifies this work is in compliance

with specified requirements.1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect work from moisture damage.


062000 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS

A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI(NAAWS), unless noted otherwise.

B. Interior Woodwork Items:1. Window Sills: Tulip Poplar for opaque finish.

2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTSA. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.B. Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile (805 km) radius of the project site.

2.03 LUMBER MATERIALSA. Hardwood Lumber: Tulip popar species, maximum moisture content of 6 percent.

2.04 SHEET MATERIALSA. Softwood Plywood, Exposed to View: Face species as indicated, plain sawn, veneer core; PS 1

Grade A-B, glue type as recommended for application.B. Hardwood Plywood: Face species as indicated, plain sawn, book matched, veneer core; HPVA

HP-1, Front Face Grade AA, Back Face Grade 1, glue type as recommended for application.2.05 FASTENINGS

A. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; bright finish in concealed locations and colormatched finish in exposed locations.

B. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.2.06 ACCESSORIES

A. Lumber for Shimming and Blocking: Softwood lumber of indicated species.B. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer.C. Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color.

2.07 FABRICATIONA. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.B. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.

Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.2.08 SHOP FINISHING

A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations.C. Prime paint surfaces in contact with cementitious materials.D. Back prime woodwork items to be field finished, prior to installation.


A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and

ready to receive this work.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirementsfor grade indicated.

B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.C. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch (0.79 mm).

Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.


062000 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

3.03 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHINGA. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth.B. Site Finishing: See Section 099113 and 099123.C. Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with

cementitious materials.3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch (0.79 mm).

END OF SECTION

ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORKFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

064100 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 064100ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK


A. Specially fabricated cabinet units.B. Preparation for installing utilities.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 016116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.B. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking.C. Section 123600 - Countertops.


2016, with Errata (2017).1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting not less than one week beforestarting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and

accessories.1. Scale of Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot (125 mm to 1 m), minimum.

C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.D. Samples: Submit actual samples of architectural cabinet construction, minimum 12 inches (300

mm) square, illustrating proposed cabinet, countertop, and shelf unit substrate and finish.E. Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls, hinges, shelf standards, and locksets,

demonstrating hardware design, quality, and finish.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in thissection.

B. Quality Certification:1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the installed work complies with

AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements for grade or gradesspecified.


with specified requirements.5. Replace, repair, or rework all work for which certification is refused.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect units from moisture damage.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONSA. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions

in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy.


064100 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CABINETS

A. Quality Standard: Premium Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI(NAAWS), unless noted otherwise.

B. Cabinets:1. Finish - Exposed Exterior Surfaces: shall be the same material as countertop and match

countertop material texture and finish.a. Exposed Exterior Surfaces shall include bottom faces of countertop aprons and skirts.

2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTSA. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.B. Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile (805 km) radius of the project site.

2.03 COUNTERTOPSA. Countertops are specified in Section 123600.

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Adhesive: Type recommended by AWI/AWMAC to suit application.B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized

finish in concealed locations and stainless steel finish in exposed locations.D. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.

2.05 FABRICATIONA. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit

passage through building openings.B. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for

cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting.C. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops at 16 inches (400 mm) on center.D. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Seal

cut edges.2.06 SHOP FINISHING

A. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), Section 5 -Finishing for grade specified and as follows:


A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements

for grade indicated.B. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.C. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.D. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species

to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Test installed work for rigidity and ability to support loads.


064100 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.

END OF SECTION

THERMAL INSULATIONFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

072100 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 072100THERMAL INSULATION


A. Board insulation at exterior wall behind gypsum board wall finish.B. Batt insulation in exterior roof construction.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light

Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2017.B. ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal

Insulation Board; 2017.C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.D. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750

Degrees C; 2016a.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product

limitations.C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special environmental conditions

required for installation and installation techniques.1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental tosuccessful installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation on Inside of Concrete and Masonry Exterior Walls: Polyisocyanurate board.2.02 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Polyisocyanurate (ISO) Board Insulation: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C1289.1. Classifications:

a. Type II:1) Class 2 - Faced with coated polymer-bonded glass fiber mat facers on both

major surfaces of core foam.2) Compressive Strength: Classes 1-2-3, Grade 1 - 16 psi (110 kPa), minimum.3) Thermal Resistance, R-value (RSI-value): At 1-1/2 inch (38.1 mm) thick; Class

1, Grades 1-2-3 - 8.4 (1.48) at 75 degrees F (24 degrees C).2. Flame Spread Index (FSI): Class A - 0 to 25, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.3. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.4. Board Size: 48 inch by 96 inch (1220 mm by 2440 mm).5. Board Thickness: 1.5 inch (37.5 mm).6. Board Edges: Square.

2.03 BATT INSULATION MATERIALSA. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665;

friction fit.1. Flame Spread Index: 75 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.


072100 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

3. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except forfacing, if any.

4. Formaldehyde Content: Zero.5. Thermal Resistance: as indicated on the drawings.6. Facing: Aluminum foil, flame spread 25 rated; one side.

B. Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible or semi-rigid preformed batt or blanket, complying withASTM C665; friction fit; unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in accordance withASTM E84.1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.2. Smoke Developed Index: 0 (zero), when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.3. Thermal Resistance: as indicated on the drawings.

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Interior Vapor Retarder: Modified polyethylene/polyacrylate (PE/PA) film reinforced with

polyethylene terephthalate (PET) fibers, 12 mils, 0.012 inch (0.30 mm) thick.1. Width: 4.9 feet (1.5 m).

B. Tape: Reinforced polyethylene film with acrylic pressure sensitive adhesive.1. Application: Sealing of interior circular penetrations, such as pipes or cables.2. Width: As required for application.

C. Flashing Tape: Special polyolefin film with high performance adhesive.1. Application: Interior window and door sill flashing tape.2. Width: As required for application.

D. Insulation Fasteners: Impaling clip of unfinished steel with washer retainer and clips, to beadhered to surface to receive insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate,capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place.

E. Nails or Staples: Steel wire; electroplated or galvanized; type and size to suit application.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates areready to receive insulation.

B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials orsubstances that may impede adhesive bond.

3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT EXTERIOR WALLSA. Apply adhesive to back of boards:

1. Three continuous beads per board length.2. Full bed 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.

B. Install boards horizontally on walls.1. Place boards to maximize adhesive contact.2. Install in running bond pattern.3. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions.

C. Extend boards over expansion joints, unbonded to wall on one side of joint.D. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.

3.03 BATT INSTALLATIONA. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install in exterior wall and roof spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services

within the plane of the insulation.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C665

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E84









































072100 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.

END OF SECTION












WEATHER BARRIERSFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

072500 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 072500WEATHER BARRIERS

PART 2 PRODUCTS1.01 WEATHER BARRIER ASSEMBLIES

A. Interior Vapor Retarder:1. On inside face of masonry and concrete walls use vapor retarder coating.

1.02 AIR BARRIER MATERIALS (WATER VAPOR PERMEABLE AND WATER-RESISTIVE)A. Air Barrier, Fluid Applied: Vapor permeable, elastomeric waterproofing.

1. Air Barrier Coating:a. Material: Polyether-based polymer.b. Dry Film Thickness (DFT): 10 mil, 0.010 inch (0.254 mm), minimum.c. Air Permeance: 0.001 cubic feet per minute per square foot (0.005 L/s/sq m),

maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178.d. Water Vapor Permeance: 18 perms (1030 ng/(Pa s sq m)), minimum, when tested in

accordance with ASTM E96/E96M, Procedure B.e. Elongation: 300 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D412.f. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed

index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.g. Nail Sealability: Pass, when tested in accordance with ASTM D1970/D1970M.h. VOC Content: 100 g per L or less.i. Sealants, Tapes and Accessories: As recommended by coating manufacturer.

1.03 VAPOR RETARDER MATERIALS (AIR BARRIER AND WATER-RESISTIVE)1.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Sealants, Tapes, and Accessories for Sealing Weather Barrier and Sealing Weather Barrier toAdjacent Substrates: As specified or as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.

B. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive sheet flashing complying with ASTM D1970/D1970M, exceptslip resistance requirement is waived if not installed on a roof.


A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section.2.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove projections, protruding fasteners, and loose or foreign matter that might interfere withproper installation.

B. Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive adhesives in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions.

2.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Air Barriers: Install continuous air tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams and

with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces.C. Vapor Retarders: Install continuous air tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams

and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces.D. Coatings:

1. Prepare substrate in manner recommended by coating manufacturer; treat joints insubstrate and between dissimilar materials as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Use flashing to seal to adjacent construction and to bridge joints.E. Openings and Penetrations in Exterior Weather Barriers:

WEATHER BARRIERSFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

072500 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

1. Install flashing over sills, covering entire sill frame member, extending at least 5 inches(125 mm) onto weather barrier and at least 6 inches (150 mm) up jambs; mechanicallyfasten stretched edges.

2. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, seal head and jamb flangesusing a continuous bead of sealant compressed by flange and cover flanges with sealingtape at least 4 inches (100 mm) wide; do not seal sill flange.

3. At openings to be filled with non-flanged frames, seal weather barrier to each side ofopening framing, using flashing at least 9 inches (230 mm) wide, covering entire depth offraming.

4. At head of openings, install flashing under weather barrier extending at least 2 inches (50mm) beyond face of jambs; seal weather barrier to flashing.

5. At interior face of openings, seal gap between window/door frame and rough framing,using joint sealant over backer rod.

6. Service and Other Penetrations: Form flashing around penetrating item and seal toweather barrier surface.

2.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Coordination of ABAA Tests and Inspections:

1. Provide testing and inspection required by ABAA QAP.2. Notify ABAA in writing of schedule for air barrier work, and allow adequate time for testing

and inspection.3. Cooperate with ABAA testing agency.4. Allow access to air barrier work areas and staging.5. Do not cover air barrier work until tested, inspected, and accepted.

C. Do not cover installed weather barriers until required inspections have been completed.D. Obtain approval of installation procedures by the weather barrier manufacturer based on a

mock-up installed in place, prior to proceeding with remainder of installation.E. Take digital photographs of each portion of the installation prior to covering up.

2.05 PROTECTIONA. Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIMFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

076200 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 076200SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM


A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings and counterflashings.B. Sealants for joints within sheet metal fabrications.C. Precast concrete splash pads.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless SteelSheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.

B. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2018.C. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007,

with Editorial Revision (2012).D. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 2012.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods,

flashings, terminations, and installation details.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA (ASMM) requirements, except as otherwiseindicated.

B. Maintain one copy of document on site.C. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope

metal sheets to ensure drainage.B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666, Type 304 alloy, soft temper, 28 gage, (0.0156 inch) (0.40 mm)thick; smooth No. 4 - Brushed finish.

2.02 FABRICATIONA. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch (13 mm); miter and seam corners.D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated; at moving joints, use

sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Stainless steel.B. Primer: Zinc chromate type.

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIMFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

076200 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

C. Concealed Sealants: Non-curing butyl sealant.D. Exposed Sealants: ASTM C920; elastomeric sealant, with minimum movement capability as

recommended by manufacturer for substrates to be sealed; color to match adjacent material.E. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586/D4586M, Type I.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film

thickness of 15 mil (0.4 mm).3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners, and use exposed fasteners only wherepermitted..

B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.C. Fit flashings tight in place; make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines

accurate to profiles.D. Seal metal joints watertight.E. Set splash pads under downspouts.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for field inspection requirements.B. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with

specified requirements.END OF SECTION

JOINT SEALANTSFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

079200 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 079200JOINT SEALANTS


A. Nonsag gunnable joint sealants.B. Joint backings and accessories.C. Owner-provided field quality control.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 016116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions: Additional

requirements for sealants and primers.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM C661 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric-Type Sealants byMeans of a Durometer; 2015.

B. ASTM C794 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion-In-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2015a.C. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2017.D. ASTM C919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2012

(Reapproved 2017).E. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2018.F. ASTM C1087 - Standard Test Method for Determining Compatibility of Liquid-Applied Sealants

with Accessories Used in Structural Glazing Systems; 2016.G. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2016.H. ASTM C1330 - Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold

Liquid-Applied Sealants; 2002 (Reapproved 2013).I. ASTM C1521 - Standard Practice for Evaluating Adhesion of Installed Weatherproofing Sealant

Joints; 2013.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data for Sealants: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheets for each product to be

used, that includes the following.1. Physical characteristics, including movement capability, VOC content, hardness, cure time,

and color availability.2. List of backing materials approved for use with the specific product.3. Substrates that product is known to satisfactorily adhere to and with which it is compatible.4. Substrates the product should not be used on.

C. Product Data for Accessory Products: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheet for eachproduct to be used, including physical characteristics, installation instructions, andrecommended tools.

D. Color Cards for Selection: Where sealant color is not specified, submit manufacturer's colorcards showing standard colors available for selection.

E. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Reports: Submit at least four weeks prior to start ofinstallation.

F. Preinstallation Field Adhesion Test Plan: Submit at least two weeks prior to start of installation.G. Preinstallation Field Adhesion Test Reports: Submit filled out Preinstallation Field Adhesion

Test Reports log within 10 days after completion of tests; include bagged test samples andphotographic records.


079200 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Maintain one copy of each referenced document covering installation requirements on site.B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section.C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section.D. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and

inspections of the type specified in this section.E. Preconstruction Laboratory Testing: Arrange for sealant manufacturer(s) to test each

combination of sealant, substrate, backing, and accessories.1. Adhesion Testing: In accordance with ASTM C794.2. Compatibility Testing: In accordance with ASTM C1087.3. Allow sufficient time for testing to avoid delaying the work.4. Deliver to manufacturer sufficient samples for testing.5. Report manufacturer's recommended corrective measures, if any, including primers or

techniques not indicated in product data submittals.6. Testing is not required if sealant manufacturer provides data showing previous testing, not

older than 24 months, that shows satisfactory adhesion, lack of staining, and compatibility.F. Preinstallation Field Adhesion Test Plan: Include destructive field adhesion testing of one

sample of each combination of sealant type and substrate, except interior acrylic latex sealants,and include the following for each tested sample.1. Identification of testing agency.2. Preinstallation Field Adhesion Test Log Form: Include the following data fields, with known

information filled out.a. Test date.b. Copy of test method documents.c. Age of sealant upon date of testing.d. Test results, modeled after the sample form in the test method document.e. Indicate use of photographic record of test.

G. Field Adhesion Test Procedures:1. Allow sealants to fully cure as recommended by manufacturer before testing.2. Have a copy of the test method document available during tests.3. Record the type of failure that occurred, other information required by test method, and the

information required on the Field Quality Control Log.4. When performing destructive tests, also inspect the opened joint for proper installation

characteristics recommended by manufacturer, and report any deficiencies.5. Deliver the samples removed during destructive tests in separate sealed plastic bags,

identified with project, location, test date, and test results, to Owner.6. If any combination of sealant type and substrate does not show evidence of minimum

adhesion or shows cohesion failure before minimum adhesion, report results to Architect.H. Destructive Field Adhesion Test: Test for adhesion in accordance with ASTM C1521, using

Destructive Tail Procedure.1. Sample: At least 18 inch (457 mm) long.2. Minimum Elongation Without Adhesive Failure: Consider the tail at rest, not under any

elongation stress; multiply the stated movement capability of the sealant in percent by two;then multiply 1 inch (25 mm) by that percentage; if adhesion failure occurs before the "1inch mark" is that distance from the substrate, the test has failed.

3. If either adhesive or cohesive failure occurs prior to minimum elongation, take necessarymeasures to correct conditions and re-test; record each modification to products orinstallation procedures.

1.06 WARRANTYA. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.


079200 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories that fail to achieve

watertight seal , exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 JOINT SEALANT APPLICATIONS

A. Scope:1. Interior Joints: Do not seal interior joints unless specifically indicated to be sealed. Interior

joints to be sealed include, but are not limited to, the following items.a. Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction.b. In sound-rated wall and ceiling assemblies, gaps at electrical outlets, wiring devices,

piping, and other openings; between wall/ceiling and other construction; and otherflanking sound paths.

c. Other joints indicated below.2. Do not seal the following types of joints.

a. Joints indicated to be treated with manufactured expansion joint cover or some othertype of sealing device.

b. Joints where sealant is specified to be provided by manufacturer of product to besealed.

c. Joints where installation of sealant is specified in another section.d. Joints between suspended panel ceilings/grid and walls.

B. Interior Joints: Use non-sag polyurethane sealant, unless otherwise indicated.1. In Sound-Rated Assemblies: Acrylic emulsion latex sealant.

C. Sound-Rated Assemblies: Walls and ceilings identified as "STC-rated", "sound-rated", or"acoustical".

2.02 JOINT SEALANTS - GENERALA. Sealants and Primers: Provide products with levels of volatile organic compound (VOC) content

as indicated in Section 016116.2.03 NONSAG JOINT SEALANTS

A. Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single or multi-component; notexpected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic.1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent, minimum.2. Hardness Range: 20 to 35, Shore A, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661.3. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces.4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to 180 degrees F (Minus 40 to 82 degrees C).

B. Acrylic Emulsion Latex: Water-based; ASTM C834, single component, non-staining,non-bleeding, non-sagging; not intended for exterior use.

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Backer Rod: Cylindrical cellular foam rod with surface that sealant will not adhere to,

compatible with specific sealant used, and recommended by backing and sealantmanufacturers for specific application.1. Type for Joints Not Subject to Pedestrian or Vehicular Traffic: ASTM C1330; Type O -

Open Cell Polyurethane.2. Open Cell: 40 to 50 percent larger in diameter than joint width.

B. Backing Tape: Self-adhesive polyethylene tape with surface that sealant will not adhere to andrecommended by tape and sealant manufacturers for specific application.

C. Masking Tape: Self-adhesive, nonabsorbent, non-staining, removable without adhesiveresidue, and compatible with surfaces adjacent to joints and sealants.

D. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, type recommended by sealantmanufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.


079200 - 420181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

E. Primers: Type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application; non-staining.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that joints are ready to receive work.B. Verify that backing materials are compatible with sealants.C. Verify that backer rods are of the correct size.D. Preinstallation Adhesion Testing: Install a sample for each test location indicated in the test

plan.1. Test each sample as specified in PART 1 under QUALITY ASSURANCE article.2. Notify Architect of date and time that tests will be performed, at least 7 days in advance.3. Record each test on Preinstallation Adhesion Test Log as indicated.4. If any sample fails, review products and installation procedures, consult manufacturer, or

take whatever other measures are necessary to ensure adhesion; re-test in a differentlocation; if unable to obtain satisfactory adhesion, report to Architect.

5. After completion of tests, remove remaining sample material and prepare joint for newsealant installation.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.B. Clean joints, and prime as necessary, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.D. Mask elements and surfaces adjacent to joints from damage and disfigurement due to sealant

work; be aware that sealant drips and smears may not be completely removable.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation ofsurfaces and material installation instructions.

B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve the following, unless otherwise

indicated:1. Width/depth ratio of 2:1.2. Neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of the joint width.3. Surface bond area on each side not less than 75 percent of joint width.

E. Install bond breaker backing tape where backer rod cannot be used.F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags, and without

getting sealant on adjacent surfaces.G. Do not install sealant when ambient temperature is outside manufacturer's recommended

temperature range, or will be outside that range during the entire curing period, unlessmanufacturer's approval is obtained and instructions are followed.

H. Nonsag Sealants: Tool surface concave, unless otherwise indicated; remove masking tapeimmediately after tooling sealant surface.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Perform field quality control inspection/testing as specified in PART 1 under QUALITY

ASSURANCE article.B. Non-Destructive Adhesion Testing: If there are any failures in first 100 linear feet (30 linear m),

notify Architect immediately.C. Destructive Adhesion Testing: If there are any failures in first 1000 linear feet (300 linear m),

notify Architect immediately.


079200 - 520181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

D. Remove and replace failed portions of sealants using same materials and procedures asindicated for original installation.

E. Repair destructive test location damage immediately after evaluation and recording of results.END OF SECTION

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMESFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

081113 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 081113HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES


A. Non-fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 087100 - Door Hardware.1.03 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association.B. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.B. ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel

Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors; 2011.C. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI-100); 2014.D. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces

for Steel Doors and Frames; 2011.E. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2017.F. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,

Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2016.

G. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, andUltra-High Strength; 2017.

H. BHMA A156.115 - American National Standard for Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors andSteel Frames; 2016.

I. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2009.J. NAAMM HMMA 805 - Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for Hollow Metal Doors and

Frames; 2012.K. NAAMM HMMA 830 - Hardware Selection for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2002.L. NAAMM HMMA 831 - Hardware Locations for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2011.M. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors

and Frames; 2007.N. NAAMM HMMA 860 - Guide Specifications for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2013.O. NAAMM HMMA 861 - Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames;

2014.P. SDI 117 - Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2013.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations,

reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and onecopy of referenced standards/guidelines.

C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and anyindicated finish requirements.


081113 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

D. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installationinstructions relating to this project.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in thissection.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specifiedC. Maintain at project site copies of reference standards relating to installation of products

specified.1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with NAAMM HMMA 840 or ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specifiedrequirements.

B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion andadverse effects on factory applied painted finish.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:1. Ceco Door, an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com/#sle.2. Mesker, dormakaba Group: www.meskeropeningsgroup.com/#sle.3. Republic Doors, an Allegion brand: www.republicdoor.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 DESIGN CRITERIAA. Requirements for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:

1. Steel used for fabrication of doors and frames shall comply with one or more of thefollowing requirements; Galvannealed steel conforming to ASTM A653/A653M, cold-rolledsteel conforming to ASTM A1008/A1008M, or hot-rolled pickled and oiled (HRPO) steelconforming to ASTM A1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS) Type B for each.

2. Accessibility: Comply with ICC A117.1 and ADA Standards.3. Hardware Preparations, Selections and Locations: Comply with NAAMM HMMA 830 and

NAAMM HMMA 831 or BHMA A156.115 and ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordancewith specified requirements.

4. Zinc Coating for Typical Interior and/or Exterior Locations: Provide metal componentszinc-coated (galvanized) and/or zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) by the hot-dipprocess in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coatingthickness, unless noted otherwise for specific hollow metal doors and frames.a. Based on NAAMM HMMA Custom Guidelines: Provide at least A25/ZF75

(galvannealed) for interior applications, and at least A60/ZF180 (galvannealed) orG60/Z180 (galvanized) for corrosive locations.

B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with morethan one type of requirement, comply with the specified requirements for each type; forinstance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with therequirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirementsconflict, comply with the most stringent.

2.03 HOLLOW METAL DOORSA. Interior Doors, Non-Fire Rated:

1. Based on NAAMM HMMA Custom Guidelines:a. Comply with guidelines of NAAMM HMMA 860 for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.b. Performance Level 3 - Heavy Duty, in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 805.c. Physical Performance Level A, 1,000,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI

A250.4.

http://www.naamm.org/




















http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI%20A250.4


081113 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), minimum.e. Zinc Coating: G90/Z275 galvanized coating; ASTM A653/A653M.

2. Door Core Material: Manufacturers standard core material/construction and in compliancewith requirements.

3. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inch (44.5 mm), nominal.4. Door Face Sheets: Flush.5. Door Finish: Factory primed and field finished.

2.04 HOLLOW METAL FRAMESA. Comply with standards and/or custom guidelines as indicated for corresponding door in

accordance with applicable door frame requirements.B. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire Rated: Full profile/continuously welded type.

1. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), minimum.2. Frame Finish: Factory primed and field finished.

2.05 FINISHESA. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.

2.06 ACCESSORIESA. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; provide three on strike side of single door,

three on center mullion of pairs, and two on head of pairs without center mullions.B. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for factory- or shop-assembled frames.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.C. Verify that finished walls are in plane to ensure proper door alignment.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Coat inside of frames with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and related

requirements of specified door and frame standards or custom guidelines indicated.B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.C. Install door hardware as specified in Section 087100.

3.04 TOLERANCESA. Clearances Between Door and Frame: Comply with related requirements of specified frame

standards or custom guidelines indicated in accordance with SDI 117 or NAAMM HMMA 861.B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) measured with straight edge, corner to

corner.3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.3.06 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGS

END OF SECTION















































FLUSH WOOD DOORSFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

081416 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 081416FLUSH WOOD DOORS


A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; non-rated.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.B. Section 087100 - Door Hardware.


2016, with Errata (2017).1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and

characteristics.C. Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, beveling,

blocking for hardware, factory machining, factory finishing, cutouts for glazing and other details.1. Provide information as required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS).

D. Certificate: Submit labels and certificates required by quality assurance and quality control programs.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.F. Specimen warranty.G. Warranty, executed in Owner's name.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Maintain one copy of the specified door quality standard on site for review during installation and

finishing.B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section.C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this

section.D. Quality Certification:

1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the installed work complies withAWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements for grade or gradesspecified.


with specified requirements.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or

wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges withtinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.


081416 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

1.07 WARRANTYA. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation.C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances,

defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 DOORS

A. Doors: Refer to drawings for locations and additional requirements.1. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, Heavy Duty performance, in accordance with

AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), unless noted otherwise.2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated.

B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction.1. Provide solid core doors at each location.2. Wood veneer facing with factory transparent finish match existing species, stain, and

finish.2.02 DOOR AND PANEL CORES

A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type structural composite lumber core(SCLC), plies and faces as indicated.

2.03 DOOR FACINGSA. Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: Species as specified above, veneer grade in accordance

with quality standard indicated, match adjacent existing, with book match between leaves ofveneer, match adjacent existing of spliced veneer leaves assembled on door or panel face.

B. Facing Adhesive: Type I - waterproof.2.04 DOOR CONSTRUCTION

A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails:

1. Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware reinforcement.C. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with

hardware requirements and dimensions.D. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge

clearances in accordance with specified quality standard.E. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified.

2.05 FACTORY FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORSA. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), Section 5 -

Finishing for grade specified and as follows:1. Transparent:

a. System: Match adjacent existing. If existing adjacent cannot be matched provide thefollowing;1) System - 1, Lacquer, Nitrocellulose.

b. Stain: match adjacent existing.c. Sheen: match adjacent existing.

B. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing.2.06 ACCESSORIES

A. Hollow Metal Door Frames: As specified in Section 081213.B. Door Hardware: As specified in Section 087100.


081416 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or

alignment.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door.C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.B. Conform to specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness.

3.04 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.B. Adjust closers for full closure.

3.05 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGSEND OF SECTION

ACCESS DOORS AND PANELSFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

083100 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 083100ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS


A. Wall and ceiling access door and frame units.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.B. ASTM A240/A240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless

Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications; 2016.C. ASTM A276/A276M - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes; 2017.D. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013.E. ASTM A513/A513M - Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy

Steel Mechanical Tubing; 2015.F. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,

Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2016.

G. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, andUltra-High Strength; 2017.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of

adjoining work.C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements.D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of each access unit.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section.B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS ASSEMBLIES

A. Wall-Mounted Units:1. Location: As indicated on drawings.2. Material: Steel.3. Size: 12 inch by 12 inch (305 mm by 305 mm) minimum.4. Door/Panel: Hinged, standard duty, with tool-operated spring or cam lock and no handle.5. Wall Mounting Criteria: Provide surface-mounted face frame and door surface flush with

frame surface.B. Wall-Mounted Units in Wet Areas:

1. Location: As indicated on drawings.2. Material: Stainless steel, Type 304.3. Size: 12 inch by 12 inch (305 mm by 305 mm) minimum.4. Door/Panel: Hinged, standard duty, with tool-operated spring or cam lock and no handle.5. Wall Mounting Criteria: Provide surface-mounted frame concealed by door with

pantograph hinges.

ACCESS DOORS AND PANELSFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

083100 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

C. Ceiling-Mounted Units:1. Location: As indicated on drawings.2. Material: Steel, hot-dipped zinc, or zinc-aluminum-alloy coated.3. Size - Lay-In Grid Ceilings: To match module of ceiling grid.4. Size - Other Ceilings: 12 inch by 12 inch (305 mm by 305 mm) minimum.5. Door/Panel: Hinged, standard duty, with tool-operated spring or cam lock and no handle.

2.02 WALL AND CEILING MOUNTED UNITSA. Manufacturers:

1. Activar Construction Products Group - JL Industries: www.activarcpg.com/#sle.2. Babcock-Davis: www.babcockdavis.com/#sle.3. Karp Associates, Inc: www.karpinc.com/#sle.4. Milcor, Inc: www.milcorinc.com/#sle.5. Nystrom, Inc: www.nystrom.com/#sle.6. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Wall and Ceiling Mounted Units: Factory fabricated door and frame, fully assembled units withcorner joints welded, filled and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinaterequirements with type of installation assembly being used for each unit.1. Style: Frame concealed by door panel.2. Door Style: Single thickness with rolled or turned in edges.3. Heavy Duty Frames: 14 gage, 0.0747 inch (1.89 mm), minimum thickness.4. Heavy Duty Single Steel Sheet Door Panels: 14 gage, 0.0747 inch (1.89 mm), minimum

thickness.5. Hardware:

a. Hinges for Non-Fire-Rated Units: Concealed, constant force closure spring type.b. Latch/Lock: Screw driver slot for quarter turn cam latch.c. Number of Locks/Latches Required: As recommended by manufacturer for size of

unit.d. Gasketing: Extruded neoprene, around perimeter of door panel.


A. Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located.B. Begin installation only after substrates have been properly prepared, and if the responsibility of

another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to proceeding with this work.B. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by manufacturer for applicable substrates in

accordance with project conditions.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install frames plumb and level in openings, and secure units rigidly in place.C. Position units to provide convenient access to concealed equipment when necessary.

END OF SECTION

ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTSFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

084313 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 084313ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS


A. Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass and sill extender with end dams.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 088000 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; 2015.B. AAMA 609 & 610 - Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for Architecturally Finished Aluminum

(Combined Document); 2015.C. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 2014 (2015 Errata).D. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2010, with 2013

Supplements and Errata.E. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014.F. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric); 2013.G. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior

Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across theSpecimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).

H. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014.

I. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2016).

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Coordinate with installation of other components that comprise the exterior enclosure.B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this

section; require attendance by all affected installers.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly,

anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, and internal drainage details.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances,

affected related work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field weldingrequired.1. Include design engineer's stamp or seal on shop drawings for attachments and anchors.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specifiedrequirements.

E. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, engineeringcalculations, and dimensional limitations.

F. Field Quality Control Submittals: Report of field testing for water penetration and air leakage.G. Designer's Qualification Statement.H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's

name and registered with manufacturer.


084313 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under direct

supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work andlicensed in the State in which the Project is located.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified.C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed

coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F (5 degrees C). Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation.

1.09 WARRANTYA. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units,

including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.D. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish.

Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 STOREFRONT

A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing memberswith infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.1. Glazing Rabbet: For 1 inch (25 mm) insulating glazing.2. Glazing Position: Centered (front to back).3. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: 2 inches wide by 4-1/2 inches deep (50 mm wide by 114 mm

deep).4. Finish: Class I natural anodized.

a. Factory finish all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.b. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or

dissimilar metals with bituminous paint.5. Finish Color: Match Existing.6. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted and

secured; prepared to receive anchors and hardware; fasteners and attachments concealedfrom view; reinforced as required for imposed loads.

7. Construction: Eliminate noises caused by wind and thermal movement, prevent vibrationharmonics, and prevent "stack effect" in internal spaces.

8. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network anywater entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moistureoccurring within system.

9. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system componentscaused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F (95 degrees C) over a 12 hourperiod without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and otherbuilding elements.

10. Movement: Allow for movement between storefront and adjacent construction, withoutdamage to components or deterioration of seals.

11. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacentconstruction while allowing expected movement.


084313 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

12. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughoutassembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glazing and inner sheet of infill panel andheel bead of glazing compound.

B. Performance Requirements:1. Wind Loads: Design and size components to withstand the specified load requirements

without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M,using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load.a. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of ASCE 7.b. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction,

with full recovery of glazing materials.2. Water Penetration Resistance on Manufactured Assembly: No uncontrolled water on

interior face, when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at pressure differential of 8 psf(390 Pa).

3. Air Leakage Laboratory Test: Maximum of 0.06 cu ft/min sq ft (0.3 L/sec sq m) of wallarea, when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at 6.27 psf (300 Pa) pressuredifferential across assembly.

2.02 COMPONENTSA. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, double thermally broken with the

interior section insulated from the exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system.1. Glazing Stops: Flush.

B. Glazing: As specified in Section 088000.2.03 MATERIALS

A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).B. Fasteners: Stainless steel.C. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration

requirements.2.04 FINISHES

A. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than0.7 mils (0.018 mm) thick.

B. Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer for field application.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of

this section.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and

other irregularities.C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional

tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam.G. Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads

to sill flashing.


084313 - 420181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

H. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity ofthermal barrier.

I. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot besatisfactorily repaired.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inch per 3 feet (1.5 mm per m) non-cumulative or 0.06

inch per 10 feet (1.5 mm per 3 m), whichever is less.B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL3.05 CLEANING

A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean

wiping cloths, and take care to remove dirt from corners and to wipe surfaces clean.C. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean aluminum surfaces in accordance with AAMA

609 & 610.3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage until Date of Substantial Completion.END OF SECTION

http://www.aamanet.org/general.asp?sect=2&id=45




DOOR HARDWARE Fire Station 6 Bathroom Alterations 138 South Jefferson Street Richmond, Virginia 23220

087100 - 1

20181101 – CORFS-6+8-BA April 18, 2019

SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Mechanical and electrified door hardware for:

a. Swinging doors.

B. Exclusions: Unless specifically listed in hardware sets, hardware is not specified in this section for:

1. Windows 2. Cabinets (casework), including locks in cabinets 3. Signage 4. Toilet accessories 5. Overhead doors

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for sealant requirements applicable to threshold installation specified in this section.

2. Division 09 sections for touchup finishing or refinishing of existing openings modified by this section.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. UL - Underwriters Laboratories

1. UL 10B - Fire Test of Door Assemblies 2. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Test of Fire Door Assemblies 3. UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies 4. UL 305 - Panic Hardware

B. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute

1. Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule 2. Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware 3. Key Systems and Nomenclature


087100 - 2

20181101 – CORFS-6+8-BA April 18, 2019

C. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

1. ANSI/BHMA A156.1 - A156.29, and ANSI/BHMA A156.31 - Standards for Hardware and Specialties

D. IBC-2012

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General:

1. Submit in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 requirements. 2. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify on submittals deviations from

Contract Documents, issues of incompatibility or other issues which may detrimentally affect the Work.

3. Prior to forwarding submittal, comply with procedures for verifying existing door and frame compatibility for new hardware, as specified in PART 3, “EXAMINATION” article, herein.

B. Action Submittals:

1. Product Data: Product data including manufacturers’ technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements.

2. Samples for Verification: If requested by Architect, submit production sample or sample installations of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated, and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule.

a. Samples will be returned to supplier in like-new condition. Units that are acceptable to Architect may, after final check of operations, be incorporated into Work, within limitations of key coordination requirements.

3. Door Hardware Schedule: Submit schedule with hardware sets in vertical format as illustrated by Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door and Hardware Institute. Indicate complete designations of each item required for each door or opening, include:

a. Door Index; include door number, heading number, and Architects hardware set number.

b. Opening Lock Function Spreadsheet: List locking device and function for each opening.

c. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. d. Name and manufacturer of each item. e. Fastenings and other pertinent information. f. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings. g. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. h. Mounting locations for hardware. i. Door and frame sizes and materials. j. Name and phone number for local manufacturer's representative for each product.

1) Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with

submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate


087100 - 3

20181101 – CORFS-6+8-BA April 18, 2019

submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule.

4. Key Schedule:

a. After Keying Conference, provide keying schedule listing levels of keying as well as explanation of key system's function, key symbols used and door numbers controlled.

b. Use ANSI/BHMA A156.28 “Recommended Practices for Keying Systems” as guideline for nomenclature, definitions, and approach for selecting optimal keying system.

c. Provide 3 copies of keying schedule for review prepared and detailed in accordance with referenced DHI publication. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key to unique door designations.

d. Index keying schedule by door number, keyset, hardware heading number, cross keying instructions, and special key stamping instructions.

e. Provide one complete bitting list of key cuts and one key system schematic illustrating system usage and expansion. 1) Forward bitting list, key cuts and key system schematic directly to Owner, by

means as directed by Owner.

f. Prepare key schedule by or under supervision of supplier, detailing Owner’s final keying instructions for locks.

5. Templates: After final approval of hardware schedule, provide templates for doors, frames and other work specified to be factory prepared for door hardware installation.

C. Informational Submittals:

1. Qualification Data: For Supplier, Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant. 2. Product Certificates for electrified door hardware, signed by manufacturer:

a. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire-rated doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies.

3. Certificates of Compliance:

a. Certificates of compliance for fire-rated hardware and installation instructions if requested by Architect or Authority Having Jurisdiction.

b. Installer Training Meeting Certification: Letter of compliance, signed by Contractor, attesting to completion of installer training meeting specified in “QUALITY ASSURANCE” article, herein.

c. Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference Certification: Letter of compliance, signed by Contractor, attesting to completion of electrified hardware coordination conference, specified in “QUALITY ASSURANCE” article, herein.

4. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

D. Closeout Submittals:

1. Operations and Maintenance Data : Provide in accordance with Division 01 and include:


087100 - 4

20181101 – CORFS-6+8-BA April 18, 2019

a. Complete information on care, maintenance, and adjustment; data on repair and replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes.

b. Catalog pages for each product. c. Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer. d. Parts list for each product. e. Final approved hardware schedule, edited to reflect conditions as-installed. f. Final keying schedule g. Copies of floor plans with keying nomenclature h. Copy of warranties including appropriate reference numbers for manufacturers to

identify project.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Product Substitutions: Comply with product requirements stated in Division 01 and as specified herein.

1. Where specific manufacturer’s product is named and accompanied by “No Substitute,” including make or model number or other designation, provide product specified. (Note: Certain products have been selected for their unique characteristics and particular project suitability.)

a. Where no additional products or manufacturers are listed in product category, requirements for “No Substitute” govern product selection.

2. Where products indicate “acceptable manufacturers” or “acceptable manufacturers and products”, provide product from specified manufacturers, subject to compliance with specified requirements and “Single Source Responsibility” requirements stated herein.

B. Supplier Qualifications and Responsibilities: Recognized architectural hardware supplier with record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that provides certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the Work for consultation.

1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. 3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including

Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

4. Coordination Responsibility: Coordinate installation of electronic security hardware with Architect and electrical engineers and provide installation and technical data to Architect and other related subcontractors.

a. Upon completion of electronic security hardware installation, inspect and verify that all components are working properly.

C. Installer Qualifications: Qualified tradesmen, skilled in application of commercial grade hardware with record of successful in-service performance for installing door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project.


087100 - 5

20181101 – CORFS-6+8-BA April 18, 2019

D. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: Person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and meets these requirements:

1. For door hardware, DHI-certified, Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). 2. Can provide installation and technical data to Architect and other related subcontractors. 3. Can inspect and verify components are in working order upon completion of installation. 4. Capable of producing wiring diagrams. 5. Capable of coordinating installation of electrified hardware with Architect and electrical

engineers.

E. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer.

1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.

F. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with governing accessibility regulations cited in “REFERENCES” article, herein.

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of wrist and that operate with force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N).

2. Maximum opening-force requirements:

a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door. b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Bevel raised thresholds with slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.

4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from open position of 70 degrees, door will take at least 3 seconds to move to 3 inches (75 mm) from latch, measured to leading edge of door.

G. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01.

1. Attendees: Owner, Contractor, Architect, Installer, and Hardware Supplier. 2. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door

hardware keying system including:

a. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion.

b. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. c. Requirements for key control system. d. Requirements for access control. e. Address for delivery of keys.

H. Coordination Conferences:


087100 - 6

20181101 – CORFS-6+8-BA April 18, 2019

1. Installation Coordination Conference: Prior to hardware installation, schedule and hold meeting to review questions or concerns related to proper installation and adjustment of door hardware.

a. Attendees: Door hardware supplier, door hardware installer, Contractor. b. After meeting, provide letter of compliance to Architect, indicating when meeting was

held and who was in attendance.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to Project site.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package.

1. Deliver each article of hardware in manufacturer’s original packaging.

C. Project Conditions:

1. Maintain manufacturer-recommended environmental conditions throughout storage and installation periods.

2. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items so that completion of Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.

D. Protection and Damage:

1. Promptly replace products damaged during shipping. 2. Handle hardware in manner to avoid damage, marring, or scratching. Correct, replace or

repair products damaged during Work. 3. Protect products against malfunction due to paint, solvent, cleanser, or any chemical

agent.

E. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of floor-recessed door hardware with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

C. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant.

D. Direct shipments not permitted, unless approved by Contractor.


087100 - 7

20181101 – CORFS-6+8-BA April 18, 2019

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Years from date of Substantial Completion, for durations indicated.

a. Closers: 1) Mechanical: 25 years surface closers /15 years concealed closers

b. Exit Devices: 1) Mechanical: 3 years.

c. Locksets: 1) Mechanical: 3 years.

d. Key Blanks: Lifetime

2. Warranty does not cover damage or faulty operation due to improper installation, improper use or abuse.

1.09 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Tools:

1. Furnish complete set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware, including changing of cylinders.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Where “No Substitute” is noted, submittals and substitution requests for other products will not be considered.

B. Approval of manufacturers and/or products other than those listed as ”Scheduled Manufacturer ” or “Acceptable Manufacturers” in the individual article for the product category shall be in accordance with QUALITY ASSURANCE article, herein.

C. Approval of products from manufacturers indicated in “Acceptable Manufacturers” is contingent upon those products providing all functions and features and meeting all requirements of scheduled manufacturer’s product.

D. Hand of Door: Drawings show direction of slide, swing, or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as shown.


087100 - 8

20181101 – CORFS-6+8-BA April 18, 2019

E. Where specified hardware is not adaptable to finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having same operation and quality as type specified, subject to Architect's approval.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Fasteners

1. Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation.

2. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish, or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work including prepared for paint surfaces to receive painted finish.

3. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units exposed when door is closed except when no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless thru-bolts are required to fasten hardware securely. Review door specification and advise Architect if thru-bolts are required.

4. Install hardware with fasteners provided by hardware manufacturer.

B. Provide screws, bolts, expansion shields, drop plates and other devices necessary for hardware installation.

1. Where fasteners are exposed to view: Finish to match adjacent door hardware material.

2.03 HINGES

A. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Ives 5BB/ 5BBHW series 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Hager BB series, Stanley FBB Series

B. Requirements:

1. Provide five-knuckle ball bearing hinges conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.1. 2. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, up to and including 36 inches (914 mm) wide:

a. Exterior: Standard weight, bronze or stainless steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high b. Interior: Standard weight, steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high

3. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors over 36 inches (914 mm) wide:

a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze/stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high

4. 2 inches or thicker doors:

a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze or stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high


087100 - 9

20181101 – CORFS-6+8-BA April 18, 2019

5. Provide three hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches (2286 mm) or less in height, and one additional hinge for each 30 inches (762 mm) of additional door height.

6. Where new hinges are specified for existing doors or existing frames, provide new hinges of identical size to hinge preparation present in existing door or existing frame.

7. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:

a. Steel Hinges: Steel pins b. Non-Ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins c. Out-Swinging Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins d. Out-Swinging Interior Lockable Doors: Non-removable pins e. Interior Non-lockable Doors: Non-rising pins

8. Width of hinges: 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) at 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, and 5 inches (127 mm) at 2 inches (51 mm) or thicker doors. Adjust hinge width as required for door, frame, and wall conditions to allow proper degree of opening.

9. Doors 36 inches (914 mm) wide or less furnish hinges 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high; doors greater than 36 inches (914 mm) wide furnish hinges 5 inches (127 mm) high, heavy weight or standard weight as specified.

2.04 MORTISE LOCKS


1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Schlage L9000 series

B. Requirements:

1. Provide mortise locks conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.13 Series 1000, Grade 1 Operational, Grade 1 Security, and manufactured from heavy gauge steel, containing components of steel with a zinc dichromate plating for corrosion resistance. Provide lock case that is multi-function and field reversible for handing without opening case. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.

2. Indicators: Where specified, provide indicator window measuring a minimum 2 inch x 1/2 inch with 180 degree visibility. Provide messages color-coded with full text and/or symbols, as scheduled, for easy visibility.

3. Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset with full 3/4 inch (19 mm) throw stainless steel mechanical anti-friction latchbolt. Provide deadbolt with full 1 inch (25 mm) throw, constructed of stainless steel.

4. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim. 5. Lever Trim: Stainless steel, cast or forged in design specified, with wrought roses and

external lever spring cages. Provide thru-bolted levers with 2-piece spindles.

a. Lever Design: Schlage 17A.

6. .

2.05 CYLINDERS

A. Manufacturers:


087100 - 10

20181101 – CORFS-6+8-BA April 18, 2019

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Schlage

B. Requirements:

1. Provide cylinders/cores from the same manufacturer of locksets, compliant with ANSI/BHMA A156.5; latest revision, Section 12, Grade 1; permanent cylinders; cylinder face finished to match lockset, manufacturer’s series as indicated. Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.

2. Provide cylinders in the below-listed configuration(s), distributed throughout the Project as indicated.

a. Conventional Patented Open: cylinder with interchangeable core with open keyway.

3. Patent Protection: Cylinders/cores requiring use of restricted, patented keys, patent-protected until the year, 2029.

4. Nickel silver bottom pins. 5. Replaceable Construction Cores.

a. Provide temporary construction cores replaceable by permanent cores, furnished in accordance with the following requirements. 1) 3 construction control keys 2) 12 construction change (day) keys.

b. Owner or Owner’s Representative will replace temporary construction cores with permanent cores.

2.06 KEYING

A. Provide a factory registered keying system, complying with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28, incorporating decisions made at keying conference.

B. Requirements:

1. Provide permanent cylinders/cores keyed by the manufacturer according to the following key system.

a. Master Keying system as directed by the Owner.

2. Forward bitting list and keys separately from cylinders, by means as directed by Owner. Failure to comply with forwarding requirements shall be cause for replacement of cylinders/cores involved at no additional cost to Owner.

3. Provide keys with the following features:

a. Material: Nickel silver; minimum thickness of .107-inch (2.3mm) b. Patent Protection: Keys and blanks protected by one or more utility patent(s) until

the year, 2029.

4. Identification:


087100 - 11

20181101 – CORFS-6+8-BA April 18, 2019

a. Mark permanent cylinders/cores and keys with applicable blind code per DHI publication “Keying Systems and Nomenclature” for identification. Blind code marks shall not include actual key cuts.

b. Identification stamping provisions must be approved by the Architect and Owner. c. Stamp cylinders/cores and keys with Owner’s unique key system facility code as

established by the manufacturer; key symbol and embossed or stamped with “DO NOT DUPLICATE” along with the “PATENTED” or patent number to enforce the patent protection.

d. Failure to comply with stamping requirements shall be cause for replacement of keys involved at no additional cost to Owner.

e. Forward permanent cylinders/cores to Owner, separately from keys, by means as directed by Owner.

5. Quantity: Furnish in the following quantities.

a. Change (Day) Keys: 3 per cylinder/core. b. Permanent Control Keys: 3. c. Master Keys: 6.

2.07 DOOR CLOSERS


1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: LCN 4050 series

B. Requirements:

1. Provide door closers conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by BHMA certified independent testing laboratory. ISO 9000 certify closers. Stamp units with date of manufacture code.

2. Provide door closers with fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with cast aluminum cylinder.

3. Closer Body: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) diameter with 11/16 inch (17 mm) diameter heat-treated pinion journal and full complement bearings.

4. Hydraulic Fluid: Fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C, and all weather requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F.

5. Spring Power: Continuously adjustable over full range of closer sizes, and providing reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and standards.

6. Hydraulic Regulation: By tamper-proof, non-critical valves, with separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and back check.

7. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) Technology: Not permitted. 8. Provide stick on templates, special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or

adapters for arms as required for details, overhead stops, and other door hardware items interfering with closer mounting.

2.08 DOOR TRIM

A. Manufacturers:


087100 - 12

20181101 – CORFS-6+8-BA April 18, 2019

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives: 9264 / 8200/8303 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns:VP4351/ 26C/ 5426C, Trimco: 1174/ 1001-3/ 1018-3B

B. Requirements:

1. Provide push plates 4 inches (102 mm) wide by 16 inches (406 mm) high by 0.050 inch (1 mm) thick and beveled 4 edges. Where width of door stile prevents use of 4 inches (102 mm) wide plate, adjust width to fit.

2. Provide offset pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with push bar.

3. Provide pull plates 4 inches (102 mm) wide by 16 inches (406 mm) high by 0.050 inch (1 mm) thick, beveled 4 edges, and prepped for pull. Where width of door stile prevents use of 4 inches (102 mm) wide plate, adjust width to fit.

2.09 PROTECTION PLATES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives; 8400 series 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns: K50 series, Trimco: KO050 series

B. Requirements:

1. Provide kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates minimum of 0.050 inch (1 mm) thick, beveled four edges as scheduled. Furnish with sheet metal or wood screws, finished to match plates.

2. Sizes of plates:

a. Kick Plates: 10 inches (254 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on single doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs

b. Mop Plates: 4 inches (102 mm) high by 1 inches (51 mm) less width of door on single doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs

2.10 OVERHEAD STOPS AND OVERHEAD STOP/HOLDERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturers: Glynn-Johnson: 90 series 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABH: 9010 series, Rixson: 9-x26 series

B. Requirements:

1. Provide heavy surface mounted overhead stop or holder for interior doors as specified. Provide medium duty surface mounted overhead stop for interior doors and at any door that swings more than 140 degrees before striking wall, open against equipment, casework, sidelights, and where conditions do not allow wall stop or floor stop presents tripping hazard.

2. Where overhead holders are specified provide friction type at doors without closer and positive type at doors with closer.


087100 - 13

20181101 – CORFS-6+8-BA April 18, 2019

2.11 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives: WS407/407CVX, FS444 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns: 570/535, Trimco: 1270WX /1201

B. Provide door stops at each door leaf:

1. Provide wall stops wherever possible. Provide convex type where mortise type locks are used.

2. Where a wall stop cannot be used, provide universal floor stops for low or high rise options.

3. Where wall or floor stop cannot be used, provide medium duty surface mounted overhead stop.

2.12 THRESHOLDS, SEALS, DOOR SWEEPS, AND GASKETING

A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Zero International: 655A/65A/ 188S/8217S/8194AA,429A/ 39A/ 142A

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: National Guard:426HD/896S,5050/5070/9115A/700SA 200SA/ 16A

B. Requirements:

1. Provide thresholds, weather-stripping (including door sweeps, seals, and astragals) and gasketing systems (including smoke, sound, and light) as specified and per architectural details. Match finish of other items.

2. Size of thresholds:

a. Saddle Thresholds: 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by jamb width by door width, minimum of .200” thick.

b. Bumper Seal Thresholds: 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by 5 inches (127 mm) wide by door width

3. Provide door sweeps, seals, and astragals only of type where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available.

2.13 SILENCERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives: SR64 series 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns: 500 series, Trimco: 1229A series

B. Requirements:

1. Provide "push-in" type silencers for hollow metal or wood frames.


087100 - 14

20181101 – CORFS-6+8-BA April 18, 2019

2. Provide one silencer per 30 inches (762 mm) of height on each single frame, and two for each pair frame.

3. Omit where gasketing is specified.

2.14 FINISHES

A. Finish: BHMA 626/652 (US26D); except:

1. Hinges at Exterior Doors: BHMA 630 (US32D) 2. Push Plates, Pulls, and Push Bars: BHMA 630 (US32D) 3. Protection Plates: BHMA 630 (US32D) 4. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA 630 (US32D) 5. Door Closers: Powder Coat to Match 6. Wall Stops: BHMA 630 (US32D) 7. Thresholds: Mill Finish Aluminum

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to installation of hardware, examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Existing Door and Frame Compatibility: Field verify existing doors and frames receiving new hardware and existing conditions receiving new openings. Verify that new hardware is compatible with existing door and frame preparation and existing conditions.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Where on-site modification of doors and frames is required:

1. Carefully remove existing door hardware and components being reused. Clean, protect, tag, and store in accordance with storage and handling requirements specified herein.

2. Field modify and prepare existing door and frame for new hardware being installed. 3. When modifications are exposed to view, use concealed fasteners, when possible. 4. Prepare hardware locations and reinstall in accordance with installation requirements for

new door hardware and with:

a. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.

b. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors."


087100 - 15

20181101 – CORFS-6+8-BA April 18, 2019

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following, unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for

Wood Flush Doors."

B. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations, using only fasteners provided by manufacturer.

C. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. Protect all installed hardware during painting.

D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

F. Install operating parts so they move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking, or excessive clearance.

G. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than quantity recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.

H. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period.

1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying section.

I. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.

J. Door Closers: Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors from corridors. Closers shall not be visible in corridors, lobbies and other public spaces unless approved by Architect.

K. Thresholds: Set thresholds in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

L. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they may impede traffic or present tripping hazard.


087100 - 16

20181101 – CORFS-6+8-BA April 18, 2019

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Architectural Hardware Consultant: Engage qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.

1. Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three [3] months after date of Substantial Completion, Hardware Manufacturer’s End User Consultant shall examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of door hardware, and electrified door hardware.

3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.07 DEMONSTRATION

A. Provide training for Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

3.08 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. Locksets, exit devices, and other hardware items are referenced in the following hardware sets for series, type and function. Refer to the above-specifications for special features, options, cylinders/keying, and other requirements.

B. Hardware Sets:


087100 - 17

20181101 – CORFS-6+8-BA April 18, 2019

Hardware Group No. 1

For use on mark/door #(s): 112 125 Each To Have: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr

3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 630 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY LOCK L9040 17A L583-363 L283-722 630 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050 RW/PA 689 LCN 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE

END OF SECTION

GLAZINGFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

088000 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 088000GLAZING


A. Insulating glass units.B. Glazing compounds and accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 072500 - Weather Barriers.B. Section 079200 - Joint Sealants: Sealants for other than glazing purposes.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2010, with 2013

Supplements and Errata.B. ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,

Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2015).C. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2018.D. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2016.E. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass;

2012.F. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2016.G. ASTM C1376 - Standard Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Flat

Glass; 2015.H. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings; 2016.I. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation;

2010.J. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; 2008.K. GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; 2008.L. GANA (LGRM) - Laminated Glazing Reference Manual; 2009.M. IGMA TM-3000 - North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for

Commercial & Residential Use; 1990 (2016).N. NFRC 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors; 2017.O. NFRC 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and

Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence; 2014, with Errata (2017).P. NFRC 300 - Test Method for Determining the Solar Optical Properties of Glazing Materials and

Systems; 2017.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work ofthis section; require attendance by each of the affected installers.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data on Insulating Glass Unit Glazing Types: Provide structural, physical and

environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling and installation requirements.C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and

environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements, and identifyavailable colors.

D. Certificate: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements.


088000 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

E. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have beencompleted in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Perform Work in accordance with GANA (GM), GANA (SM), GANA (LGRM), and IGMA

TM-3000 for glazing installation methods. Maintain one copy on site.B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section.C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified.D. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and

inspections of the type specified in this section.1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F (4 degrees C).B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing

compounds.1.08 WARRANTY

A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5) year manufacturer warranty to include coverage for

seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, including providing products to replace failed units.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS - EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES

A. Provide type and thickness of exterior glazing assemblies to support assembly dead loads, andto withstand live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane ofglass.1. Design Pressure: Calculated in accordance with ASCE 7.2. Comply with ASTM E1300 for design load resistance of glass type, thickness, dimensions,

and maximum lateral deflection of supported glass.3. Seismic Loads: Design and size glazing components to withstand seismic loads and sway

displacement in accordance with the requirements of ASCE 7.4. Provide glass edge support system sufficiently stiff to limit the lateral deflection of

supported glass edges to less than 1/175 of their lengths under specified design load.5. Glass thicknesses listed are minimum.

B. Vapor Retarder and Air Barrier Seals: Provide completed assemblies that maintain continuity ofbuilding enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier.1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections.2. To utilize the inner pane of multiple pane insulating glass units for the continuity of the

vapor retarder and air barrier seal.C. Thermal and Optical Performance: Provide exterior glazing products with performance

properties as indicated. Performance properties are in accordance with manufacturer'spublished data as determined with the following procedures and/or test methods:1. Center of Glass U-Value: Comply with NFRC 100 using Lawrence Berkeley National

Laboratory (LBNL) WINDOW 6.3 computer program.2. Center of Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Comply with NFRC 200 using

Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (LBNL) WINDOW 6.3 computer program.3. Solar Optical Properties: Comply with NFRC 300 test method.

2.02 GLASS MATERIALSA. Float Glass: Provide float glass based glazing unless noted otherwise.

1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Flat, Class 1 - Clear, Quality-Q3.2. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048, Kind HS and FT.


088000 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

2.03 INSULATING GLASS UNITSA. Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated.

1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190.2. Coated Glass: Comply with requirements of ASTM C1376 for pyrolytic (hard-coat) or

magnetic sputter vapor deposition (soft-coat) type coatings on flat glass; coated visionglass, Kind CV; coated overhead glass, Kind CO; or coated spandrel glass, Kind CS.

3. Metal Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners.4. Spacer Color: Black.5. Edge Seal:

a. Dual-Sealed System: Provide polyisobutylene sealant as primary seal appliedbetween spacer and glass panes, and silicone, polysulfide, or polyurethane sealant assecondary seal applied around perimeter.

6. Color: Black.7. Purge interpane space with dry air, hermetically sealed.

B. Insulating Glass Units: Vision glass, double glazed.1. Applications: Exterior glazing unless otherwise indicated.2. Space between lites filled with air.3. Outboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, minimum.

a. Tint: Clear.b. Coating: Low-E (passive type), on #2 surface.

4. Inboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, minimum.a. Tint: Clear.

5. Total Thickness: 1 inch (25.4 mm).6. Thermal Transmittance (U-Value): 0.364, nominal.7. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): 0.23, nominal.

2.04 GLAZING COMPOUNDSA. Type GC-3 - Polysulfide Sealant: Two component; chemical curing, non-sagging type; ASTM

C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; with cured Shore A hardness range of15 to 25; color as selected.

B. Type GC-5 - Silicone Sealant: Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersionwithout loss of properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class25, Uses M, A, and G; with cured Shore A hardness range of 15 to 25; color as selected.

2.05 ACCESSORIESA. Setting Blocks: Silicone, with 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option II.

Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot (25 mm for each square meter) of glazing or minimum 4inch (100 mm) by width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) by height to suitglazing method and pane weight and area.

B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option II. Minimum 3 inch (75 mm) long by one half the height of the glazing stop by thickness to suitapplication, self adhesive on one face.

2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Provide shop inspection and testing for impact resistant glass.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS

A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerances, including those forsize, squareness, and offsets at corners.

B. Verify that the minimum required face and edge clearances are being provided.


088000 - 420181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

C. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that mayimpede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and support framing is ready to receive glazingsystem.

D. Verify that sealing between joints of glass framing members has been completed effectively.E. Proceed with glazing system installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean contact surfaces with appropriate solvent and wipe dry within maximum of 24 hoursbefore glazing. Remove coatings that are not tightly bonded to substrates.

B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant where required for proper sealant adhesion.

3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERALA. Install glazing sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193, GANA (SM), and manufacturer's

instructions.B. Do not exceed edge pressures around perimeter of glass lites as stipulated by glass

manufacturer.C. Set glass lites in proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as indicated.D. Prevent glass from contact with any contaminating substances that may be the result of

construction operations such as, and not limited to the following; weld splatter, fire-safing,plastering, mortar droppings, etc.

3.04 INSTALLATION - WET GLAZING METHOD (SEALANT AND SEALANT)A. Application - Exterior Glazed: Set glazing infills from the exterior of the building.B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points and install glazing pane or unit.C. Install removable stops with glazing centered in space by inserting spacer shims both sides at

24 inch (610 mm) intervals, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) below sight line.D. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with polysulfide type sealant to depth of bite on glazing, but

not more than 3/8 inch (9 mm) below sight line to ensure full contact with glazing and continuethe air and vapor seal.

E. Apply sealant to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth.3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions.

3.06 CLEANINGA. Remove excess glazing materials from finish surfaces immediately after application using

solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers.B. Remove non-permanent labels immediately after glazing installation is complete.C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces after sealants are fully cured.D. Clean glass on both exposed surfaces not more than 4 days prior to Date of Substantial

Completion in accordance with glass manufacturer's written recommendations.3.07 PROTECTION

A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not markheat absorbing or reflective glass units.

B. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period prior to Date ofSubstantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


088000 - 520181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIESFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

092116 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 092116GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES


A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.B. Metal stud wall framing.C. Metal channel ceiling framing.D. Acoustic insulation.E. Cementitious backing board.F. Gypsum wallboard.G. Joint treatment and accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 016116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.B. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.C. Section 093000 - Tiling: Tile backing board.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AISI S100-12 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural

Members; American Iron and Steel Institute; 2012.B. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard Specifications for Interior Installation of

Cementitious Backer Units; 2010 (Reaffirmed 2016).C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2017.D. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing

Gypsum Board; 2015.E. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2014, with

Editorial Revision (2015).F. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light

Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2017.G. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive

Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2017.H. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2017a.I. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel

Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm)in Thickness; 2015.

J. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application ofGypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2016.

K. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories For Gypsum Wallboard and GypsumVeneer Base; 2014a.

L. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2017.M. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of

Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2016.N. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products; 2016.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.


092116 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishingsystem.

C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showingcompliance with requirements.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board installation and

finishing.B. Copies of Documents at Site: Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document

that prescribes execution requirements.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of sizeand properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximumdeflection of wall framing of L/360 at 10 psf (L/360 at 480 Pa).1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs.2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.3. Furring: "Z" shaped sections, minimum depth 1 1/2 inch (29 mm).4. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch (22 mm).

B. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required.C. Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that

accommodate deflection using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, preventingrotation of studs while maintaining structural performance of partition.1. Structural Performance: Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical movement capacity

required by applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI S100-12.2. Material: ASTM A653/A653M steel sheet, SS Grade 50/340, with G60/Z180 hot dipped

galvanized coating.2.03 BOARD MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:1. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com/#sle.2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com/#sle.3. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com/#sle.4. USG Corporation: www.usg.com/#sle.5. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes tominimize joints in place; ends square cut.1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.

a. Mold resistant board is required at all locations.3. Thickness:

a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch (16 mm).b. Ceilings: 5/8 inch (16 mm).

C. Backing Board For Wet Areas: One of the following products:1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including tub and shower surrounds and

shower ceilings.2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness: 3inch (76 mm).


092116 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

B. Acoustic Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex or water-based elastomeric sealant; do not usesolvent-based non-curing butyl sealant.

C. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless noted otherwise.1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance.2. Special Shapes: In addition to conventional corner bead and control joints, provide U-bead

at exposed panel edges.D. Joint Materials: ASTM C475/C475M and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for

project conditions.1. Tape: 2 inch (50 mm) wide, creased paper tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise

indicated.2. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.3. Chemical hardening type compound at all tile backer board.

E. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Cold-Formed Steel Studs Less than 0.033inch (0.84 mm) in Thickness and Wood Members: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping screws,corrosion resistant.

F. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Steel Members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch(0.84 to 2.84 mm) in Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws, corrosion resistant.


A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated.

1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/1200.2. Laterally brace entire suspension system.

C. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center (at 406 mm on center).1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations.2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions.3. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach top runner to structure, maintain clearance

between top of studs and structure, and connect studs to track using specified mechanicaldevices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; verify free movement of top of studconnections; do not leave studs unattached to track.

D. Standard Wall Furring: Install at masonry walls scheduled to receive gypsum board, not morethan 4 inches (100 mm) from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place onalternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches (600 mm) on center.1. Orientation: Horizontal.

E. Blocking: Install wood blocking for support of:1. Framed openings.2. Wall mounted cabinets.3. Plumbing fixtures.4. Toilet accessories.5. Wall mounted door hardware.

3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATIONA. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around

electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framingmembers.


092116 - 420181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

2. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board.3. Seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and rough-in boxes, except where

firestopping is provided.3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt endjoints, especially in highly visible locations.

B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends andedges occurring over firm bearing.

C. Exposed Gypsum Board in Interior Wet Areas: Seal joints, cut edges, and holes withwater-resistant sealant.

D. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members and plywood substrate whereindicated, in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions.

E. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of gypsum board.F. Installation on Wood Framing: For rated assemblies, comply with requirements of listing

authority. For non-rated assemblies, install as follows:1. Single-Layer Applications: Screw attachment.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIESA. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated.

1. Not more than 30 feet (10 meters) apart on walls over 50 feet (16 meters) long.B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.

3.06 JOINT TREATMENTA. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape, bedded with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint

compound and finished with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.B. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:

1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwiseindicated.

2. Level 2: In utility areas, behind cabinetry, and on backing board to receive tile finish.3. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the

completed construction.C. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to

receive finishes.1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

D. Cementitious backing board: Use glass fiber joint tape, bedded and finished with chemicalhardening type joint compound.

3.07 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet

(3 mm in 3 m) in any direction.END OF SECTION

LATHFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

092236 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 092236LATH


A. Metal lath for cement and gypsum plaster.B. Furring for metal lath.C. Metal ceiling framing.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 083100 - Access Doors and Panels: Product requirements for metal access panels

integral with metal lath.B. Section 092400 - Cement Plastering.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C841 - Standard Specification for Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring; 2003

(Reapproved 2013).B. ASTM C847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath; 2014a.C. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel

Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm)in Thickness; 2015.

D. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application ofGypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2016.

E. ASTM C1063 - Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring to Receive Interiorand Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster; 2018a.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on furring and lathing components, structural characteristics,

material limitations, and finish.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Maintain one copy of each installation standard referenced on site throughout the duration oflathing and plastering work.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with at leastthree years of documented experience.


A. Metal Lath and Accessories:2.02 FRAMING AND LATH ASSEMBLIES

A. Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:1. Maximum Deflection of Vertical Assemblies: 1:360 under lateral point load of 100 lbs.2. Maximum Deflection of Horizontal Assemblies: 1:240 deflection under dead loads and

wind uplift.2.03 FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Furring Channels: Formed steel, minimum 0.020 inch thick, 3/8 inch deep by 7/8 inch high,splicing permitted; galvanized.

B. Main Ceiling Channels: Formed steel, asphalt coated, minimum 0.05 inch thick, 3/4 inch deepby 1-1/2 inch high, single piece, no splicing; galvanized.


092236 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

C. Hangers: Steel wire, of size and type to suit application, to support ceiling components in placeto deflection limits as indicated.

D. Ceiling Hangers: Rolled steel sections, of size and type to suit application, to rigidly supportceiling components in place to deflection limits as indicated; galvanized.

E. Lateral Bracing: Formed steel, minimum 0.060 inch thick, size and length as required;galvanized.

2.04 LATHA. Diamond Mesh Metal Lath: ASTM C847, galvanized; self-furring.

1. Weight: To suit application and as specified in ASTM C841 or ASTM C1063 for framingspacing.

2. Backed with treated paper.B. Corner Mesh: Formed sheet steel, minimum 0.018 inch thick, perforated flanges shaped to

permit complete embedding in plaster, minimum 2 inch size; same finish as lath.C. Strip Mesh: Expanded metal lath, same weight as lath, 2 inch wide by 24 inch long; same finish

as lath.D. Beads, Screeds, Joint Accessories, and Other Trim: Depth governed by plaster thickness, and

maximum possible lengths.1. Material: Formed galvanized sheet steel, expanded metal flanges.2. Casing Beads with Weep Holes: Square edges.3. Corner Beads: Radiused corners.4. Base Screeds: Bevelled edges.

2.05 ACCESSORIESA. Access Panels: As specified in Section 083100.B. Anchorage: Tie wire, nails, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to

rigidly secure materials in place, galvanized.C. Fasteners: Self-piercing tapping screws; ASTM C1002 or ASTM C954.D. Tie Wire: Annealed galvanized steel.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that substrates are ready to receive work and conditions are suitable for application.C. Do not begin until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install metal lath and furring for Portland cement plaster in accordance with ASTM C1063.3.03 WALL FURRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wall furring by directly attaching to masonry walls.B. Install furring channels horizontally; secure with fasteners on alternate channel flanges at

maximum 24 inches on center.C. Space furring channels maximum 16 inches on center, and not more than 4 inches away from

floor and ceiling lines.3.04 CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Install furring after work above ceiling or soffit is complete. Coordinate the location of hangerswith other work.

B. Install furring independent of walls, columns, and above-ceiling work.


092236 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

C. Securely anchor hangers to structural members or embed in structural slab. Space hangers asrequired to limit deflection to criteria indicated.

D. Space main carrying channels at maximum 72 inch on center, and not more than 6 inches fromwall surfaces. Lap splice securely.

E. Securely fix carrying channels to hangers to prevent turning or twisting and to transmit full loadto hangers.

F. Install furring channels perpendicular to carrying channels, not more than 2 inches fromperimeter walls, and rigidly secure. Lap splices securely.

G. Reinforce openings in suspension system that interrupt main carrying channels or furringchannels with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24 inches past each opening.

H. Laterally brace suspension system.3.05 CONTROL JOINT INSTALLATION

A. Locate joints as indicated on drawings and comply with ASTM C1063.1. Area of plaster panel not to exceed 144 sq ft for vertical surfaces.2. Area of plaster panel not to exceed 100 sq ft for horizontal, curved or angled surfaces.3. Area bounded by control joints not to exceed a length-to-width ratio of 2-1/2 to 1.

B. Install prefabricated joint accessories in accordance with ASTM C1063.3.06 ACCESS PANELS INSTALLATION

A. Install access panels and rigidly secure in place.B. Install frames plumb and level in opening. Secure rigidly in place.C. Position to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access.

3.07 LATH INSTALLATIONA. Apply lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports.B. Lap or nest ends of metal lath in accordance with ASTM C841.C. Secure end laps with tie wire where they occur between supports.D. Attach metal lath to metal supports using tie wire at maximum 6 inches on center.E. Attach metal lath to concrete using wire loops. Attach anchors to backup surface; space at

maximum 24 inches on center.F. Continuously reinforce internal angles with corner mesh, except where the metal lath returns 3

inches from corner to form the angle reinforcement; fasten at perimeter edges only.G. Place corner bead at external wall corners; fasten at outer edges of lath only.H. Place base screeds at termination of plaster areas; secure rigidly in place.I. Place 4 inch wide strips of lath centered over junctions of dissimilar backing materials, and

secure rigidly in place.J. Place lath vertically above each top corner and each side of door frames to 6 inches above

ceiling line.K. Place casing beads at terminations of plaster finish. Butt and align ends. Secure rigidly in

place.L. Place additional strip mesh diagonally at corners of lathed openings. Secure rigidly in place.

3.08 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation from True Lines and Levels: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.B. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/8 inch.

END OF SECTION

CEMENT PLASTERINGFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

092400 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 092400CEMENT PLASTERING


A. Cement plastering.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 083100 - Access Doors and Panels: Access panels.B. Section 092236 - Lath: Lath, furring, beads, screeds, and joint accessories for plaster base.C. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C91/C91M - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2012.B. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2018.C. ASTM C206 - Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime; 2014.D. ASTM C897 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Job-Mixed Portland Cement-Based

Plasters; 2015.E. ASTM C926 - Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster; 2018a.F. ASTM C932 - Standard Specification for Surface-Applied Bonding Compounds for Exterior

Plastering; 2006 (Reapproved 2013).G. ASTM C1328/C1328M - Standard Specification for Plastic (Stucco) Cement; 2012.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on plaster materials and trim accessories.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum three years documented experience.B. Copies of Documents at Project Site: Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced

document that prescribes execution requirements.1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Interior Plaster Work: Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F duringinstallation of plaster and until fully cured.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CEMENT PLASTER APPLICATIONS

A. Lath Plaster Base: Metal lath.1. Plaster Type: Jobsite mixed plaster.2. Number of Coats: four.3. First Coat: Apply to a nominal thickness of 3/8 inch.4. Second Coat: Apply to a nominal thickness of 3/8 inch.5. Leveling Coat: Apply to a nominal thickness of 1/32 to 1/16 inch.6. Finish Coat: Apply to a nominal thickness of 1/8 inch.

a. Texture: match existing adjacent plaster finish.B. Solid Plaster Base: Concrete masonry.

1. Plaster Type: Jobsite mixed plaster.2. Number of Coats: four.3. First Coat: Apply to a nominal thickness of 1/4 inch.4. Second Coat: Apply to a nominal thickness of 1/4 inch.5. Leveling Coat: Apply to a nominal thickness of 1/32 to 1/16 inch.


092400 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

6. Finish Coat: Apply to a nominal thickness of 1/8 inch.a. Texture: match existing adjacent plaster finish.

2.02 JOBSITE MIXED CEMENT PLASTERA. Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I.a. Finish Coat: White color.

2. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91/C91M, Type N.3. Plastic Cement: ASTM C1328/C1328M.4. Lime: ASTM C206, Type S.5. Sand: Clean, well graded, and complying with ASTM C897.6. Water: Clean, fresh, potable, and free of mineral or organic matter that could adversely

affect plaster.7. Plaster Mix Reinforcement: Glass fibers, chopped to 1/2 inch nominal length, and alkali

resistant.8. Color Pigment: Synthetic type, match existing adjacent plaster finish color.

B. Plaster Mixes: Proportioned in accordance with ASTM C926; parts by volume.1. First Coat Over Lath:

a. Minimum 2-1/2 parts and maximum 4 parts sand, per total volume of cementitiousmaterials.

b. Provide fiber reinforcement at 1-1/2 lbs per sack of cement.2. First Coat Over High Absorption Solid Base:


b. Fiber reinforcement at 1-1/2 lbs per sack of cement.3. Second Coat: Same mixture as first coat, without fiber reinforcement, except minimum 3

parts and maximum 5 parts sand.4. Leveling Coat: Same Mixture as Finish Coat5. Finish Coat:


2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Lath: As specified in Section 092236.B. Bonding Compound: Provide type recommended for bonding plaster to solid surfaces,

complying with ASTM C932.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions are acceptable prior to starting this work.B. Verify masonry joints are flush and surfaces are ready to receive work of this section, and that

there are no existing bituminous or water repellent coatings on masonry surfaces.C. Verify concrete surfaces are flat, honeycombs are filled flush, and surfaces are ready to receive

work of this section, and that there are no existing bituminous, water repellent, or form releaseagent coatings on concrete surfaces that may be detrimental to plaster bond.

D. Verify lath is flat, secured to substrate, and joint and surface perimeter accessories are properlyin place.

E. Verify mechanical and electrical equipment and services located within areas to receive thiswork have been properly tested and approved.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Dampen masonry surfaces to reduce excessive suction.B. Clean concrete surfaces of foreign matter using approved acid solutions, solvents, or

detergents, and then rinse surfaces thoroughly with clean water.


092400 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

C. Roughen smooth concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound in accordance withmanufacturer's written installation instructions.

3.03 MIXINGA. Mix only as much plaster as can be used prior to initial set.B. Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water.C. Do not retemper mixes after initial set has occurred.D. Protect mixtures from frost or freezing temperatures, contamination, and excessive evaporation.

3.04 APPLICATIONA. Apply plaster in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and comply with ASTM

C926.B. Base Coats:

1. Apply base coat(s) to fully embed lath and to specified thickness.2. Follow guidelines in ASTM C926 and manufacturer's written installation instructions for

moist curing base coats and application of subsequent coats.C. Leveling Coat:

1. Apply leveling coat to specified thickness.D. Finish Coats:

1. Cement Plaster:a. Apply with sufficient material and pressure to ensure complete coverage of base to

specified thickness.b. Apply desired surface texture while mix is still workable.c. Float to a consistent finish.

3.05 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8" inch in 10 feet.

3.06 REPAIRA. Patching: Remove loose, damaged or defective plaster and replace with plaster of same

composition; finish to match surrounding area.END OF SECTION

TILINGFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

093000 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 093000TILING


A. Tile for floor applications.B. Tile for wall applications.C. Tile for shower receptors.D. Cementitious backer board as tile substrate.E. Ceramic trim.F. Non-ceramic trim.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 079200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between tile work and adjacent construction and

fixtures.B. Section 224000 - Plumbing Fixtures: Shower receptor.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI A108/A118/A136 - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of

Ceramic Tile (Compendium); 2017.B. ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the

Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2014.C. ANSI A108.1b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a

Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999(Reaffirmed 2010).

D. ANSI A108.1c - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in theWet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a CuredPortland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

E. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withOrganic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2009 (Revised).

F. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withDry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

G. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withChemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 1999 (Reaffirmed2010).

H. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withChemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

I. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withModified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

J. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework;1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

K. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard Specifications for Interior Installation ofCementitious Backer Units; 2010 (Reaffirmed 2016).

L. ANSI A108.12 - American National Standard for Installation of Ceramic Tile with EGP (ExteriorGlue Plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

M. ANSI A108.13 - American National Standard for Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded,Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone; 2005 (Reaffirmed2010).

N. ANSI A118.7 - American National Standard Specifications for High Performance CementGrouts for Tile Installation; 2010 (Reaffirmed 2016).


093000 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

O. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specificationsfor Cementitious Backer Units; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2016).

P. ANSI A118.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Load Bearing, Bonded,Waterproof Membranes For Thin-Set Ceramic Tile And Dimension Stone Installation; 2014.

Q. ANSI A118.15 - American National Standard Specifications for Improved Modified Dry-SetCement Mortar; 2012.

R. ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile; 2012.S. ASTM C373 - Standard Test Methods for Determination of Water Absorption and Associated

Properties by Vacuum Method for Pressed Ceramic Tiles and Glass Tiles and Boil Method forExtruded Ceramic Tiles and Non-tile Fired Ceramic Whiteware Products; 2017.

T. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;2017.

U. ASTM F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of ConcreteSubfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride; 2016a.

V. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2017.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work ofthis section; require attendance by all affected installers.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories.

Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions

with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, andsetting details.

D. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 by 18 inches (457 by457 mm) in size illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.F. Master Grade Certificate: Submit for each type of tile, signed by the tile manufacturer and tile

installer.G. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, and stain

removal methods.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Maintain one copy of and ANSI A108/A118/A136 and TCNA (HB) on site.B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products

specified in this section.C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation.

1.07 MOCK-UPA. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1.09 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) during installation

of mortar materials.


093000 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 TILE

A. Manufacturers: B. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: ANSI A137.1, standard grade.

1. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent as tested in accordance with ASTM C373.2. Edges: Square.3. Surface Finish: Unglazed.4. Color(s): To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full custom range.5. Trim Units: Matching bead, cove, and surface bullnose shapes in sizes coordinated with

field tile.C. Glazed Wall Tile: ANSI A137.1, standard grade.

1. Moisture Absorption: 7.0 to 20.0 percent as tested in accordance with ASTM C373.2. Surface Finish: High gloss.3. Color(s): To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full custom range.4. Trim Units: Matching bead, bullnose, cove, and base shapes in sizes coordinated with

field tile.D. Quarry Tile: ANSI A137.1, standard grade.

1. Moisture Absorption: 0.5 to 3.0 percent as tested in accordance with ASTM C373.2. Edges: Square.3. Surface Finish: Unglazed.4. Color(s): To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full custom range.5. Trim Units: Matching bullnose, cove, cove base, and window sill or step nosing shapes in

sizes coordinated with field tile.E. Porcelain Tile: ANSI A137.1, standard grade.

1. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent as tested in accordance with ASTM C373.2. Edges: Square.3. Surface Finish: Unglazed.4. Color(s): To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full custom range.5. Trim Units: Matching bullnose, double bullnose, cove base, and cove shapes in sizes

coordinated with field tile.2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Ceramic Trim: Matching bullnose, double bullnose, cove base, and cove ceramic shapes insizes coordinated with field tile.1. Applications:

a. Open Edges: Bullnose.b. Inside Corners: Coved.c. Floor to Wall Joints: Cove base.

2. Manufacturers: Same as for tile.B. Non-Ceramic Trim: Satin brass anodized extruded aluminum, style and dimensions to suit

application, for setting using tile mortar or adhesive.1. Applications:

a. Transition between floor finishes of different heights.b. Thresholds at door openings.c. Borders and other trim as indicated on drawings.

2. Manufacturers:a. Basis of Design: Schluter-Systems: www.schluter.com/#sle.

2.03 SETTING MATERIALSA. Improved Latex-Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.15.

1. Applications: Use this type of bond coat where indicated and where no other type of bondcoat is indicated.

2. Products:


093000 - 420181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; S 28: www.ardexamericas.com/#sle.b. Custom Building Products; Complete Contact-LFT Premium Rapid Setting Large

Format Tile Mortar, with Multi-Surface Bonding Primer: www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle.

c. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE 254 Platinum: www.laticrete.com/#sle.d. TEC, an H.B. Fuller Construction Products Brand; TEC 3N1 Performance Mortar:

www.tecspecialty.com/#sle.e. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.04 GROUTSA. Manufacturers:

1. ARDEX Engineered Cements: www.ardexamericas.com/#sle.2. Basis of Design: LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE PERMACOLOR Grout:

www.laticrete.com/#sle.3. TEC, an H.B. Fuller Construction Products Brand: www.tecspecialty.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. High Performance Polymer Modified Grout: ANSI A118.7 polymer modified cement grout.1. Applications: Use this type of grout where indicated and where no other type of grout is

indicated.2. Use sanded grout for joints 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) wide and larger; use unsanded grout for

joints less than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) wide.3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.

2.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS2.06 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Waterproofing Membrane at Showers and Tiled Tubs: Specifically designed for bonding tocementitious substrate under thick mortar bed or thin-set tile; complying with ANSI A118.10.1. Mortar Bonded Sheet Type:

a. Material: Formed Polyethylene membrane with anchoring fleece laminated to theunderside.

b. Products:1) Basis of Design: DITRA uncoupling and waterproofing membrane; Schluter

Systems: www.schluter.com..2) Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Backer Board: Cementitious type complying with ANSI A118.9; high density, glass fiberreinforced, 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick; 2 inch (51 mm) wide coated glass fiber tape for joints andcorners.

C. Mesh Tape: 2 inch (50 mm) wide self-adhesive fiberglass mesh tape.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type ofwork and are ready to receive tile.

B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.

C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding ofsetting materials to sub-floor surfaces.

D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moistureemission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within the following limits:1. Moisture Emission Rate: Not greater than 3 lb per 1000 sq ft (7.1 kg per 100 sq m) per 24

hours, test in accordance with ASTM F1869.2. Alkalinity (pH): Verify pH range of 5 to 9, test in accordance with ASTM F710.

E. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.


093000 - 520181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Protect surrounding work from damage.B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable

flatness tolerances.D. Install backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions.

Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of setting material to a feather edge.3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install tile and thresholds and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSIA108.1a through ANSI A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA (HB)recommendations.

B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases

neatly. Align floor joints.D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout

joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout.E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.F. Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.G. Install thresholds where indicated.H. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.I. Keep control and expansion joints free of mortar, grout, and adhesive.J. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours.K. Grout tile joints unless otherwise indicated. L. At changes in plane and tile-to-tile control joints, use tile sealant instead of grout, with either

bond breaker tape or backer rod as appropriate to prevent three-sided bonding.3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODS

A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F113, improvedlatex-portland cement mortar bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated.1. Use uncoupling membrane under all tile unless other underlayment is indicated.2. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated, install in accordance with TCNA (HB)

Method F122 with improved latex-modified portland cement mortar bond coat.B. Install tile-to-tile floor movement joints in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method EJ171F.

3.05 INSTALLATION - SHOWERS AND BATHTUB WALLSA. At tiled shower receptors install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method B415, mortar bed floor,

and W244, thin-set over cementitious backer unit walls.B. Grout with high performance latex modified grout.

3.06 INSTALLATION - WALL TILEA. Over cementitious backer units on studs, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W244,

using membrane at toilet rooms and locker rooms.3.07 CLEANING

A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.3.08 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.END OF SECTION

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI%20A108/A118/A136

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGSFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

095100 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 095100ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS


A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system.B. Acoustical units.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 016116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C635/C635M - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of

Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2017.B. ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels; 2013.C. ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions; 2017.D. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2014.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed,

sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work iscompleted, tested, and approved.

B. Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components.C. Samples for verification: Submit two full size samples illustrating material and finish of

acoustical units.D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the

products specified.B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the

products specified.1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F (16 degrees C), and maximumhumidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS

A. Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A.1. VOC Content: As specified in Section 016116.

B. Acoustical Panels: Painted mineral fiber, ASTM E1264 Type III, with the followingcharacteristics:1. Size: 24 by 24 inches (600 by 600 mm).2. Thickness: 3/4 inches (19 mm).3. Composition: Match Existing.4. Edge: Square.


095100 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

5. Surface Color: Match Existing.6. Surface Pattern: Match Existing.7. Suspension System: Exposed grid.

2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S)A. Metal Suspension Systems - General: Complying with ASTM C635/C635M; die cut and

interlocking components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold downclips as required.

B. Exposed Steel Suspension System: Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled; heavy-duty.1. Profile: Match Existing; 15/16 inch (24 mm) wide face.2. Construction: Double web.3. Finish: Match Existing.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic

requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified.B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid.

1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face ofgrid.

C. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.

3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEMA. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M, ASTM E580/E580M, and

manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section.B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum

deflection of 1:360.C. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other

work.D. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where

carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.E. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest

affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.F. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load

to exceed deflection capability.G. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches (150 mm) of each

corner, or support components independently.H. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.I. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with

other interruptions.1. Use longest practical lengths.2. Overlap and rivet corners.

3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITSA. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to

appearance and function.C. Lay directional patterned units Match Existing.


095100 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

D. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.E. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.F. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.G. Cutting Acoustical Units:

1. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim.2. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.

H. Where round obstructions occur, provide preformed closures to match perimeter molding.I. Install hold-down clips on panels within 20 ft (6 m) of an exterior door.

3.04 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m).B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.

END OF SECTION

RESILIENT FLOORINGFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

096500 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 096500RESILIENT FLOORING


A. Resilient tile flooring.B. Resilient base.C. Installation accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 016116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using

a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2017.B. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;

2017.C. ASTM F1066 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile; 2004, with Editorial

Revision (2014).D. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2016.E. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using

a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2015.F. RFCI (RWP) - Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings; 2011.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance

characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.C. Verification Samples: Submit two samples, 4 by 4 inch (100 by 100 mm) in size illustrating color

and pattern for each resilient flooring product specified.D. Concrete Testing Standard: Submit a copy of ASTM F710.E. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,

and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified flooring.B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing specified flooring.C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing concrete slab

moisture testing and inspections of the type specified in this section.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Upon receipt, immediately remove any shrink-wrap and check materials for damage and thecorrect style, color, quantity and run numbers.

B. Store all materials off of the floor in an acclimatized, weather-tight space.C. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F (13 degrees C) and 90 degrees F

(72 degrees C).D. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end.E. Do not double stack pallets.


096500 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a

temperature of 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter,maintain conditions above 55 degrees F (13 degrees C).

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 TILE FLOORING

A. Vinyl Composition Tile: Homogeneous, with color extending throughout thickness.1. Manufacturers:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com/#sle.b. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company: www.johnsonite.com/#sle.c. Mannington Mills, Inc: www.mannington.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1066, of Class corresponding to typespecified.

3. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested inaccordance with ASTM E648 or NFPA 253.

4. Size: Match Existing.5. Thickness: Match Existing.6. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).7. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full custom range.

2.02 RESILIENT BASEA. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove.

1. Manufacturers:a. Burke Flooring: www.burkeflooring.com/#sle.b. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company: www.johnsonite.com/#sle.c. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2. Height: 4 inch (100 mm).3. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).4. Finish: Satin.5. Length: Roll.6. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full custom range.7. Accessories: Premolded external corners and internal corners.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer.

1. VOC Content Limits: As specified in Section 016116.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks thatmight telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners,and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate.

B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.

C. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilientflooring installation by testing for moisture and pH.1. Test in accordance with ASTM F710.2. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring

manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.


096500 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Remove existing resilient flooring and flooring adhesives; follow the recommendations of RFCI

(RWP).B. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers.C. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other

defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface.D. Prohibit traffic until filler is fully cured.E. Clean substrate.F. Apply primer as required to prevent "bleed-through" or interference with adhesion by substances

that cannot be removed. 3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.D. Fit joints and butt seams tightly.E. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.F. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate

flooring under centerline of door.G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where

indicated.H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce

tight joints.I. Install flooring in recessed floor access covers, maintaining floor pattern.

3.04 INSTALLATION - TILE FLOORINGA. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless

otherwise indicated in manufacturer's installation instructions.B. Match existing floor pattern and direction.

3.05 INSTALLATION - RESILIENT BASEA. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 36 inches (900 mm)

between joints.B. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.C. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.

3.06 CLEANINGA. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

3.07 PROTECTIONA. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.

END OF SECTION

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

http://www.rfci.com

PAINTING AND COATINGFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

099000 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 099000PAINTING AND COATING


A. Surface preparation.B. Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings.C. Materials for backpriming woodwork.D. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and

unless otherwise indicated, including the following:1. Prior to installation both sides and edges of plywood electrical and telecom backboards.

Finish paint backboards prior to installation of electrical and telecom equipment.2. Exposed surfaces of steel lintels and ledge angles.

E. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having

factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of

equipment.5. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne, and lead items.6. Floors, unless specifically so indicated.7. Brick, CMU, architectural concrete, cast stone, integrally colored plaster and stucco.8. Glass.9. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.

1.02 DEFINITIONSA. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for

Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.B. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications;

2016.C. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and

Wood-Based Materials; 2016.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for

each:1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category

(e.g. "alkyd enamel").2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47).3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of

each system.4. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

C. Samples: Submit three paper "draw down" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches (216 by 279 mm) insize, illustrating range of colors available for each finishing product specified.1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen.2. Where sheen is not specified, discuss sheen options with Architect before preparing

samples, to eliminate sheens definitely not required.3. Allow 30 days for approval process, after receipt of complete samples by Architect.


099000 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

4. Paint color submittals will not be considered until color submittals for major materials not tobe painted, such as masonry, have been approved.

D. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified.E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified.B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified

approved by manufacturer.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand

code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, andinstructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and amaximum of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer'sinstructions.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature

ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of

substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the

humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) for interiors;

50 degrees F (10 degrees C) for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer'sinstructions.

E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F (18 degrees C) forinterior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

F. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles (860 lx) measured mid-height at substrate surface.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the samemanufacturer; no exceptions.

B. Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extentpossible.1. In the event that a single manufacturer cannot provide all specified products, minor

exceptions will be permitted provided approval by Architect is obtained using the specifiedprocedures for substitutions.

C. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL

A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and

uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties,and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated underconditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testingand field experience.


099000 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

3. For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one-halfshade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color.

4. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from asingle production run.

5. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedureis specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.

B. Primers: As follows unless other primer is required or recommended by manufacturer of topcoats; where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primercategorized as "best" by the manufacturer.

C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the

following:a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for

Architectural Coatings.b. Architectural coatings VOC limits of the State in which the Project is located.

2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water addedat project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited:1. Intentionally added methylene chloride or perchloroethylene.2. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds

(hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).3. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di

(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene,diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium,isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylenechloride, naphthalene, toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane, vinyl chloride.

E. Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics.F. Sheens: Provide the sheens specified; where sheen is not specified, sheen will be selected

later by Architect from the manufacturer's full line.G. Colors: As indicated on drawings

1. Allow for minimum of three colors for each system, unless otherwise indicated, withoutadditional cost to Owner.

2. Extend colors to surface edges; colors may change at any edge as directed by Architect.2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR

A. Paint WE-OP-3A - Wood, Opaque, Alkyd, 3 Coat:1. One coat of alkyd primer sealer.2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.

B. Paint WE-OP-3L - Wood, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat:1. One coat of latex primer sealer.2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.

C. Paint ME-OP-3A - Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Alkyd, 3 Coat:1. One coat of alkyd primer.2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.

D. Paint MgE-OP-3A - Galvanized Metals, Alkyd, 3 Coat:1. One coat galvanize primer.2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.

2.04 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIORA. Paint I-OP - All Interior Surfaces Indicated to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated:

Including gypsum board, uncoated steel, shop primed steel, and galvanized steel.1. Two top coats and one coat primer.

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov


099000 - 420181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

2. Top Coat(s): High Performance Architectural Interior Latex; MPI #138-141.3. Velvet: MPI gloss level 2; use this sheen at all locations unless indicated otherwise.4. Semi-Gloss: MPI gloss level 5; use this sheen at interior exposed metal or unfinished

wood.5. Primer(s): As recommended by manufacturer of top coats.

2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALSA. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding

materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specificallyindicated or not; commercial quality.

B. Patching Material: Latex filler.C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.


A. Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared.B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any

condition that may potentially affect proper application.D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.E. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.F. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes

unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.2. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.3. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions.C. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects.D. Remove, retain, label, and protect surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware,

light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.1. Label items so they may be re-installed in the same location from which removed after

final coat has thoroughly cured.E. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.F. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate

and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.G. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime

defects after repair.H. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with

solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.I. Corroded Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Prepare using at least SSPC-SP 2 (hand tool

cleaning) or SSPC-SP 3 (power tool cleaning) followed by SSPC-SP 1 (solvent cleaning).J. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld

splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand or powertool wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment ofphosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paintentire surface; spot prime after repairs.

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov


099000 - 520181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

K. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primerand rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces withsolvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.

L. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Sealknots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer hasdried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.

M. Exterior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calkingcompound after prime coat has been applied. Back prime concealed surfaces beforeinstallation.

3.03 APPLICATIONA. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical

components and paint separately.B. Exterior Wood to Receive Opaque Finish: If final painting must be delayed more than 2 weeks

after installation of woodwork, apply primer within 2 weeks and final coating within 4 weeks.C. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.D. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is

applied.E. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.F. Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as many

coats as necessary for complete hide.G. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.H. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior

to applying next coat.I. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed

prior to finishing after final coat has thoroughly cured in accordance with manufacturer's writtenrequirements.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection.

3.05 CLEANINGA. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and

remove daily from site.3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect finished coatings until completion of project.B. Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

SIGNAGEFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

101400 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 101400SIGNAGE


A. Room and door signs.1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings andFacilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines; current edition.

B. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.C. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2009.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign

styles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign.C. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication,

including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, andcolors.1. Owner will designate final room numbers in a timely manner during the construction phase.

Provide a floor plan indicating signage locations as part of the signage schedulesubmission.

2. When content of signs is indicated to be determined later, request such information fromOwner through Architect at least 2 months prior to start of fabrication; upon request,submit preliminary schedule.

3. Submit for approval by Owner through Architect prior to fabrication.D. Samples: Submit two samples of each type of sign, of size similar to that required for project,

illustrating sign style, font, and method of attachment.E. Selection Samples: Where colors are not specified, submit two sets of color selection charts or

chips.F. Verification Samples: Submit samples showing colors specified.G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation templates and attachment devices.H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. Curved Sign Media Suction Cups: One for each 100 signs; for removing media.1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified inthis section with minimum three years of documented experience.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation.B. Package room and door signs in sequential order of installation, labeled by floor or building.C. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS

A. Accessibility Compliance: Signs are required to comply with ADA Standards and ICC A117.1and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflictingrequirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements.

B. Room and Door Signs: Provide a sign for every doorway, whether it has a door or not, notincluding corridors, lobbies, and similar open areas.

SIGNAGEFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

101400 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

1. Sign Type: Curved signs with engraved panel media as specified.2. Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch and Grade II braille.3. Character Height: 1 inch.4. Sign Height: 2 inches, unless otherwise indicated.5. Office Doors: Identify with room numbers to be determined later, not the numbers

indicated on drawings; in addition, provide "window" section for replaceable occupantname.

6. Conference and Meeting Rooms: Identify with room numbers to be determined later, notthe numbers indicated on drawings; in addition, provide "window" section with sliding "InUse/Vacant" indicator.

7. Service Rooms: Identify with room names and numbers to be determined later, not thoseindicated on drawings.

8. Rest Rooms: Identify with pictograms, the names "MEN" and "WOMEN", room numbersto be determined later, and braille.

9. Roof Access: Identidy roof access room. May be combined with the room sign.2.02 SIGN TYPES

A. Radius / Curved Signs: One-piece, curved extruded aluminum media holder securing flat,flexible sign media by curved lip on two sides; other two sides closed by end caps; concealedmounting attachment.1. Sizes: As indicated on drawings.2. Finish: Natural (clear) anodized.3. Sign Orientation: Curved in horizontal section.4. End Caps: Aluminum with finish matching frame and stainless steel screw attachment.5. Clear Cover: For customer produced sign media, provide clear cover of polycarbonate

plastic, glossy on back, non-glare on front. Provide where "windows" are required persection 2.01.

6. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Mechanical anchorage, with predrilled holes, and setin clear silicone sealant.

B. Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated:1. Character Font: Helvetica, Arial, or other sans serif font.2. Character Case: Upper case only.3. Background Color: Clear.4. Character Color: Contrasting color.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Concealed Screws: Stainless steel, galvanized steel, chrome plated, or other non-corroding

metal.B. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive.


A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level.C. Locate signs where indicated:

1. Room and Door Signs: Locate on wall at latch side of door with centerline of sign at 60inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated by ADA.

2. If no location is indicated obtain Owner's instructions.D. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damaged items.

END OF SECTION

PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTSFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

102113.19 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 102113.19PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS


A. Urinal and vestibule screens.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 051200 - Structural Steel Framing: Concealed steel support members.B. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking and supports.C. Section 102800 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination: Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors in walls andceilings.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall supports,

door swings.C. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories.D. Samples: Submit two samples of partition panels, ____by____ inch (____by____ mm) in size

illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen.E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.


A. Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments:1. Basis of Design: Scranton Products (Santana/Comtec/Capital):

www.scrantonproducts.com.2. Ampco Products, Inc; ______: www.ampco.com/#sle.3. Metpar Corp; _____: www.metpar.com/#sle.4. Partition Systems International of South Carolina; PolyLife HDPE Toilet Partitions:

www.psisc.com/#sle.2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Pilaster Shoes: Stainless steel, satin finish, 3 inches (76 mm) high; concealing floor fastenings.1. Provide ceiling attachment using two adjustable hanging studs, attached to above-ceiling

framing.B. Pilaster Brackets: Polished stainless steel.C. Wall Brackets: Continuous type, polished stainless steel.D. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamper proof type.

1. For attaching panels and pilasters to brackets: Through-bolts and nuts; tamper proof.E. Hardware: Polished stainless steel:

1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two per door.2. Nylon bearings.3. Door Latch: Slide type with exterior emergency access feature.4. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door

latch.5. Provide door pull for outswinging doors.

PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTSFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

102113.19 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019


A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.B. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures.C. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Maintain 3/8 inch to 1/2 inch (9 mm to 13 mm) space between wall and panels and between

wall and end pilasters.C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices.D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. E. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or

scratched materials with new materials.3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm).B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch (3 mm).

3.04 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16

inch (5 mm).B. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out-swinging

doors to closed position.C. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane.

END OF SECTION

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIESFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

102800 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 102800TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES


A. Commercial toilet accessories.B. Commercial shower and bath accessories.C. Accessories for toilet rooms and showers.D. Electrically operated paper towel dispensers.E. Electric hand/hair dryers.F. Grab bars.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings andFacilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design).

B. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.C. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products; 2017.D. ASTM A269/A269M - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless

Steel Tubing for General Service; 2015a.E. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2017.F. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel

Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.G. ASTM B456 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus

Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium; 2017.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement, concealed ceilingsupports, and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Submit data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, and

attachment methods.C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring

special attention.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Commercial Toilet, Shower, and Bath Accessories:1. American Specialties, Inc: www.americanspecialties.com/#sle.2. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com/#sle.3. Bobrick.

B. Electric Hand/Hair Dryers:1. American Dryer, Inc: www.americandryer.com/#sle.2. Excel Dryer: www.exceldryer.com/#sle.3. World Dryer Corporation: www.worlddryer.com/#sle.

C. Provide products of each category type by single manufacturer.


102800 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

D. Shower Head and Controls, and Robe Hook to be from the same manufacturer.2.02 MATERIALS

A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged completewith anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.1. Grind welded joints smooth.2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces.

B. Keys: Provide 2 keys for each accessory to Owner; master key all lockable accessories.C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304.D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269/A269M, Grade TP304 or TP316.E. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with

G90/Z275 coating.F. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized; tamper-proof; security type.G. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for

component and substrate.2.03 FINISHES

A. Stainless Steel: Satin finish, unless otherwise noted.B. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, SC 2, polished finish, unless otherwise noted.C. Baked Enamel: Pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats

epoxy baked enamel.D. Galvanizing for Items Other than Sheet: Comply with ASTM A123/A123M; galvanize ferrous

metal and fastening devices.E. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake.F. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.

2.04 COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIESA. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Single roll, surface mounted bracket type, stainless steel, spindleless

type for tension spring delivery designed to prevent theft of tissue roll.1. Product: 5402 manufactured by Bradley.

B. Paper Towel Dispenser: Electric, roll paper type.1. Cover: Satin Stainless steel.2. Paper Discharge: Touchless automatic.3. Capacity: 8 inch diameter roll. 4. Mounting: Semi recessed.5. Power: AC power adapter -provide wired electrical connection.6. Refill Indicator: Illuminated refill indicator.7. Products:

a. Product: B-29744 manufactured by Bobrick..C. Electric Hand Dryers: Traditional fan-in-case type, with downward nozzle.

1. Operation: Automatic, sensor-operated on and off.2. Style: Traditional horizontal, rectangular case, fixed nozzle.3. Mounting: Semi-recessed.4. Cover: Stainless steel with brushed finish.

a. Tamper-resistant screw attachment of cover to mounting plate.5. Air Velocity: 18,000 linear feet per minute (91 m/s), minimum, at full power.6. Heater: 970 W, minimum, at full power.7. Total Wattage: 1400 W, maximum.8. Runtime: Field adjustable or automatic, up to 35 seconds.9. Warranty: 3 years.10. Basis of Design Product:


102800 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

a. Excel Dryer Inc.; XLERATOR: www.exceldryer.com.b. Substitutions: Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

11. Semi-Recess Kit:a. Products:

1) Excel Dryer Inc; XLERATOR ADA Compliant Recess Kit: www.exceldryer.com.2) Substitutions: Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

D. Waste Receptacle: Recessed, stainless steel, continuously welded bottom pan and seamlessexposed flanges.1. Liner: Removable seamless stainless steel receptacle.2. Minimum capacity: 12 gallons (45 liters).3. Basis of Design Product: 346 manufactured by Bradley Corporation.

E. Soap Dispenser: Liquid soap dispenser, deck-mounted on vanity, with polyethylene containerconcealed below deck; piston and 4 inch (100 mm) spout of stainless steel with bright polishedfinish; chrome-plated deck escutcheon.1. Minimum Capacity: 16 ounces (0.5 liter).2. Product: 6324-67 manufactured by Bradley Corporation.

F. Seat Cover Dispenser: Stainless steel, surface-mounted, reloading by concealed opening atbase, tumbler lock.1. Minimum capacity: 250 seat covers.2. Product: 5847 manufactured by Bradley Corporation.

G. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, smooth surface.1. Heavy Duty Grab Bars: Floor supports are acceptable if necessary to achieve load rating.

a. Push/Pull Point Load: Minimum 1000 pound-force (4448.2 N), minimum.b. Dimensions: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) outside diameter, minimum 0.125 inch (3.17 mm)

wall thickness, exposed flange mounting, 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) clearance between walland inside of grab bar.

c. Length and Configuration: As indicated on drawings.d. Products:

1) 812 manufactured by Bradley Corporation.2) Substitutions: Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

H. Combination Sanitary Napkin/Tampon Dispenser: Stainless steel, surface-mounted.1. Door: Seamless 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) door with returned edges, full length piano hinge,

and tumbler lock.2. Cabinet: Fully welded, 0.036 inch (0.91 mm) thick sheet.3. Operation: 25 cent coin required to operate dispenser. Provide locked coin box,

separately keyed.4. Minimum capacity: 30 napkins and 28 tampons.5. Product: 4017 manufactured by Bradley Corporation.

I. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit: Stainless steel, surface-mounted, self-closing door, lockingbottom panel with full-length stainless steel piano-type hinge, removable receptacle.1. Product: 4781-15 manufactured by Bradley Corporation.

2.05 COMMERCIAL SHOWER AND BATH ACCESSORIESA. Shower Curtain Rod: Stainless steel tube, 1 inch (25 mm) outside diameter, 0.04 inch (1.0 mm)

wall thickness, satin-finished, with 3 inch (75 mm) outside diameter, minimum 0.04 inch (1.0mm) thick satin-finished stainless steel flanges, for installation with exposed fasteners.1. Product: 207 manufactured by Bobrick.

B. Shower Curtain: 1. Material: Opaque vinyl, 0.008 inch (0.2 mm) thick, matte finish, with antibacterial

treatment, flameproof and stain-resistant.2. Size: 48 by 72 inches (1219 by 1830 mm), at standard shower stalls and 72 by 72 inches

(1830 by 1830 mm) at ADA shower stalls, hemmed edges.


102800 - 420181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

3. Grommets: Corrosion-resistant metal; pierced through top hem on 6 inch (150 mm)centers.

4. Color: White.5. Shower Curtain Hooks: Chrome-plated or stainless steel spring wire designed for snap

closure.C. Folding Shower Seat: Wall-mounted surface; welded tubular seat frame, structural support

members, swing-down legs, hinges, and mechanical fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel,L-shaped, right hand seat.1. Seat: Phenolic or polymeric composite one-piece seat or seat slats, of white color.2. Size: ADA Standards compliant.3. Product: 9027 manufactured by Bradley Corporation.

D. Wall-Mounted Soap Dish: Heavy duty, seamless stainless steel, surface-mounted with drainholes, without grab bar, satin finish; with concealed mechanical fastening suitable for substrateand backplate.1. Product: 47100-ST manufactured by Delta.

E. Robe Hook: Heavy-duty stainless steel, single-prong, circular-shaped bracket and backplate forconcealed attachment, satin finish.1. Product: 77135-SS - Compel Series manufactured by Delta.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.C. For electrically-operated accessories, verify that electrical power connections are ready and in

the correct locations.D. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions in locations indicated on

drawings.B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.C. Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations, unless otherwise indicated.

3.04 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed accessories from damage due to subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION

COUNTERTOPSFire Station 8 Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Road, Richmond, Virginia 23231

123600 - 120181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

SECTION 123600COUNTERTOPS


A. Countertops for architectural cabinet work.B. Wall-hung counters and vanity tops.C. Prefabricated shower surround panels with rabbetted vertical corner joints.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 064100 - Architectural Wood Casework.B. Section 224000 - Plumbing Fixtures: Sinks.


2016, with Errata (2017).C. ISFA 3-01 - Classification and Standards for Quartz Surfacing Material; 2013.D. MIA (DSDM) - Dimensional Stone Design Manual, Version VIII; 2016.E. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005.F. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.3. Specimen warranty.

C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation; combine with shop drawings ofcabinets and casework specified in other sections.

D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer'sfull range of available colors and patterns.

E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm)square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.

F. Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements.G. Certificate: Submit labels and certificates required by quality assurance and quality control

programs.H. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.I. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and

repair of countertop surfaces.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in thissection.

B. Quality Certification:1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the installed work complies with

AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements for grade or gradesspecified.

2. Provide designated labels on shop drawings as required by certification program.3. Provide designated labels on installed products as required by certification program.


123600 - 220181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

4. Submit certifications upon completion of installation that verifies this work is in compliancewith specified requirements.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,

in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limitsrecommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products underenvironmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 COUNTERTOPS

A. Quality Standard: Premium Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI(NAAWS), unless noted otherwise.

B. Natural Quartz and Resin Composite Countertops: Sheet or slab of natural quartz and plasticresin over continuous substrate.1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm), minimum.2. Natural Quartz and Resin Composite Sheets, Slabs and Castings: Complying with ISFA

3-01 and NEMA LD 3; orthophthalic polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments;homogenous, non-porous and capable of being worked and repaired using standardwoodworking tools; no surface coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness.a. Manufacturers:

1) Basis of Design: Dupont; Zodiaq, www.zodiaq.na.dupont.com.(a) Color and Pattern: As indicated on drawings.

2) Seieffe Corporation; OKITE®: www.okite.us/#sle.3) Terrazzo & Marble Supply Companies; Diresco Belgium Quartz, a brand of

Diresco - North America: www.tmsupply.com/#sle.4) Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

b. Factory fabricate components to the greatest extent practical in sizes and shapesindicated; comply with the MIA Dimension Stone Design Manual.

c. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Polished.d. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full custom line.

3. Other Components Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm), minimum.4. Exposed Edge Treatment: Built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) thick; edge profile as

indicated on drawings; use marine edge at sinks.5. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top; minimum 4 inches (102 mm)

high.6. Skirts: As indicated on drawings.7. Fabricate in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), Section

11 - Countertops, Premium Grade.C. Natural Quartz and Resin Composite Wall Panels: Sheet or slab of natural quartz and plastic

resin over continuous substrate.1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick.2. Natural Quartz and Resin Composite Sheets, Slabs and Castings: Complying with ISFA

3-01 and NEMA LD 3; orthopthalic polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments;homogenous, non-porous and capable of being worked and repaired using standardwoodworking tools; no surface coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness.a. Manufacturers:

1) Basis of Design: Dupont; Zodiaq, www.zodiaq.na.dupont.com.(a) Color and Pattern: As indicated on drawings.

2) Seieffe Corporation; OKITE®: www.okite.us/#sle.

http://www.isfanow.org/Surfacing-Standards.aspx


































123600 - 320181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

3) Terrazzo & Marble Supply Companies; Diresco Belgium Quartz, a brand ofDiresco - North America: www.tmsupply.com/#sle.

4) Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.b. Factory fabricate components to the greatest extent practical in sizes and shapes

indicated; comply with the MIA Dimension Stone Design Manual.c. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Polished.d. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full custom line.

2.02 MATERIALSA. Wood-Based Components:

1. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.2. Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile (805 km) radius of the project site.

B. Plywood for Supporting Substrate: PS 1 Exterior Grade, A-C veneer grade, minimum 5-ply;minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick; join lengths using metal splines.

C. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer ofmaterials being joined.

2.03 FABRICATIONA. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush.

1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer.2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch (25 mm) except where top butts

against cabinet or wall.3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or

unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes.B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise

indicated.1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof

glue.2. Height: 4 inches (102 mm), unless otherwise indicated.

C. Wall-Mounted Counters: Provide skirts, aprons, brackets, and braces as indicated on drawings,finished to match.


A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets

are installed in proper locations.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level;shim where required.

B. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces.3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Variation From Horizontal: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), maximum.B. Offset From Wall, Countertops: 1/8 inch (3 mm) maximum; 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) minimum.























































123600 - 420181101 - CORFS-6+8-BA

April 18, 2019

C. Field Joints: 1/16 inch (__ mm) wide, maximum.3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly.3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION














APPENDIX A

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS REPORT

Prepared by:


Richmond, Virginia, 23225 Phone: 804-716-0560

July 2, 2019

City of Richmond, Special Capital Projects 900 East Broad St. Room 602 Richmond, Virginia 23219

ATTN: Mr. Anthony Jones Project Manager

Re: Previous Asbestos Survey Verification City of Richmond, Fire Station #8, Bathroom Alterations 1018 Williamsburg Rd, Richmond, Virginia 23231 FEI Project Number: FEI-19SPEC250

Dear Mr. Jones:

France Environmental, Inc. (FEI) has completed the visual inspection for potential asbestos-containing building materials that may be impacted during the planned bathroom renovation at Fire Station #8. FEI’s scope of work included verifying the materials identified in an asbestos survey, dated November 17, 2006, and comparing it to the planned renovation work as described in the Architectural Demolition Plan, dated March 29, 2019, to determine if any identified asbestos-containing building materials could potentially be disturbed during the planned renovation project. Mr. Michael D. Allshouse (Virginia Asbestos Inspector License Number 3303003902) conducted the fieldwork on May 31, 2019.

FEI did not identify any exposed or accessible materials not previously sampled in the original survey report. Some of the previously identified asbestos-containing materials (ACM) have been removed, while others are still in place. The following identified exposed ACM is expected to be impacted during this renovation project based on the drawings reviewed:

• Textured Ceiling Plaster

The contractor should also be aware of potential hidden materials that may be uncovered during the renovation project. Potential hidden asbestos-containing materials (ACM) the contractor may encounter may include, but not limited to, the following building materials:

• Pipe Insulation Located Above Plaster Ceiling (Previously identified exposed ACM PipeInsulation has already been removed from the bathrooms since identified in the 2006Asbestos Survey Report).

• Adhesive / Mastic Associated with Bathroom Fixtures Such as Mirrors• Tar Paper / Mastic Under Ceramic Tiles

Should any materials be encountered which might contain asbestos, the contractor should stop work immediately and notify the City Representative who in turn would contract a licensed asbestos inspector to sample the materials to determine the asbestos content.

City of Richmond – Fire Station #8, Bathroom Alterations – Asbestos Survey Review Page 2 FEI Project Number: FEI-19SPEC250 7/02/2019

Photographs of existing conditions and a copy of the original survey report is attached for your reference. Should you have any questions or require additional information, please contact us at (804) 716-0560. Respectfully Submitted, FRANCE ENVIRONMENTAL, INC. Micheal D. Allshouse Michael E. Leonard Asbestos Inspector Senior Project Manager Attachments:

PHOTOGRAPHS

Photograph No. 1Asbestos-Containing Ceiling Plaster - Current Site Conditions

(MS Group 05)


(MS Group 05)

Fire Station # 8, Bathroom Alterations1018 Williamsburg Rd, Richmond, VA Photo Log Page 1 of 4

Photos Collected: 5/31/19FEI Project: FEI-19SPEC250


(MS Group 05)


(MS Group 05)



Photograph No. 5Exposed Asbestos Pipe Insulation & Mudded Joint Packings Referenced In 2006 Report Have

Been Removed. These Materials May Be Located Above Ceiling Plaster.







Photograph No. 8Potential Asbestos-Containing Adhesive Behind Mirrors (4 Mirrors)



ASBESTOS SURVEY REPORT

APPENDIX B


Prepared by:


Richmond, Virginia, 23225 Phone: 804-716-0560

July 3, 2019 (Amended April 8, 2019)

City of Richmond, Special Capital Projects 900 East Broad St. Room 602 Richmond, Virginia 23219

ATTN: Mr. Anthony Jones Project Manager

Re: Asbestos Abatement Specifications City of Richmond, Fire Station #8, Bathroom Alterations 1018 Williamsburg Rd, Richmond, Virginia 23231 FEI Project Number: FEI-19SPEC250

Dear Mr. Jones:

France Environmental, Inc. (FEI) has completed the Asbestos Abatement Specification for the bathroom renovation project for the above referenced location. Please find enclosed with this letter the Asbestos Abatement Specification Plan, including drawing, for Fire Station #8. An updated survey report has also been developed and should be included in the bid package to the contractors. The owner / architect may consider having the contractors include unit rates for the removal of hidden asbestos-containing materials which we suspect they might run into during the project.

Should you have any questions regarding these specifications or need any additional help, please contact me at (804) 716-0560.

Respectfully Submitted,

FRANCE ENVIRONMENTAL, INC.

Micheal E. Leonard Asbestos Abatement Project Designer

Enclosures: Asbestos Abatement Specification Plan

ASBESTOS ABATEMENT SPECIFICATION

CITY OF RICHMOND, FIRE STATION #8 BATHROOM ALTERATIONS PROJECT

1018 WILLIAMSBURG ROAD RICHMOND, VIRGINIA 23231

PREPARED BY:

7834 FOREST HILL AVE, SUITE 7 RICHMOND, VIRGINIA 23225

(804) 716.0560 (PHONE) (804) 918.7098 (FAX)

_______________________ MICHAEL E. LEONARD

VA ASBESTOS DESIGNER LICENSE #3305000873

FEI PROJECT NO. FEI-19SPEC250

APRIL 18, 2019

ASBESTOS ABATEMENT SPECIFICATION

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 028213 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Part 1 - General ............................................................................................... 028213 - 1 Part 2 - Equipment and Materials .................................................................. 028213 - 6 Part 3 - Execution of Abatement .................................................................... 028213 - 9 SECTION 028216 ASBESTOS AIR MONITORING/TESTING Part 1 - General 1.1 Testing/Air Monitoring ........................................................... 028216 - 1 1.2 Certification of Visual Inspection .......................................... 028216 - 2 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT DRAWING


SECTION 028213 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. RELATED DOCUMENTS: Asbestos Sampling Report, Asbestos Abatement Drawing, and General Provisions of the Contract apply to this work.

B. SCOPE OF WORK: Removals and relocations shall include all work required and

inferred to be consistent with the drawings and as necessary to provide completed work starting with the conditions existing prior to commencing work.

C. SPECIFICATION: This section of the specification covers the removal of asbestos-

containing building materials (ACBM). At all times an Asbestos Abatement Supervisor and Asbestos Project Monitor shall be on site and available while asbestos abatement is taking place. All abatement work shall be done in strict accordance with the specifications. The contractor shall field verify all materials, quantities, locations, and field conditions prior to submitting their bid proposal. Compliance with all applicable Federal, State, and local procedures, and methods for preparation, execution, cleanup, disposal, and safety are absolutely required. This compliance is the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

D. QUANTITIES: The quantities presented in this document or referenced documents are

estimates and shall not be relied upon by the Contractor as the sole source for their bids. The contractor shall field verify all materials, quantities, locations, and field conditions prior to submitting their bid proposal.

E. PROJECT SUMMARY: Building materials determined or assumed to contain asbestos

and scheduled to be abated under the scope of this project include the following:

1. Remove and dispose of asbestos-containing Textured ceiling plaster located in the restroom and shower area. The remaining asbestos-containing textured ceiling plaster located throughout the rest of the building shall remain in place and not disturbed as a part of this renovation project.

2. Remove and dispose of asbestos-containing pipe insulation expected to be found above the plaster ceiling. Exposed asbestos-containing pipe insulation and mudded joint packing (MJP) elbow insulation was previously removed from the bathroom. It is expected that the pipes concealed above the plaster ceiling are still insulated with asbestos insulation.

3. Remove and dispose of assumed asbestos-containing adhesive / mastic that is assumed to be located behind bathroom fixtures such as the mirrors.

1.02 DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish all labor, materials, services, insurance, and equipment in accordance with the most stringent requirements of EPA and OSHA and all other applicable regulatory agencies, to complete the removal of asbestos-containing materials as described in the Summary of Work. Disturbance of asbestos-containing materials (including materials


determined to contain a trace of asbestos) shall only be done by individuals licensed as asbestos-containing Supervisors or Workers by the Virginia Department of Professional Occupational Regulations (DPOR).

1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Pre-work Submittal

1. ABATEMENT PLAN: Submit a drawing (8 ½ x 11) showing the expected set-up of the containment including, but not limited to, decontamination unit(s), barriers, location of negative air machines, routes of removing asbestos-containing waste.

2. SCHEDULE: Submit an expected work schedule showing the number of days for anticipated completion.

3. NOTIFICATION: Submit notices required by federal, state, and local regulations together with proof of timely transmittal to agency requiring the notice.

4. LICENSES: Submit copies of all state and local licenses and permits necessary to carry out the work including but not limited to contractor license, supervisor licenses, and worker licenses.

5. WORKER TRAINING: The Contractor shall submit a list of the persons who will be employed by him and his subcontractors in the removal work. Present evidence that workers have received proper training required by regulations and the medical examinations required by OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101. Distinguish between trained, full-time personnel and "pick-up" labor.

6. EQUIPMENT: Submit manufacturer's certification that vacuums, negative pressure equipment, respirators, and air supply equipment meet all requirements of OSHA and EPA. Include descriptions of any equipment to be employed not previously discussed.

7. NOTICES TO SUPPLIERS: Copies of notices sent to suppliers of rental equipment and vehicles informing them of the nature of the use of their equipment.

8. MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET: Submit a Material Safety Data Sheet, or equivalent for each material proposed for use on the work in accordance with the OSHA Hazard Communication Standard (29 CFR 1910.1200). Include a separate attachment for each sheet indicating the specific worker protective equipment proposed for use with the material indicated and/or manufacturer's specification.

B. Close-Out Submittal

1. Submit copies of the fully completed Waste Shipment Records (WSR) as

documentation of compliance with NESHAP 61.150 (d) (3) and (4). 2. Submit copies of the daily progress log. 3. Submit copies of Visitors' Log. 4. Submit certification that rental vehicles and equipment have received clearance

inspection by Project Superintendent prior to return to Rental Company. 5. Submit OSHA compliance air monitoring records conducted during the work.

1.04 TERMINOLOGY (Definitions)

A. ABATEMENT: Procedure to control fiber release from asbestos-containing building materials.


B. FOR THIS PROJECT:

1. Removal - All herein specified procedures necessary to remove asbestos-containing materials from an area and dispose of the materials at an acceptable site in an acceptable manner.

2. Post-Removal Surface Encapsulation - Procedures necessary to coat surfaces from which asbestos-containing materials have been removed to control any residual fiber release.

3. Abatement Activities - Any activity requiring respiratory protection as per this project manual, which disturbs or has the potential to disturb any asbestos-containing building material. This includes, but is not limited to, the following activities: precleaning, installing polyethylene, ACBM removal, encapsulation, and enclosure.

C. ACBM OR ACM: Asbestos-containing building materials or asbestos-containing

materials. D. AIR LOCK: A system for permitting ingress or egress without permitting air movement

from a contaminated area into an uncontaminated area, typically consisting of two (2) curtained doorways at least three (3) feet apart.

E. AIR MONITORING: The process of measuring the fiber content of a specific volume of air in a stated period of time. For this project, NIOSH Analytical Method 7400 shall be used. When "aggressive" air sampling is specified, blowers/fans are used to disperse settled fibers into the air during sampling.

F. AMENDED WATER: Water to which a surfactant has been added to reduce water surface tension and thereby provide a more rapid penetration.

G. AUTHORIZED VISITOR: The Building Owner, the Building Owner's representative or a representative of any regulatory or other agency having jurisdiction over the project.

F. BARRIER: Any surface that inhibits air and fiber movement from the work area to non-work areas. Can be comprised of one or a combination of several materials, including but not limited to plywood, polyethylene sheeting, duct tape, and spray-poly. A critical barrier is one that seals any opening (such as doorways, vents, windows, penetrations) between the work area and non-work area.

G. BUILDING OWNER: The Owner or authorized representative. H. CURTAINED DOORWAY: Device to allow ingress or egress from one room to another

while permitting minimal air movement between the rooms, typically constructed by placing three overlapping sheets of opaque 6-mil polyethylene over an existing or temporarily framed doorway, securing each along the top of the doorway, securing the vertical edge of one sheet along one vertical side of the doorway, and securing the vertical edge of the other sheet along the opposite vertical side of the doorway.

I. DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE SYSTEM: A series of connected rooms, with air

locks between any two adjacent rooms, for the decontamination of workers and/or materials and equipment, constructed or moved onto site.

J. EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION UNIT: Decontamination enclosure system for

materials and equipment, typically consisting of a designated area of the work area


(wash-down station), a washroom, a holding room, a container room, and an uncontaminated area.

K. GROSS ABATEMENT AREA: An asbestos removal area that is sealed and fully

contained in polyethylene. Workers enter the abatement area through a decontamination enclosure system.

L. PERSONNEL DECONTAMINATION UNIT: A decontamination enclosure system for

workers, typically consisting of a designated area of the work area (gross contaminant removal station), an equipment room, an air lock, a shower, an air lock, and a clean room.

1. Equipment Room: A contaminated area or room in the personnel decontamination

enclosure system with provisions for storage of contaminated clothing and equipment.

2. AIR LOCK 3. Shower Room: A room between the two (2) air locks in the personnel

decontamination enclosure system with hot and cold running water suitably arranged for complete showering during decontamination.

4. AIR LOCK 5. Clean Room: An uncontaminated area or room that is part of the worker

decontamination unit with provisions for storage of workers' street clothes and protective equipment.

M. FIXED OBJECT: A unit of equipment or furniture in the work area that cannot be

removed from the work area without dismantling. N. HEPA FILTER: A high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter capable of trapping and

retaining 99.97% of asbestos fibers greater than 0.3 microns in length. O. HEPA VACUUM EQUIPMENT: High efficiency particulate air filtered vacuuming

equipment with a filter system capable of collecting and retaining asbestos fibers. Filters should be of 99.97% efficiency for retaining fibers greater than 0.3 microns in length.

P. NEGATIVE AIR PRESSURE EQUIPMENT: A local exhaust system, capable of

maintaining constant, low velocity airflow through the Decontamination Unit and into the Work Area from adjacent uncontaminated areas and exhausting that air outside the building through HEPA filters.

Q. NIOSH: National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health. R. ON-SITE REPRESENTATIVE: Owner's full-time representative responsible for air

monitoring and site observation. Also referred to as Project Monitor. S. PLASTICIZING: Procedures necessary using polyethylene sheeting, adhesives, and/or

taping to seal an area airtight. T. POST REMOVAL ENCAPSULATION: A liquid material which can be applied to surfaces

from which asbestos-containing materials have been removed to control the possible release of residual asbestos fibers, either by creating a membrane over the surface (bridging encapsulant) or by penetrating into the material and binding its components (penetrating encapsulant).


U. SURFACTANT: A chemical wetting agent added to water to improve penetration, thus reducing the quantity of water required for a given operation or area.

V. WET CLEANING/WIPING: The process of eliminating contamination from building

surfaces and objects by using cloths, mops, or other cleaning tools which have been dampened with water, and by afterwards disposing of these cleaning tools as asbestos-contaminated waste.

1.05 CODES AND REGULATIONS

A. GENERAL APPLICABILITY OF CODES, REGULATIONS, AND STANDARDS: Except to the extent that more explicit or more stringent requirements are written directly into the contract documents, all applicable codes, regulations, and standards have the same force and effect (and are made a part of the contract documents by reference) as if copied directly into the contract documents, or as if published copies are bound herewith.

B. FEDERAL REGULATIONS: Those which govern asbestos abatement work or hauling and disposal of asbestos waste materials include but are not limited to the following:

1. US Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, (OSHA),

including but not limited to:

a. Asbestos Regulations - Title 29, Part 1910, Section 1001 of the Code of Federal Regulations

b. Respiratory Protection - Title 29, Part 1910, Section 134 of the Code of Federal Regulations

c. Construction Industry - Title 29, Part 1926, Section 1101 of the Code of Federal Regulations

d. Access to Employee Exposure & Medical Records - Title 29, Part 1910, Section 20 of the Code of Federal Regulations

e. Hazard Communication - Title 29, Part 1910, Section 1200 of the Code of Federal Regulations

f. Specifications for Accident Prevention Signs and Tags - Title 29, Part 1910, Section 145 of the Code of Federal Regulations

2. US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) including but not limited to:

Worker Protection Rule 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart G CPTS 62044, FLR 2843-9 Federal Register, Vol. 50, No. 134, 7/12/85 P28530-28540

a. Regulation for Asbestos - Title 40, Part 61, Subpart A of the Code of Federal

Regulations b. National Emission Standard for Asbestos - Title 40, Part 61, Subpart M of the

Code of Federal Regulations including Asbestos NESHAP Revision; Final Rule, Federal Register; Tuesday, November 20, 1990.

c. Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA) - 40 CFR Part 763

3. US Department of Transportation (DOT) including but not limited to:


a. Hazardous Substances: Final Rule - Regulation 49 CFR, Parts 171 and 172

C. STATE AND LOCAL REGULATIONS: Abide by all state and local regulations which govern asbestos abatement work or hauling and disposal of asbestos waste materials, including but not limited to:

1. Virginia Department of Labor and Industry

a. Licensed Asbestos Contractor Notification, Asbestos Project Permits, and

Permit Fees Regulations VR 425-01-74

2. Virginia Department of Environmental Quality

a. Solid Waste Regulations VR 672-20-10

D. STANDARDS: Those which discuss asbestos abatement work or hauling and disposal of asbestos waste materials are not limited to the following:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

a. Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, Publication Z9.2-79

b. Practices for Respiratory Protection, Publication Z88.2-80

E. EPA GUIDANCE DOCUMENTS: Those that discuss asbestos abatement work or hauling and disposal of asbestos waste materials are listed below only for the Contractor's information. These documents do not describe the work and are not a part of the work of this contract.

1. Guidance for Controlling Asbestos-Containing Materials in Buildings (Purple Book)

EPA560/5-85-024. 2. Asbestos Waste Management Guidance EPA 530-SW-85-007.

1.06 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT PHASING

A. Asbestos abatement work shall be scheduled and coordinated with the General Contractor and Owner’s Project Monitor. A minimum of 48-hours’ notice shall be provided to the Project Monitor prior to mobilization. No abatement activities shall take place without the knowledge of the Owner’s Project Monitor. To do so would be a breach of contract.

PART 2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 2.01 PERSONNEL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Prior to commencement of work, the workers shall be instructed and shall be knowledgeable on the hazards of asbestos exposure, use and fitting of respirators, protective clothing, decontamination procedures, and all aspects of asbestos work procedures; workers shall have medical examinations.


B. The Contractor acknowledges that he alone is responsible for enforcing personnel protection requirements and that these specifications provide only a minimum acceptable standard for each phase of operation.

C. Provide workers with personally issued and marked respiratory equipment approved by

NIOSH and accepted by OSHA. D. Where not in violation of NIOSH and OSHA requirements, the contractor shall provide, as

a minimum, the following respirator protection for each phase of operation:

1. Precleaning/Wet Wiping of Area: No respiratory protection is required in this phase.

2. Plastic Installation: No respiratory protection is required in this phase. 3. Asbestos Removal: MSHA/NIOSH half-face dual cartridge respirators equipped

with HEPA cartridges. If removal solvents are to be utilized on site, appropriate respiratory protection is required in accordance with the manufactures recommendation.

4. Plastic Removal: MSHA/NIOSH half-face dual cartridge respirators equipped with HEPA cartridges.

5. Loading Waste Material on Truck (outside work area): MSHA/NIOSH half-face dual cartridge respirators equipped with HEPA cartridges.

6. Unloading Bags at Landfill: MSHA/NIOSH half-face dual cartridge respirators equipped with HEPA cartridges.

E. The above schedule is the minimum respiratory protection acceptable. Should any

condition, for any reason, be encountered where the exposure level, after application of the appropriate protection factor of the respiratory equipment in use, exceeds 0.01 f/cc, substitute respiratory equipment with protection factors that reduce worker exposure levels below 0.01 f/cc.

F. No visitors shall be allowed in work areas, except as authorized by the Owner.

G. Provide workers with sufficient sets of disposable protective full-body clothing. Such

clothing shall consist of full-body coveralls, footwear, and headgear as manufactured by Kimberly Clark "Kleenguard", one-piece coveralls or equal. Provide eye protection and hard hats as required by applicable safety regulations. Reusable type protective clothing and footwear intended for reuse shall be left in the Contaminated Equipment Room until the end of the asbestos abatement work at which time shall be disposed of as asbestos waste. Disposable clothing shall not be allowed to accumulate and shall be disposed of as contaminated waste.

H. Provide authorized visitors, including the Owner’s Project Monitor, with suitable protective

clothing, headgear, footwear, and gloves as described above whenever they are required to enter the work area.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Deliver all materials in the original packages, containers, or bundles bearing the name of the manufacturer and the brand name.

1. Store all materials subject to damage off the ground, away from wet or damp

surfaces, and under cover sufficient to prevent damage or contamination.


2. Damaged or deteriorating materials shall not be used and shall be removed from the premises. Material that becomes contaminated with asbestos shall be disposed of in accordance with applicable regulations.

B. PLASTIC SHEETING: Flame retardant polyethylene sheeting shall be used where

applicable to comply with fire code requirements. C. TAPE: Capable of sealing joints of adjacent sheets of polyethylene and for attachment of

polyethylene sheets to finished or unfinished surfaces of dissimilar materials and capable of adhering under both dry and wet conditions, including use of amended water, duct tape, poly prep tapes or approved equal.

D. ADHESIVES: Capable of sealing joints of adjacent sheets of polyethylene and for

attachment of polyethylene sheet to finished or unfinished surfaces of dissimilar materials and capable of adhering under both dry and wet conditions, including use of amended water.

E. CAULKS: Not Applicable. F. SURFACTANT: Shall consist of 50% polyoxyethylene ether and 50% of polyoxyethylene

ester, or equivalent, and shall be mixed with water to provide a concentration of one ounce of surfactant to 5 gallons of water. Use "Aqua-Gro" by Aquatrols Corp. of America, Pennsauken, New Jersey, or approved equal. Prior to bidding, the Contractor shall be responsible for verifying that this surfactant is compatible with the materials to be removed and their substrates. If found to be incompatible, the Contractor shall supply suitable wetting agents at no extra cost to the Owner.

G. IMPERMEABLE CONTAINERS: Suitable to receive and retain any asbestos-containing

or contaminated materials until disposal at an approved site. The containers shall be labeled in accordance with OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1926.1101 and NESHAP Regulation 40 CFR 61, Subpart M. Containers must be both air and watertight and must be resistant to damage and rupture.

H. WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS: As required by OSHA regulations 29 CFR 1926.1101.

I. GLOVE BAGS: Safe-T-Strip as manufactured by Asbeguard Equipment, Inc., 130 Esna

Park Drive, Markham, Ontario, Canada, L3R 1E3, Profo-Bag as manufactured by Asbestos Control Technology, Inc., P. O. Box 183, 38 North Pine Avenue, Maple Shade, New Jersey, 08052, or approved equal.

J. ENCAPSULANTS: American coatings Corporation, Cable Coating 22P, penetrating

encapsulant; Better Working Environments, Inc., removal encapsulant; and Cable Coating 2B, bridging encapsulant, as applicable, or approved equal.

K. MASTIC REMOVER: Shall be commercially available product formulated for the removal

of mastics, shall have closed cup flashpoint of 140 degrees F. or higher, (NFPA Class III), shall contain no chlorinated compounds, and shall contain no compounds which could render the waste as hazardous waste for disposal. Products which meet these requirements include, but are not limited to De-Solv-It, and ADL-1 by Orange-Sol; Foster 32-69 by H.B. Fuller Company; Sentinel 7200 Mastic Remover by Sentinel Chemical Company; Certane 77 by Certified Technologies Corporation; and Orange Stuff by I. Scheid, Inc.


L. OTHER MATERIALS: Provide all other materials, such as, but not limited to lumber, plywood, nails, and hardware, which may be required to properly prepare and complete this project.

2.03 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Provide suitable tools for asbestos removal.

1. Water Sprayer: Airless or a low-pressure sprayer for amended water application as applicable.

2. Air-Purifying Equipment: High Efficiency Particulate Air Filtration Systems (HEPA) shall comply with ANSI Z9.2-79. No air movement system or air equipment should discharge asbestos fibers outside the work area. Thus, the negative air unit shall be equipped with a three filter bank with the last being the HEPA filter capable of removing 99.97% of fibers >0.3 u (microns).

3. Paint/Encapsulant Sprayer: Airless. 4. Scaffolding: As required to accomplish the specified work and meet all applicable

safety regulations. 5. Vacuums: Use HEPA type such as Nilfisk GA 73, or approved equal. 6. Other tools and equipment as necessary.

PART 3 EXECUTION OF ABATEMENT 3.01 POSTING OF THE PROJECT

A. Post caution signs in and around the work area to comply with OSHA regulation 29 CFR 1926.1101 and in compliance with all other Federal, State, and local requirements.

B. As required by OSHA regulations 29 CFR 1926.1101, warning shall bear the following

information: DANGER

ASBESTOS



RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING

ARE REQUIRED IN THIS AREA C. Remove signs upon completion of abatement.

3.02 WORK AREA PREPARATION – WORK BY OWNER

A. Before the work is begun, and unless otherwise specified, the Owner shall remove from work areas, all removable items and equipment from the work area. Owner shall later replace furniture and movable objects only after the Project Monitor specifies the area is safe for reoccupancy.


3.03 WORK AREAS - WORK BY CONTRACTOR

A. Preclean fixed objects within the work area, first using HEPA vacuum equipment and then wet cleaning methods as appropriate. Mechanical and/or electrical equipment which is still operable and used to run the daily operations of the building systems shall not be included in the work area. This equipment shall be properly vented in accordance with the manufacture’s specifications.

B. The Contractor may use existing electrical service to the building for temporary electrical

power during abatement work. C. Prior to commencing abatement work, the Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to

shut down and isolate heating, cooling, and ventilating air systems to prevent contamination and fiber dispersal to other areas of the building. Seal any vents within the work area with tape and 6-mil plastic sheeting.

D. Clean work areas where debris or visible dust is present. Clean the work area first using

HEPA vacuum equipment and then wet cleaning methods as appropriate. Do not use methods that raise dust, such as dry sweeping or vacuuming with equipment not equipped with HEPA filters. Do not use HEPA vacuum equipment on wet surfaces unless units are specially constructed for wet/dry use. Do not use amended water on gypsum board or other material that would be damaged by the wetting agent. HEPA vacuum or damp sponge with regular water would be appropriate.

E. Seal off all openings, including but not limited to windows, corridors, doorways, skylights, ducts, grilles, diffusers, and any other penetrations of the work areas, with 6-mil plastic sheeting sealed with tape (Critical Barriers).

F. Prepare areas undergoing abatement in accordance with the following requirements.

1. Textured Ceiling Paint: The textured ceiling plaster shall be abated while under a full negative pressure containment with a Decontamination Enclosure System as described in Section 13280, Paragraph 3.4. The negative pressure containment shall consist of critical barriers over windows, doors, and openings (i.e. HVAC diffusers, returns, exhaust fans, etc.). Two (2) layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheeting shall be installed on the walls and floors. Use additional layer(s) of polyethylene sheeting or other protective materials on floors as necessary to protect floors from damage. Any asbestos-containing pipe insulation or adhesive behind bathroom fixtures shall be removed within the negative pressure containment used for the ceiling plaster abatement. Material shall be removed in accordance with Section 13280, Paragraph 3.12.

G. Maintain and mark emergency exits from the work areas, or establish alternate exits

satisfactory to the local fire marshal. 3.04 DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE SYSTEMS

A. GENERAL: The Contractor shall use portable decontamination units acceptable to EPA and OSHA, connected to the work area with framed-in or accordion tunnels, if necessary,


and line the tunnels with plastic, sealed with tape at all joints in the plastic, or shall construct decontamination units on-site.

B. ACCESS: In all cases, access to contained areas shall be through an air lock. In all

cases, access between any two rooms within the decontamination enclosure system shall be through an air lock.

C. WORKER DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE SYSTEM: Construct a worker decontamination enclosure system contiguous to the work area consisting of three totally enclosed chambers as follows:

1. An equipment room with two (2) curtained doorways, one to the work area and one

to the shower room, via an air lock. 2. A shower room with two (2) curtained doorways, one to the equipment room and

one to the clean room, via air locks. The shower room shall contain at least one shower with hot and cold or warm water with individual shut-off valves inside the showers. Careful attention shall be paid to the shower enclosure to insure against leakage of any kind. Ensure a supply of soap at all times in the shower room. Drainage from showers shall be disposed of as contaminated water or filtered as specified below.

3. Waste water containing asbestos, including drainage from decontamination showers, shall be either disposed of as contaminated waste or filtered in accordance with federal, state, and local requirements prior to introduction into the sanitary sewer system.

4. A clean room with one curtained doorway into the shower (via an air lock) and one entrance or exit to noncontaminated areas of the building. The clean room shall have sufficient space for storage of the workers' street clothes, towels, and other noncontaminated items.

D. EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE SYSTEM: Provide or construct an

equipment decontamination enclosure system consisting of two totally enclosed chambers as follows:

1. A washroom, constituting an air lock, with a curtained doorway to a designated

area of the work area and a curtained doorway to the holding area. 2. A holding area, constituting an air lock, with a curtained doorway to the washroom

and a curtained doorway to the uncontaminated area. 3. Contractor may elect to construct equipment decon unit on side of equipment room

of worker decontamination unit.

3.05 MAINTENANCE OF DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURES

A. At the beginning of each work shift and throughout removal, all seals and curtained doorways shall be inspected, and if not found in proper condition, repaired immediately.

B. Respiratory equipment shall be cleaned, repaired, and sanitized after each use. C. Soap and shampoo shall be in the showers at all times. D. Fresh towels shall be available at all times. E. All areas shall be kept clean and in order.


F. Provide a disposal bag for contaminated filters in the shower room. G. Provide storage for wet and dry towels. H. Ensure that the drainage filtering systems are kept clean and operable at all times. I. At the end of each decontamination period, the shower, air locks, and clean room shall

be cleaned and dried.

J. At the end of each work shift: the two air locks and the shower shall be thoroughly disinfected; the filter bag (if applicable) shall be returned to the equipment room for disposal; the equipment room and first air lock shall be thoroughly HEPA vacuumed and wet cleaned.

3.06 WORKER PROTECTION

A. All workers and authorized personnel, in order to enter the work area, shall:

1. Don protective clothing (coveralls, gloves, boots, etc.). Two suites may be worn in lieu of a shower facility.

2. Don the appropriate respiratory protection, following all training procedures and manufacturer's instructions. Hood shall be worn over respirator straps.

B. All workers and authorized personnel, in order to leave the work area, shall:

1. Remove gross (visible) contamination from themselves and their equipment with

the use of a HEPA Vacuum. 2. Respirator still in place, remove the exterior suit and move to the clean area. 3. Remove the second suit and return respirator to the storage area. 4. No smoking, eating, or drinking shall be allowed inside the work area.

3.07 FIRE EXITS

A. Designate and maintain emergency and fire exits from the work area in accordance with local codes and regulations. All exits shall be clearly marked with fluorescent tape or red enamel and shall be clearly visible from any part of the work area.

3.08 LOCATION AND ACTIVATION OF NEGATIVE AIR PRESSURE

A. Maintain negative pressure system in the work areas during all asbestos abatement work for which gross abatement techniques are specified or required.

B. Comply with Paragraph J.2 of the EPA document, Guidance for Controlling Friable

Asbestos-Containing Materials in Buildings, June 1985. C. Provide one spare exhaust unit per three units at all times. Spare exhaust units shall be

of the same size and capacity as the largest operating units.


D. Suspend electrical cords off the floor and out of workers' way to protect the cords from damage from traffic, sharp objects, and pinching. Do not fasten cords with staples, and do not hang cords from nails or suspend with wire.

E. Provide number of exhaust units in each work area to provide one air change every 15 minutes in all locations of the work areas.

F. Locate units so that make-up air enters the work area primarily through the

decontamination facility and traverses the work area as much as possible. Use Section J.3 of the EPA document, Guidance for Controlling Friable Asbestos-Containing Materials in Buildings, "Purple Book", June 1985. It is recommended units be relocated, within the work area, during the removal process to ensure proper air changes within the immediate work area.

G. Provide additional make-up air openings as shall be necessary to effectively move air

through the work area and to avoid creating too high a pressure differential that would damage or cause "blown-in" of temporary barriers and plastic coverings. Provide inlets by making openings in the plastic sheeting near the ceiling and as far as possible from the exhaust units. Provide self-closing polyethylene flaps over the openings to prevent backflow of air from the contained area to the outside.

H. Provide minimum number of auxiliary make-up air openings to maintain negative

pressure. A negative pressure in excess of 0.02 inches of water differential shall be maintained.

I. Vent all exhaust units to the outside of the building. Provide flexible or rigid duct as

necessary to provide exterior venting and proper location of exhaust units. Ducts shall be completely sealed, in good repair, and protected from possible damage within the work area.

J. After the work area has been prepared, the decontamination facility set up, and the

exhaust units installed, start the units (one at a time if more than one is provided). Visually check the direction of air movement through the openings in the barriers, and verify movement of air in all locations of the work areas by use of ventilation smoke tubes. Adjust the location of exhaust units, or provide additional exhaust units for the work area if the test indicates inadequate or improper air movement.

K. After removal has begun, maintain operation of exhaust units continuously to maintain a

constant negative pressure until decontamination of the work area is complete. Do not turn units off at the end of the work shift or when removal operations temporarily stop.

L. Change filters in exhaust units in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and

Paragraph J.3.2.2.1 of the EPA document, Guidance for Controlling Friable Asbestos-Containing Materials in Buildings, "Purple Book", June 1985 or when there is obvious loss of negative pressure.

M. When a final inspection and the results of the final air monitoring tests indicate an

acceptable level of airborne fibers, remove and dispose of prefilters and shut off the exhaust units. If the exhaust units are to be used in another work area, leave the final filter in place and seal all intake openings to the unit to prevent contamination due to asbestos fibers collected on the final filter. If the exhaust units are not to be used in other work areas, remove the final filter and dispose of as contaminated waste.


N. If dismantling operations result in visible dust on surfaces, replace filters, restart exhaust units, reclean surfaces and perform additional area air monitoring (at Contractor's expense) until the level of airborne fibers is acceptable as specified.

O. Dispose of all filters as asbestos-contaminated waste material as specified.

3.09 EQUIPMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURES

A. Clean external and internal surfaces of all nonfixed equipment and/or objects by thoroughly wet wiping and/or rinsing, before moving such items into the Equipment Decontamination Unit for final cleaning and removal to uncontaminated areas.

B. Objects and equipment removed shall be stored in areas designated by the Owner.

3.10 VISUAL INSPECTIONS

A. Upon completion of each phase of work area activities and before the next phase work activities are to begin, notify the Project Monitor that the work area is ready for inspection.

B. The Contractor shall not begin the next work activities until the Project Monitor has

inspected the area and any deficiencies have been corrected. C. The Project Monitor with the Contractor present will perform the following minimum

schedule of inspections.

1. Prior to the initiation of any site activities. 2. After work area preparation with plastic sheeting and prior to start of abatement. 3. After fine cleaning and before encapsulation. 4. After Final Clearance and all barriers are removed.

3.11 GROSS REMOVAL OPERATIONS

A. Any housings, grills, vents, or penetrations concealing asbestos-containing materials shall be removed to provide access to the materials.

B. Spray asbestos-containing materials with amended water, using spray equipment

capable of providing a “mist” application to reduce the release of fibers. Saturate the material sufficiently to wet it to the substrate without causing excessive dripping. The use of high RPM power equipment, pressure washers, or hydroblasters shall not be acceptable. Remove the saturated asbestos material in small sections from all areas. Material shall not be allowed to dry before placing in sealable polyethylene bags of 6-mil minimum thickness. All material shall be removed thoroughly and totally. Nylon fiber brushes shall be used to clean asbestos fibers from rough surfaces. No asbestos-containing material is to remain for any reason. Any contaminated material capable of puncturing the polyethylene bags shall be packaged separately.

C. Maintain work areas free of accumulated asbestos-containing materials at all times.

Keep waste materials wet until enclosed in sealed plastic bags.


D. Seal all polyethylene bags airtight. Move the bagged material to the wash-down station adjacent to the equipment decontamination enclosure. Once inside the washroom, the bags shall be wet cleaned or HEPA vacuumed and passed into the holding room. Single bagged material shall be placed in a clean bag or into a lined drum. At no time shall a removal worker pass the curtained doorway between the holding room and the container room.

E. Ensure all disposal containers are properly labeled in conformance with 29 CFR 1926.1101 and 40 CFR 61. Refer to Section 13280, Paragraph 1.5 - Codes and Regulations of this section.

F. The Contractor shall mobilize truck and/or dumpster to entrance of staging area to load

out asbestos-containing materials (double bagged). This load out procedure shall be conducted in a manner to avoid public view. The Contractor shall maintain this load out practice at all times during load out.

3.12 ASBESTOS FLOOR TILE REMOVAL (NOT USED) 3.13 DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING WASTE MATERIALS.

A. As the work progresses, and to prevent exceeding available storage capacity on site, workers from uncontaminated areas in full protective clothing and dual cartridge respirators shall enter the equipment decontamination unit and place the appropriate supply of specified containers within the container room. Workers in the holding room shall be passed empty containers for receiving bagged material. Full sealed containers from the holding room shall be passed back into the container room for storage. Ensure all curtained doorways are closed. Ensure that all containers are sealed properly before removing for transport and disposal. At no time shall a removal worker pass the curtained doorway between the holding room and the container room. Drums will not be required if Contractor uses sealed bins or enclosed trucks to store and transport double-bagged waste. Approval must be obtained from the Asbestos Designer prior to employment of this method.

1. LABEL REQUIREMENTS: Provide labels affixed to all asbestos waste containers:

a. Warning labels as required by OSHA regulation 40 CFR 1926.1101 as follows:

DANGER

CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS

MAY CAUSE CANCER

CAUSES DAMAGE TO LUNGS

DO NOT BREATHE DUST

AVOID CREATING DUST

b. Informational labels as required by NESHAP regulation 40 CFR 61, Subpart M

with the name of the waste generator and the location at which the waste was


generated. If handwritten, use, at a minimum, indelible ink to legibly record the required information.

B. Vehicles used for transporting asbestos-containing materials to disposal sites shall have

a completely enclosed, lockable storage compartment if drum requirement is to be deleted. Storage compartments shall be plasticized and sealed with a minimum of one (1) layer of 6-mil polyethylene on the sides and top and two (2) layers of 6-mil polyethylene on the floor. The compartments shall be thoroughly wet cleaned and/or HEPA vacuumed following the disposal of each load of material at the dumpsite. At the conclusion of the project (or before transport vehicles are used for other purposes), the polyethylene shall be properly removed and disposed of as contaminated waste. After this is accomplished, compartments shall once again be wet cleaned and/or HEPA vacuumed in order to eliminate all debris prior to reuse of the vehicles. Rented vehicles shall receive clearance inspection prior to being returned to the rental company. All plastic sheeting, tape, cleaning material, including mops and sponges, clothing, filters, and all other contaminated disposable materials shall be packaged, labeled, and disposed of as asbestos-containing waste.

1. TRANSPORT SIGN REQUIREMENTS: Provide signs during waste transport and

disposal as follows:

a. As required by the US Department of Transportation, 49 CFR 171 and 172, warning signs shall display the following:

RQ HAZARDOUS

SUBSTANCE

SOLID, NOS

ORM-E, NA 9188

(ASBESTOS)

b. As required by NESHAP, 40 CFR 61, Subpart M, mark vehicle used to

transport asbestos-containing waste material during the loading and unloading of the waste so that the signs are visible as follows:

DANGER

ASBESTOS DUST HAZARDS



C. Dispose of materials at an authorized disposal site in accordance with the requirements

of federal, state, and local disposal authorities.


3.14 GROSS CLEANUP

A. Remove all visible accumulations of asbestos-containing materials and debris by HEPA vacuums, sponging, etc. Wet clean all surfaces within the work area.

B. The entire work area shall be totally, visibly clean. The Contractor shall notify the

Owner’s Certified Industrial Hygienist/Project Monitor of the time the work area will be subject for visual inspection. This inspection shall be certified by the Contractor and will be verified by the representative using the "Certification of Visual Inspection" found in the Testing Section.

3.15 POST-REMOVAL ENCAPSULATION OF AFFECTED AREAS

A. The work area shall have passed visual inspection prior to post-removal encapsulation. B. An approved encapsulant shall be applied, using airless spraying equipment, to all areas

of the project where asbestos-containing materials have been removed. Encapsulant shall be colored for ready visibility.

C. ENCAPSULANTS

1. The encapsulant shall be compatible with the replacement paint. 2. If any encapsulant is incompatible with the substrate, the Contractor shall be fully

responsible for providing an alternate encapsulant that is compatible, at no additional cost to the Owner.

3. Upon completion of encapsulation of surfaces from which asbestos has been removed, the Contractor shall inform the on-site representative that the area is ready for compliance monitoring.

3.16 RE-ESTABLISHMENT OF OBJECTS AND SYSTEMS

A. Fixtures, equipment, or objects relocated by the contractor to storage areas designated by the Owner shall be reestablished under this contract as to their exact position and material shape. Contractor assumes full responsibility for damage to objects on premises.



SECTION 028216 ASBESTOS AIR MONITORING/TESTING

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 TESTING/AIR MONITORING

A. Throughout the entire removal and cleaning operations, air monitoring will be conducted by an accredited Project Monitor to ensure Contractor compliance with EPA and OSHA regulations, excluding personnel samples required by OSHA, and any additional applicable state and local government regulations. Air monitoring results gathered by the Owner’s Project Monitoring Firm will not be used by the Contractor to verify OSHA compliance. Air monitoring for OSHA compliance by the Contractor shall be conducted according to the method prescribed by 29 CFR 1926.1101, Appendix A or applicable state or local regulations.

B. Air monitoring shall be conducted by a Project Monitor licensed by the Virginia Department of

Professional and Occupational Regulation pursuant to the requirements of Title 54.1, Chapter 5 of the Code of Virginia.

C. Air monitoring will be performed by an independent firm. Selection of and payment to the

Project Monitoring Firm will be made by the Owner.

D. The Abatement Contractor shall be responsible for providing personal monitoring of his employees as per OSHA 1926.1101.

E. Monitoring Prior to Actual Removal: The environmental health testing laboratory will provide

area monitoring and establish the reference baseline ambient fiber concentrations 24 hours prior to the masking and sealing operations for each removal site. A volume of air sufficient to obtain a limit of quantification of 0.01 fibers/cc shall be secured. Field blanks shall be secured in accordance with the latest revision of the NIOSH 7400 Method.

F. Monitoring During Asbestos Removal: The Project Monitor will provide environmental and

work area monitoring, for the Owner, during exposure to airborne concentrations of asbestos. 1. If monitoring outside the asbestos control area shows airborne concentrations

exceeding the reference baseline ambient fiber concentration and is due to the abatement contractor’s work practices or breach in the containment, the Contractor shall stop all work, notify the Owner immediately, identify and correct the condition(s) causing the increase.

G. Monitoring Results During Asbestos Abatement: PCM fiber counting shall be completed and

results reviewed by the Project Monitor within 24 hours after conducting sampling. The Project Monitor shall notify the Contractor and the Owner immediately of any exposures to asbestos fibers greater than or equal to 0.01 fibers/cc.

1. The services of a testing laboratory will be employed by the Owner’s Project Monitor to

perform laboratory analysis of the air samples. A microscope and technician will be set up at the job site, or samples will be sent daily to a laboratory, so that written reports on air samples can be obtained within 24 hours of conducting sampling.


H. Final Compliance Monitoring: Final Compliance Monitoring shall be conducted in accordance

with the Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA) Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA) and these specifications. Analysis of samples taken after final cleanup shall be by Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM). The Owner’s Project Monitor will conduct final air clearance monitoring. Sampling shall start after the following:

1. HEPA vacuuming and wet cleaning of all surfaces of the work area must have been

conducted. 2. All visible accumulations of asbestos-containing waste material must have been

removed from the work area, as determined by the Owner’s Certified Industrial Hygienist/Project Monitor.

3. First polyethylene layer must have been removed from walls and floors. 4. Completion of a satisfactory visual inspection by the Project Monitor. 5. The area completely covered by a spray encapsulant. 6. All surfaces within the regulated area shall be completely dry, spray applied

encapsulant shall be completely dry.

a. Clearance Criteria: All samples will have a concentration of airborne fibers at or below 0.01 fibers/cc by Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM). If the final clearance samples do not meet the minimum clearance requirements, re-cleaning and re-sampling must be accomplished. The Abatement Contractor shall pay for the additional cost of re-sampling and re-analysis. The method of sampling and analysis will be the same as that used for the first set of samples.

1.02 CERTIFICATION OF VISUAL INSPECTION

A. The following Certification of Visual Inspection shall be completed by the Contractor and Project Monitor following completion of removal work, cleanup, and his/her visual inspection of the work area. The Certification of Visual Inspection shall be provided to the Owner upon completion of the job.


CERTIFICATION OF VISUAL INSPECTION

Building: Project Number: Specific Area: In accordance with Section 13280 - Asbestos Abatement, the Contractor hereby certifies that he has visually inspected the work area (all surfaces including pipes, beams, ledges, walls, ceiling and floor, decontamination unit, sheet plastic, etc.) and has found no dust, debris, or residue. By: (Signature) Date: (Print Name) Title: ______________ Company Name: _______________________________________ ABATEMENT INSPECTOR’S CERTIFICATION The Abatement Inspector hereby certifies that he has accompanied the Contractor on his visual inspection and verifies that this inspection has been thorough and to the best of his knowledge and belief, the Contractor's certification above is a true and honest one. The final air sampling has been completed and the sample results are in accordance with the Contract Documents. The final air samples were analyzed by: PCM or TEM. Clearance air sample numbers are: By: (Signature) Date: (Print Name) Title: Final Air Clearance Passed the Clearance Criteria of (<0.01 f/cc) by PCM Analysis: Final Air Clearance Passed the Clear. Criteria of (<70 structures/mm2) by TEM Analysis: Final Air Clearance Failed the Clearance Criteria of (>0.01 f/cc) by PCM Analysis: Final Air Clearance Failed the Clear. Criteria of (>70 structures/mm2) by TEM Analysis:


Asbestos Specific Notes:

Remove / Dispose of Asbestos-Containing Textured Ceiling Plaster.

Remove / Dispose of Asbestos-Containing Pipe Insulation Expected To Be Above Ceiling.

Remove / Dispose of Assumed Asbestos-Containing Mirror Mastic / Adhesive.

Asbestos Scope of Work Drawing

City of Richmond, Fire Station #8Bathroom Alterations Project

1018 Williamsburg Rd, Richmond, Virginia FEI Proj: FEI-19SPEC250

April 18, 2019

2

Asbestos General Notes:

1. Locations of Asbestos-Containing Materials (ACM) are approximate. Contractor shall field verify all locations and quantities of materials to be removed.

1

3

21

3

21

BATHROOM

COR Fire Station #8 Bathroom AlterationFrance Environmental 7834 Forest Hill Avenue Richmond,...

Documents

Transcript of COR Fire Station #8 Bathroom AlterationFrance Environmental 7834 Forest Hill Avenue Richmond,...